Chap-23 DC-9

CHAPTER 23
COMMUNICATIONS
CHECK TABLE OF
CONTENTS FOR
AIRCRAFT EFFECTIVITY
CODE
NORTHWEST
DC9 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION SECTION
SUBJECT CODE PAGE DATE SUBJECT CODE PAGE DATE
10 102 JUN 03/02

23 CONTENTS 22 101 JUN 03/02
1 NOV 19/02 22 102 JUN 03/02
2 MAY 24/05 22 103 JUN 03/02
3 NOV 19/02 24 101 JUN 03/02
4 NOV 19/02 24 102 JUN 03/02
5 NOV 19/02 29 101 JUN 03/02
6 NOV 19/02 29 102 JUN 03/02
7 NOV 19/02 1 201 JUN 03/02
8 NOV 19/02 1 202 JUN 03/02
9 MAY 09/05
23–19–0
23–00–00 1 1 JAN 28/99
1 1 JUN 03/02 1 2 JAN 28/99
1 2 JUN 03/02 1 3 JAN 28/99
1 3 JUN 03/02 1 4 JAN 28/99
2 1 JUN 03/02 1 5 JAN 28/99
2 2 JUN 03/02 1 6 JAN 28/99
7 1 JUN 03/02 1 7 JAN 28/99
7 2 JUN 03/02 1 8 JAN 28/99
7 3 JUN 03/02 1 9 JAN 28/99
8 1 JUN 03/02 1 10 JAN 28/99
8 2 JUN 03/02 1 11 JAN 28/99
8 3 JUN 03/02 1 12 JAN 28/99
10 1 JUN 03/02 1 13 JAN 28/99
10 2 JUN 03/02 1 14 JAN 28/99
10 3 JUN 03/02 1 15 JAN 28/99
20 1 JUN 03/02 1 16 JAN 28/99
20 2 JUN 03/02 1 17 JAN 28/99
20 3 JUN 03/02 1 18 JAN 28/99
21 1 JUN 03/02 1 19 JAN 28/99
21 2 JUN 03/02 1 20 JAN 28/99
21 3 JUN 03/02 1 21 JAN 28/99
96 1 JUN 03/02 1 22 JAN 28/99
96 2 JUN 03/02 1 23 JAN 28/99
96 3 JUN 03/02 1 24 JAN 28/99
2 101 JUN 03/02 1 25 JAN 28/99
2 102 JUN 03/02 1 26 JAN 28/99
2 103 JUN 03/02
7 101 JUN 03/02 23–19–11
7 102 JUN 03/02 1 401 APR 23/02
7 103 JUN 03/02 1 402 APR 23/02
7 104 JUN 03/02 1 403 APR 23/02
7 105 JUN 03/02 1 404 APR 23/02
10 101 JUN 03/02 1 405 APR 23/02
CHAPTER 23
Page 1
MAY 31/05
NORTHWEST
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION SECTION
1 406 APR 23/02 10 2 JUN 03/02

10 3 JUN 03/02
1 601 JUN 24/99 20 1 JUN 03/02
20 2 JUN 03/02
23–19–17 20 3 JUN 03/02
1 401 NOV 02/96 20 4 JUN 03/02
1 402 NOV 02/96 96 1 JUN 03/02
1 403 NOV 02/96 96 2 JUN 03/02
1 404 NOV 02/96 96 3 JUN 03/02
1 405 NOV 02/96 96 4 JUN 03/02
1 406 NOV 02/96 96 5 JUN 03/02
23–19–34 23–20–00
1 401 NOV 02/96 1 101 JUN 03/02
1 402 NOV 02/96 1 102 JUN 03/02
1 403 NOV 02/96 6 101 JUN 03/02
6 102 JUN 03/02
23–19–35 6 103 JUN 03/02
1 401 NOV 02/96 6 104 JUN 03/02
1 402 NOV 02/96 6 105 JUN 03/02
1 403 NOV 02/96 6 106 JUN 03/02
6 107 JUN 03/02
6 108 JUN 03/02
23–19–36 6 109 JUN 03/02
1 401 NOV 02/96 6 110 JUN 03/02
1 402 NOV 02/96 6 111 JUN 03/02
1 403 NOV 02/96 6 112 JUN 03/02
6 113 JUN 03/02
23–19–41 6 114 JUN 03/02
1 401 AUG 21/02 6 115 JUN 03/02
1 402 NOV 02/96 6 116 JUN 03/02
9 101 JUN 03/02
23–20–00 9 102 JUN 03/02
2 1 JUN 03/02 9 103 JUN 03/02
2 2 JUN 03/02 9 104 JUN 03/02
2 3 JUN 03/02 9 105 JUN 03/02
2 4 JUN 03/02 9 106 JUN 03/02
5 1 JUN 03/02 9 107 JUN 03/02
5 2 JUN 03/02 9 108 JUN 03/02
5 3 JUN 03/02 9 109 JUN 03/02
5 4 JUN 03/02 9 110 JUN 03/02
7 1 JUN 03/02 9 111 JUN 03/02
7 2 JUN 03/02 9 112 JUN 03/02
7 3 JUN 03/02 9 113 JUN 03/02
10 1 JUN 03/02 9 114 JUN 03/02
CHAPTER 23
Page 2
MAY 31/05
NORTHWEST
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION SECTION
15 101 JUN 03/02 96 503 JUN 03/02

15 102 JUN 03/02 96 504 JUN 03/02
15 103 JUN 03/02 96 505 JUN 03/02
15 104 JUN 03/02
15 105 JUN 03/02
15 106 JUN 03/02 23–20–01
15 107 JUN 03/02 1 101 JUN 11/02
15 108 JUN 03/02 1 102 JUN 11/02
15 109 JUN 03/02 1 103 JUN 11/02
15 110 JUN 03/02 1 104 JUN 11/02
15 111 JUN 03/02 1 105 JUN 11/02
15 112 JUN 03/02 1 106 JUN 11/02
15 113 JUN 03/02 1 107 JUN 11/02
15 114 JUN 03/02 1 108 JUN 11/02
18 101 JUN 03/02 1 109 JUN 11/02
18 102 JUN 03/02 1 110 JUN 11/02
18 103 JUN 03/02 1 111 JUN 11/02
18 104 JUN 03/02 1 112 JUN 11.02
18 105 JUN 03/02 1 113 JUN 11/02
18 106 JUN 03/02 1 114 JUN 11/02
18 107 JUN 03/02 2 101 JUN 11/02
18 108 JUN 03/02 2 102 JUN 11/02
18 109 JUN 03/02 2 103 JUN 11/02
18 110 JUN 03/02 2 104 JUN 11/02
18 111 JUN 03/02 2 105 JUN 11/02
18 112 JUN 03/02 2 106 JUN 11/02
18 113 JUN 03/02 2 107 JUN 11/02
18 114 JUN 03/02 2 108 JUN 11/02
18 115 JUN 03/02 2 109 JUN 11/02
96 101 JUN 03/02 2 110 JUN 11/02
96 102 JUN 03/02 2 111 JUN 11/02
96 103 JUN 03/02 2 112 JUN 11/02
96 104 JUN 03/02 2 113 JUN 11/02
96 105 JUN 03/02 2 114 JUN 11/02
96 106 JUN 03/02 2 115 JUN 11/02
96 107 JUN 03/02 2 116 JUN 11/02
96 108 JUN 03/02 2 117 JUN 11/02
96 109 JUN 03/02 2 118 JUN 11/02
96 110 JUN 03/02 2 119 JUN 11/02
96 111 JUN 03/02 2 120 JUN 11/02
96 112 JUN 03/02
96 113 JUN 03/02 23–20–02
1 201 AUG 06/02 1 201 JUN 11/02
96 501 JUN 03/02 1 202 JUN 11/02
96 502 JUN 03/02 96 201 JUN 11/02
CHAPTER 23
Page 3
MAY 31/05
NORTHWEST
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION SECTION
96 202 JUN 11/02 23–31–00

1 501 JUN 11/02 96 1 JUN 11/02
96 501 JUN 11/02 96 2 JUN 11/02
96 3 JUN 11/02
23–20–03 1 201 JUN 11/02 96 4 JUN 11/02
1 202 JUN 11/02 96 5 JUN 11/02
1 203 JUN 11/02 96 6 JUN 11/01
1 204 JUN 11/02 96 7 JUN 11/02
1 205 JUN 11/02 23–31–00 6 101 JUN 11/02
1 206 JUN 11/02 6 102 JUN 11/02
1 207 JUN 11/02 96 101 JUN 11/02
1 208 JUN 11/02 91 501 JUN 11/02
1 209 JUN 11/02 91 502 JUN 11/02
1 210 JUN 11/02 91 503 JUN 11/02
1 211 JUN 11/02 91 504 JUN 11/02
1 212 JUN 11/02 91 505 JUN 11/02
1 213 JUN 11/02 91 506 JUN 11/02
1 601 JUN 11/02 91A 501 JUN 11/02
91A 502 JUN 11/02
23–26–00 91A 503 JUN 11/02
1 1 JUN 11/02 91A 504 JUN 11/02
1 2 JUN 11/02 91A 505 JUN 11/02
1 3 JUN 11/02 91A 506 JUN 11/02
1 4 JUN 11/02 96 501 JUN 11/02
1 101 JUN 11/02 96 502 JUN 11/02
1 102 JUN 11/02 96 503 JUN 11/02
1 103 JUN 11/02 96 504 JUN 11/02
1 104 JUN 11/02 96 505 JUN 11/02
1 105 JUN 11/02 96 506 JUN 11/02
1 106 AUG 06/02 96 507 JUN 11/02
1 501 JUN 11/02 97 501 JUN 11/02
1 502 JUN 11/02 97 502 JUN 11/02
1 503 JUN 11/02 97 503 JUN 11/02
1 504 JUN 11/02 97 504 JUN 11/02
1 505 JUN 11/02 97 505 JUN 11/02
1 506 JUN 11/02 97 506 JUN 11/02
97 507 JUN 11/02
23–26–01 98 501 JUN 11/02
1 401 JUN 11/02 98 502 JUN 11/02
1 402 JUN 11/02 98 503 JUN 11/02
98 504 JUN 11/02
23–26–02 98 505 JUN 11/02
1 401 JUN 11/02 98 506 JUN 11/02
1 402 JUN 11/02 98 507 JUN 11/02
99 501 JUN 11/02
CHAPTER 23
Page 4
MAY 31/05
NORTHWEST
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION SECTION
99 502 JUN 11/02 10 1 JUN 12/02

99 503 JUN 11/02 10 2 JUN 12/02
99 504 JUN 11/02 10 3 JUN 12/02
99 505 JUN 11/02 13 1 JUN 12/02
99 506 JUN 11/02 13 2 JUN 12/02
99 507 JUN 11/02 13 3 JUN 12/02
99A 501 JUN 11/02 13 4 JUN 12/02
99A 502 JUN 11/02 13 5 JUN 12/02
99A 503 JUN 11/02 96 1 JUN 12/02
99A 504 JUN 11/02 96 2 JUN 12/02
99A 505 JUN 11/02 96 3 JUN 12/02
99A 506 JUN 11/02 96 4 JUN 12/02
96 5 JUN 12/02
23–31–01 2 101 JUN 12/02
1 201 JUN 11/02 3 101 JUN 12/02
96 101 JUN 12/02
23–31–02 5 201 JUN 12/02
96 201 JUN 11/02 5 202 JUN 12/02
96 202 JUN 11/02 8 201 JUN 12/02
8 202 JUN 12/02
23–31–03 96 201 JUN 12/02
96 1 JUN 11/02 96 202 JUN 12/02
96 401 JUN 11/02
96 501 JUN 11/02 23–40–01
96 701 JUN 11/02 1 201 JUN 12/02
2 201 JUN 12/02
23–31–05
1 401 JUN 11/02 23–40–02
1 402 JUN 11/02 1 201 JUN 12/02
1 202 JUN 12/02
23–40–00
2 1 JUN 12/02 23–40–03
2 2 JUN 12/02 1 401 JUN 12/02
2 3 JUN 12/02 1 402 JUN 12/02
2 4 JUN 12/02 1 501 JUN 12/02
4 1 JUN 12/02 1 502 JUN 12/02
4 2 JUN 12/02 1 503 JUN 12/02
4 3 JUN 12/02
4 4 JUN 12/02 23–40–04
4 5 JUN 12/02 1 201 JUN 12/02
5 1 JUN 12/02 1 202 JUN 12/02
5 2 JUN 12/02
5 3 JUN 12/02 23–50–00
5 4 JUN 12/02 1 1 JUN 12/02
5 5 JUN 12/02 1 2 JUN 12/02
CHAPTER 23
Page 5
MAY 31/05
NORTHWEST
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION SECTION
1 3 JUN 12/02 96 201 JUN 12/02

1 4 JUN 12/02
2 1 JUN 12/02 23–50–02
2 2 JUN 12/02 1 201 JUN 12/02
2 3 JUN 12/02 1 202 JUN 12/02
2 4 JUN 12/02 96 201 JUN 12/02
6 1 JUN 12/02
6 2 JUN 12/02
6 3 JUN 12/02 23–50–03
6 4 JUN 12/02 1 201 JUN 12/02
8 1 JUN 12/02 1 202 JUN 12/02
8 2 JUN 12/02
8 3 JUN 12/02 23–50–04
13 1 JUN 12/02 1 201 JUN 12/02
13 2 JUN 12/02 1 202 JUN 12/02
13 3 JUN 12/02 4 201 JUN 12/02
13 4 JUN 12/02 4 202 JUN 12/02
96 1 JUN 12/02
96 2 JUN 12/02 23–60–00
96 3 JUN 12/02 96 1 NOV 10/04
96 4 JUN 12/02 96 2 NOV 10/04
96 5 JUN 12/02 96 3 NOV 10/04
96 6 JUN 12/02
1 101 JUN 12/02 23–60–00
1 102 JUN 12/02 1 101 JUN 12/02
1 103 JUN 12/02 1 102 JUN 12/02
1 104 JUN 12/02 1 103 JUN 12/02
1 105 JUN 12/02 1 104 JUN 12/02
1 106 JUN 12/02 1 105 JUN 12/02
1 107 JUN 12/02 1 106 JUN 12/02
1 108 JUN 12/02 1 107 JUN 12/02
3 101 JUN 12/02 1 108 JUN 12/02
3 102 JUN 12/02 1 401 NOV 10/04
3 103 JUN 12/02 1 402 NOV 10/04
5 101 JUN 12/02 1 403 NOV 10/04
5 102 JUN 12/02 1 404 NOV 10/04
96 101 JUN 12/02 1 405 NOV 10/04
96 102 JUN 12/02 1 501 NOV 10/04
1 201 JUN 12/02 1 502 NOV 10/04
2 201 JUN 12/02 1 503 NOV 10/04
96 201 JUN 12/02 1 601 NOV 10/04
23–70–00
23–50–01 96 1 JUN 12/02
4 201 JUN 12/02 96 2 JUN 12/02
CHAPTER 23
Page 6
MAY 31/05
NORTHWEST
CHAPTER CHAPTER
SECTION SECTION
96 3 JUN 12/02
97 1 JUN 12/02
97 2 JUN 12/02
97 3 JUN 12/02
96 101 JUN 12/02
96 102 JUN 12/02
96 201 MAY 09/05
96 202 MAY 09/05
96 203 MAY 09/05
96 204 MAY 09/05
23–70–04
96 201 JUN 12/02
CHAPTER 23
Page 7
MAY 31/05
NORTHWEST
CHAPTER 23 – COMMUNICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
Subject Subject Page Code Effectivity
GENERAL 23–00–00
Description and Operation 1 10 9138
2 9150–9156
7 9601–9623
8 9750–9763,
9851–9885
7 9886
8 9902–9926
7 9927–9929
21 9930–9933
1 9935–9938
10 9940–9941
2 9942
8 9943–9944
7 9945–9949
10 9950–9980
20 9981
8 9982–9987
7 9988–9995
8 9996–9998
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
Troubleshooting 101 7 9138
10 9150–9156
7 9601–9623
29 9750–9763,
9851–9884
10 9885
7 9886
29 9902–9922
22 9923–9926
10 9927–9929
24 9930–9933
7 9935–9941
2 9942
29 9943–9944
10 9945–9949
7 9950–9980
22 9981
29 9982–9987
10 9988–9998
Maintenance Practices 201 1 ALL
Page 1
23–CONTENTS NOV 19/02
NORTHWEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
CLAIRCOM TELEPHONE SYSTEM 23–19–00

Description and Operation 1 1 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9998
ANTENNA– PASSENGER TELEPHONE

UHF/L–BAND
Removal and Installation 23–19–11 401 1 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9998
Antenna Inspection/Check 601 1 ALL
HANDSET–PASSENGER TELEPHONE 23–19–17

Removal and Installation 401 1 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9998
POWER SUPPLY UNIT–

PASSENGER TELEPHONE 23–19–34
9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9998
BASEBAND UNIT–
9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9998
RADIO FREQUENCY UNIT–(RFU)

9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9998
Page 2
23–CONTENTS MAY 24/05
NORTHWEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR OUTPUT(ECO) BOX 23–19–41

9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9998
VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF) 23–20–00

7 9150–9156
20 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9926
7 9927–9929
5 9930–9941
2 9942
20 9943–9944
7 9945–9949
5 9950–9980
20 9981–9987
7 9988–9995
20 9996–9998
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
6 9150–9156
1 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9884
6 9885
1 9886,
9902–9926
6 9927–9929
15 9930–9933
1 9935–9938
9 9940–9941
18 9942
1 9943–9944
6 9945–9949
9 9950–9980
1 9981–9987
6 9988–9995
9 9996–9998
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
Adjustment/Test 501 96 ALL
Page 3
NORTHWEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
COAX CABLE TEST USING
TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER 23–20–01
Troubleshooting 101 1 ALL (1502 Tester)
101 2 ALL (1502C Tester)
VHF NAVIGATION/COMMUNICATION
CONTROL PANELS 23–20–02
Maintenance Practices 201 1 ALL W/O
EO2310–01039
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
Adjustment/Test 501 1 ALL W/O
EO2310–01039
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
VHF ANTENNA 23–20–03

Antenna Inspection/Check 601 1 ALL
ACARS 23–26–00
Description and Operation 1 1 ALL
Troubleshooting 101 1 ALL
ACARS MANAGEMENT UNIT 23–26–01

Removal/Installation 401 1 ALL
ACARS CONTROL UNIT 23–26–02

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 23–31–00

Troubleshooting 101 6 ALL W/O
EO 2310–01039
96 ALL WITH EO
2310–01039
Adjustment/Test 501 91 9138
91A 9150–9156
96 9601–9623
97 9750–9763
98 9851–9886
99 9902–9926
99A 9927–9929
99 9930–9944
99A 9945–9949
99 9950–9987
99A 9988–9998
Page 4
NORTHWEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
PUBLIC ADDRESS AMPLIFIER 23–31–01

PUBLIC ADDRESS RELAY AND

INTERLOCK PANEL 23–31–02
CABIN SPEAKERS/TRANSFORMERS 23–31–03

Adjustment/Tests 501 96 ALL
Cleaning/Painting 701 96 ALL
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM HANDSET 23–31–05

INTERPHONE 23–40–00
10 9150–9156
4 9601–9623
5 9750–9763
13 9851–9886
5 9902–9922
4 9923–9926
10 9927–9929
4 9930–9938
5 9940–9941
2 9942
4 9943–9944
10 9945–9949
5 9950–9980
4 9981
5 9982–9987
10 9988–9998
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
Page 5
NORTHWEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
INTERPHONE (cont) 23–40–00

3 9150–9156
2 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9884
3 9885
2 9886
2 9902–9926
3 9927–9929
2 9930–9944
3 9945–9949
2 9950–9987
3 9988–9998
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
Maintenance Practices 201 5 9138

8 9150–9156
5 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9884
8 9885
5 9886,
9902–9926
8 9927–9929
5 9930–9944
8 9945–9949
5 9950–9987
8 9988–9998
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
Page 6
NORTHWEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
INTERPHONE AMPLIFIER 23–40–01

2 9150–9156
1 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9884
2 9885
1 9886,
9902–9926
2 9927–9929
1 9930–9941
2 9942
1 9943–9944
2 9945–9949
1 9950–9987
2 9988–9998
PILOT’S CALL BELL 23–40–02

MECHANIC CALL HORN 23–40–03

SERVICE INTERPHONE/PA HANDSET 23–40–04

AUDIO INTEGRATING 23–50–00

8 9150–9156
13 9750–9763,
9851–9878
6 9880–9884
8 9885
6 9886
13 9902–9922
1 9923–9926
8 9927–9929
1 9930–9941
2 9942
13 9943–9944
8 9945–9949
1 9950–9981
13 9982–9987
8 9988–9998
1 96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
Page 7
NORTHWEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
AUDIO INTEGRATING (cont) 23–50–00
3 9150–9156
1 9750–9763,
9851–9878
5 9880–9884
3 9885
5 9886,
9902–9926
3 9927–9929
5 9930–9944
3 9945–9949
5 9950–9987
3 9988–9998
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
2 9150–9156
1 9601–9623,
9750–9763,
9851–9878
2 9880–9886
1 9902–9926
2 9927–9929
1 9930–9944
2 9945–9949
1 9950–9987
2 9988–9998
201 96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
AUDIO INTEGRATING AMPLIFIER 23–50–01

EO2310–01039
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
AUDIO CONTROL PANELS 23–50–02

EO2310–01039
96 ALL WITH
EO2310–01039
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT SPEAKERS 23–50–03

Page 8
NORTHWEST
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
Section
RADIO INTERPHONE (MICROPHONE)

SWITCH 23–50–04
Maintenance Practices 201 1 9138–9156
4 9601–9623
1 9750–9763,
9851–9886,
9902–9922
4 9923–9926
1 9927–9998
STATIC DISCHARGING 23–60–00
Inspection/Check 601 1 ALL
VOICE RECORDER 23–70–00

Description and Operation 1 96 ALL W/O
EO 2370–01071
1 97 ALL WITH
EO 2370–01071

Removal/Installation Voice Recorder Control Panel 201 96 ALL
Removal/Installation Voice Recorder Unit 202 96 ALL
Adjustment Test Voice Recorder System 202 96 ALL
Four Channel Operational Check w/ Breakout Box 204 96 ALL
UNDERWATER LOCATOR BEACON 23–70–04

Page 9
23–CONTENTS MAY 09/05
NORTHWEST
GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. Description
The communication systems consist of the following:
(1) Very High Frequency (VHF)
(2) Selective Calling (SELCAL)
(3) Public Address
(4) lnterphone
(5) Audio Integrating
(6) Static Discharging
(7) Voice Recorder
The VHF system is used to provide communication facilities between the airplane and a ground station
or another airplane. It operates throughout the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
communications frequency range.
The selective calling (SELCAL) system provides the pilots with visual and aural indications that the
airplane is being called. The system enables ground facilities equipped with the SELCAL
tone-transmitting equipment to call individual airplanes selectively.
The public address system provides a means of making announcements to the passengers. The
announcements are transmitted over speakers located throughout the cabin area.
The interphone system is used to provide intercommunication between the service areas located
throughout the airplane. The system is used during ground servicing and maintenance operations.
The audio integrating system controls and directs the output of the communication and navigation
receivers into the flight crew headsets and speakers, and directs the output of the flight crew microphones
into the communication transmitters. The system is also used for flight crew inter-communication.
The static dischargers dissipate any accumulated static electrical charges with a minimum amount of radio
interference.
The voice recorder preserves an audio tape history of all crew communications and conversation.
Communication equipment located in the flight compartment and the electrical/electronics compartment
is shown in Figure 1 and 3.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 1 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED ON OVERHEAD SWITCH PANEL:
OBSERVER'S AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
MAINTENANCE INTERPHONE SWITCH
MECHANIC CALL SWITCH
PUBLIC ADDRESS VU METER
ATTENDANT'S C A L L SWITCH
PUBLIC ADDRESS SWITCH
RADIO RACK COOLING FAN SWITCH
* NOT INSTALLED ON SERIES LO AIRPLANES
OVERHEAD SWITCH PANEL

I
FLIGHT
OXYGEN MASK OXYGEN MASK
STOWAGE BOX PANELS STOWAGE BOX

AND JACK
AND JACK
Flight Compartment - Communication Equipment

Figure 1
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-00-00 Page 2
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
AFT RIGHT
ST*. 218, RADIO RACK
I
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONES
COMPARTMENT
NAMEPLATE
Electrical/Electronic Compartment - Radio Racks

Figure 2
I I
I 1
1 Forward R i g h t Radio Rack A f t Right Radio Rack I
I I
I
VHF T r a n s c e i v e r s (1) Audio C o n t r o l Panel 1
, I
SELCAL Decoder I
( N o t i n s t a l l e d or1 S e r i e s 1 0 A i r p l a n e s ) I
i
P u b l i c Address A m p l i f i e r I
I
light ~ n t e r p h o n eA m p l i f i e r I
(Audio I n t e g r a t i n g System) 1
I
S e r v i c e Interphone A m p l i f i e r I
(Interphone System) I
P u b l i c Address Relay and
I
I
I n t e r l o c k Panel I
1
Electrical/Electronic Compartment - Communication Equipment

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 1 23-00-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. Description
(2) Public Address
(3) lnterphone
(6) Voice Recorder
The VHF system enables the flight crew to communicate with a ground station or another aircraft. The VHF
system is dual installation designated VHF-1 and VHF-2 which operates within the frequency range of
118.00 to 135.95 megacycles.
interference.
Communication equipment located in the flight compartment and the electrical/electronicscompartment

Effectivity Page 1
CODE 2 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
MECHANIC
CALL SWITCH

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 2 23-00-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. Description
(2) Public Address
(3) lnterphone
(6) Voice Recorder
interference.
The voice recorder preserves an audio tape history of all crew communications and conversations.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 7 23-00-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
MECHAtttC
CALL SWITCH
OBSERVER'S AUDIO
PUBUC ADDRESS SYSTEM
VU M R E R

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 7 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONICS
COMPARTMENT
NAMEPLATE

Figure 2
-- -
I 1
I Forward Right Radio Rack A f t Right Radio Rack I
I I
I
V W - 1 Transceiver (1) Audio Corltrol Panel 1
I
VBF- 2 Tran sceiver 1
I
VHF-3 Transceiver 1
I
P u b l i c Address Fsnplif ier
Interphone A m p l i f i e r (Audio
I n t e g r a t i n g and Interphone
system)

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 7 23-00-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. Description
(2) Public Address
(3) lnterphone
(6) SELCAL (On Aircraft 9880-9885 the SELCAL System is Deactivated.)
(7) Voice Recorder
interference.
The voice recorder preserves an audio tape history of all crew communications and conversations.
Communication equipment located in the flight compartment and the electrical/electronicscompartment

Effectivity Page 1
CODE 8 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
MECHANIC
MAINTENANCE CALL SWITCH
I.
INTERPHONE
SWITCH VOICE RECORDER
I MONITOR
OBSERVER'S AUDIO PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
CONTROL PANEL V U METER

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 8 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NAMEPLATE
ElectricalIElectronic Compartment - Radio Racks

Figure 2
Forward Right Radio Rack Aft Riphk Radio Rack
VHF Transceiver No. 1 (1) Audio Control P a m 1

VHF Transceiver No. 2
Public Addrum Amplifier

Flight Interphons W l i f i e r
(Audio f ntegrmting System)
Service Interplum Amplifier
(Interphone System)
Public Addrm Relay and
Interlock Panel
ElectricalIElectronic Compartment - Communication Equipment

Figure 3
Effectivity
CODE 8 23-00-00 Page 3
J U N 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. Description
A. The communication systems consist of the following:
(3) Public Address and Passenger Entertainment
(4) lnterphone
(7) Voice Recorder
B. The VHF system enables the flight crew to communicate with a ground station or another aircraft. The VHF
system is a dual installation designated VHF-1 and VHF-2 which operates within the frequency range of
C. The selective calling system (SELCAL) provides the pilots with visual and aural indications that the
D. The public address and passenger entertainment system provides a means of making announcements
to the passengers. The announcements are transmitted over speakers located throughout the cabin area.
The system is also used for passenger entertainment by operating the tape player.
E. The interphone system is used to provide intercommunication between the service areas located
F. The audio integrating system controls and directs the output of the communication and navigation
G. The static dischargers dissipate any accumulated static electrical charges with a minimum amount of radio
interference.
H. Communication equipment, located in the flight compartment and the electrical/electronics compartment,
I. The voice recorder preserves an audio tape history of all crew communications and conversation.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 10 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
MAINTENANCE
INTERPHONE
SWITCH
I 7"""" BLlC ADDRESS SYSTEM
(MICROPHONE JACK INSlDO
OBSER~ERIS
CONSOLE

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 10 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NAMEPLATE

Figure 2
I I
I Forward Right Radio Rack A f t Right Radio Rack I
I
VHF-1 Transceiver (1) Audio Control I
I
VHF-2 Transceiver I
1
SELCAL Decoder I
I
Magnetic Tape Player I
I
Public Address Amplifier I
I
Flight Interphone Amplifier I
(Audio Integrating Syster) I
I
S e r v i c e I n t e r ~ h o n eA m ~ l i f i e r I
(Interphone System) I
I
Public Address Relay and I
Interlock Panel I
I
Electrical/Electronics Compartment - Communication Equipment

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 10 23-00-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. Description
(3) Public Address
(4) lnterphone
(7) Voice Recorder
The VHF system is used to provide communication facilities a ground station or another aircraft. The VHF
system is a jual installation designated VHF-1 and VHF-2 which operates throughout the International
Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) communications frequency range.
The selective calling (SELCAL) system provides the pilots with visual and aural indications that the
into the communication transmitters. The system is also used for flight crew intercommunication.
interference.
Effectivity
CODE 20 23-00-00 Page 1
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
YCW*tC
sYW:UI
C*L,
UVERnEAO
FOAW*m O V E I W L U
r n T t i 4 P*lyl .

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 20 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
AFT RIGHT
S T A - , 2 1 7 RADIO RACK
\
TYPICAL
NAMEPLA

Figure 2
. .
I
1 Forward R i g h t Radio Rack A f t R i g h t Radio Rack
I
VHF T r a n s c e i v e r s (1) Audio C o n t r o l Panel

SELCAL Decoder
( N o t i n s t a l l e d on Series 10 A i r p l a n e s )
P u b l i c Address Amplifier
light ~ n t e r p h o n eAmplifier
(Audio I n t e g r a t i n g System)
S e r v i c e Interphone Amplifier
( I n t e r p h o n e System)
P u b l i c Address Relay and
Interlock Panel

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 20 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. Descriution
(3) Public Address
(4) lnterphone
(7) Voice Recorder
The VHF system is used to provide communication facilities between the airplane and a ground station
or another airplane. It operates throughout the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
communications frequency range.
The selective calling system (SELCAL) provides the pilots with visual and aural indications that the
The public address and passenger entertainment system provides a means of making announcements
to the passengers. The announcements are transmitted over speakers located throughout the cabin area.
The system is also used for passenger entertainment by operating the tape player.
interference.
Communication equipment, located in the flight compartment and the electrical/electronics compartment,
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 21 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
MECHANIC
CALL SWITCH
I
MAINTENANCE
INTER PHONE AFT OVERHEAD
SWITCH SWITCH PANEL
\
FLIGHT
FORWARD OVERHEA
SWITCH PANEL
D MICROPHONE
AUDIO AUDIO
CONTROL PANEL CONTROL PANEL

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 21 23-00-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST

Figure 2
I
1 Forward Right Radio Hack Aft Right R a d i o Rack
I
I
VHF Transceivers (1) Audio Control Panel 1
' I
P u b l i c Address Amplifier
Tape Player
F l i g h t Interphone Amplifier
(Audio I n t e g r a t i n g System)
S e r v i c e Interphone Amplifier
(Interphone System)
Public Address Relay and
I n t e r l o c k Panel
Electrical/Electronics Compartment - Communication Equipment

Figure 3
Effectivity
CODE 21 23-00-00 Page 3
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
1. Descri~tion
A. The communication systems consist of the following:
(2) Public Address
(3) lnterphone
(6) Voice Recorder
6. The VHF system enables the flight crew to communicate with a ground station or another aircraft. The VHF
NOTE: A third system, VHF-3, is used for and controlled by ACARS.
C. The public address system provides a means of making announcements to the passengers. The
D. The interphone system is used to provide intercommunication between the service areas located
E. The audio integrating system controls and directs the output of the communication receivers into the flight
crew headsets and speakers, and directs the output of the flight crew microphones into the communication
transmitters. The system is also used for flight crew inter-communication (flight interphone).
F. The static dischargers dissipate any accumulated static electrical charges with a minimum amount of radio
interference.
G. The voice recorder preserves an audio tape history of all crew communications and conversation.
H. Communication equipment located in the flight compartment and the electrical/electronics compartment
shown in Figure 1 and 2.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-00-00 Page 1
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
AFT OVERHEAD
SWITCH PANEL
ATTENDANT
OBSERVER'S CALL SWITCH
AUDIO CONTROL
FORWARD
HEADSET
AUDIO CONTROL AUDIO CONTROL JACK

PANEL PANEL

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 96 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
ELECTRICAUELECTRONIC
NAMEPLATE
I. Forward Right Radio Rack:
(1) VHFICOMM Transceiver No. 1
(2) VHF/COMM Transceiver No. 2
(3) Public Address Amplifier
(4) Flight lnterphone Amplifier (Audio Intergrating System)
(5) Service lnterphone Amplifier (Interphone System)
(6) Public Address Relay and Interlock Panel
Electrical/Electronic Compartment - Communication Equipment - Forward Right Radio Rack

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 96 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
GENERAL - TROUBLE SHOOTING

1. General
A. General trouble shooting provides simplified schematics of various systems of communications.
B. Simplified schematics are used as an aid in trouble shooting in conjunction with effective wiring diagrams.
Effectivity Page 101

CODE 2
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
u u u
Flight lnterphone - Simplified Schematic

Figure 101
CODE 2
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
INTERPHONE
PROVISION FOR I
AMPLIFIER
TAPE PLAYER I
I
I
-
I PASSENGER
le*ssl A~p~FER
PA AMPLIFIER
Passenger Address - Simplified Schematic

Figure 102

CODE 2
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. General

CODE 7 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

Figure 101
CODE 7 23-00-00 J U N 03/02
NORTHWEST
SERVICE
AMPLIFIER
FORWARD
$-AUDIO OUTPUT
W D ATTENDANT 1

Figure 102

CODE 7 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
. A
> OF 5 SWITCHING CODE
~ - --
~ p ~
li-
-COMMON-21 +
VHF- I XH'I- 3 + CAPTAIN'S
COMM-NAV-DME AUDIO PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
:- - POSITION
I SW
I
SECCAL
DECODER
i
TRANSCEIVER
1 7 B A 1 2 A B '
L
1 w-!fl~p~~
1
I I -
SUPPLY 28 V D I
RESONANT
REEDS
VHF - I
COY MUN ICATION
I F R E Q U E N C Y STANDARD C A R D
25KHZ
I
II WJf lo*€
otr VHF-I
RADIO RACK-SHELF 1
WIRING DIAGRAM
1
MP DRIVER SOKHZ VENDER I T E M
TRANSCEIVER COMMUNICA
ANTENNA
L - - - - - - - - - _) 23-52-01
FORWARD RIGHT RADIO RACK-SHELF 3
VHF-1 Communication - Simplified Schematic

Figure 103

CODE 7 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
WARNING
VHF-2 LIGHT
DIMMING SELCAL
COMM-NAV-DYE
CONTROL
CONTROL PANEL
PANEL
20
POSITION - 7
F-*
11
+4 FIRSTOFF
A AUDIO PA
,, OBSERVER'S
AUDIO P A N E L
..-
@-=-=A
4
*
24-
+ RADIO
AUDIO
I I -6
TRANSVEIVER
v o C EYER)
MIXER I
?
MASTER
LO O X
VHF-2
COMMUNICATION
TRANSCEIVER
I
1
1 osc
50KHZ I
VHF-2 Communication - Simplified Schematic

Figure 104

CODE 7 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. General

CODE 10 23-00-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
-S E R V I C E - -504
Tw6 W
I N T E R P H O N E JACKS I
AUDIO P A N E L
JIO-14 JIO-15 JIO-20 JlO-21 JIO-22 JIO-I6 JIO-I7 .lo-19 :z;Jl JIO-12 JIO-13
1
A FT
PEDESTAL
FWD
CARGO
AFT
CARGO
AIRCONOVERTICALRIGHT
COMPT STAB WING
RIGHT
GEAR
LEFT
GEAR
RIGHT
AFT
LEFT
SIO-5
GROUND
POWER
AFT
RIGHT
FORWARD RIGHT R A D I O R A C K - S H E L F - 2 1 FI
D
P A HAND M l C c O M P ~ O M P T FUELING WELL WELL FUSE FUSE MA~NT RECP EOlJIP -1
3 '
I , T - OFF I N 1
-- PANEL
4 -411 CAPT'S
FORWARD E 2 OX~Wh;l~~~ OXY MASK
P A SW l TCH
li OBSERVER'S
- -50-4 AUDIO PANEL
A
R40-26 1
.-
HANGER SWITCH
510-26
1
I P I L O T TO A T T C A L L S W I T C H P I L O T T O MECHANIC
a
51 - 2 0 7
-9"
51-205
ilia
4
PILOT
CALL BELL
n
- 5 0 4
R A D I O RACK'S
AUDIO PANEL
4
C2-I
TYPICAL
CHIMES PASSENGE
C A L L SYSTEM 'I H 2 - I
CHIME
MECHANIC
CALL
C 2 - 2 F A S T E N SEATBEL.
HORN
m I P R O V I S I O N FOR I
PA HAND M I C 14
TAPE PLAYER
I
TAPE P L A Y E R
WIRING OIAGRAMS
23-31-02
23-32-01
JIO-53
R2 8 VDC
PASSENGER
ADDRESS
AMPLIFIER FLIGHT 632-58 -
23-42-01
33 - 2 1 -00
AFT
,.., .,
0-33
SI-211
m3J
-
51 2 0 9
A T T E N D A N T TO ATTENDANT ATTENDANT
CALL SWITCH TO P I L O T
AFT ATTENDANT
VU METERS
TYPICAL SPEAKER
BAGGAGE RACKS

Figure 101
CODE 10
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
B
1. General
Effectivity
CODE 22 23-00-00 Page 101
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
l
Ec
. w
g !?
at:
L .J
f
wrc
t rL< 3

Figure 101
CODE 22
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST

Figure 102

CODE 22
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
Effectivity
CODE 24 23-00-00 Page 101
JUN 03/02
INTERPHONE
AMPLIFIER
O X I MASK
UIC JACK
JIO-4
VHF-2 I-
-i-rsv~c--J
1 FORWARD RIGHT RADIO RaCK-SHELF 2 -
I
CAPTAIN'S
SPEAKER AMPLIFIER
-4
-
-3
I
OVERHEAD C O C K P I T
-
. rU
&d
VOR- I
I VOR-I ADF-I ( ADF-2 1 VOR-2
+ WIRING DlAGR
23-51-01
23-52-08
23-71-01
FILTER C
DUE-2, DUE-I YKR
UKR FIRST OFFICER'S

SPEAKER AMPLIFIER
DUE- I
'IRST O F F I C E R 3 HAYO U I C b d
I
I
-i Y J
OVERHEAD COCKPIT -
Fr
Y2* SEL 21-3VHF-I
130-2 JIO-3
00 0 00 I-
22 -4 V H F - I
R2-8
'70-12
UIC sw GHO
OXY MASK B GRWND PARKING

M IC JACU
JlO-2 4 - 4 VHF-Z I CONTROL
RELAY
BRAKE
VOICE RECORDER
VHF-I +-a f=wIEEm HANOSET
'On
OME
fi:-
t 2P
FIRST OFFICE*.
AUDIO PANEL
MKR + - 5
DUE t -4
C
BSERVER'S HAND MIC r I

MlCR SEL 21- +VHF-I
00 0 00 I
2 2 - I VHF-2
0 x 7 MASK
M I C JACK B 3 - -4 VHF-I RECORDHEADS
MONITOR ERASE
I
4SSI
V H F - l 6 -6
1--it D Y I L Y R Y R D Y 2
ERASE
{z 1;:
--
AOF-I
AUDIO
OME
MUR
DUE
+
C--
-
+ -22
5
4
PANEL PIOUISIONS FOR
'11 ~ 7 1 6 1 2 5 5 ~ 1 7 . 1 1 4 1 3
RADIO RACK 1 I-
21 -4 VHF-I
JIO-10
I
WC-I - - 6
4- -5VHF-2
ADF-I
-
out t
MKR +
PROVISIONS 101
VOICE RECOROER CONTROL PANEL
NORTHWEST
1. General

CODE 29 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

Figure 101
Effectivity
Page 102
CODE 29
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
GENERAL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
A. General maintenance practices provide a guide for safety precautions and a visual inspectionlcheck of
communication system components. Such practices will aid in maintaining the operational integrity of the
equipment.
WARNING: ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT USES VOLTAGES WHICH ARE DANGEROUS TO LIFE. OBSERVE
EVERY PRECAUTION, EVEN WHEN POWER IS OFF.
CAUTION: WHEN DISCONNECTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, USE CAPS OR OTHER SUITABLE

PROTECTION OVER CONNECTORS TO PREVENT ENTRY OF HYDRAULIC FLUID, MOISTURE,
AND OTHER FOREIGN OBJECTS.
2. Safetv Precautions
A. Prior to removallinstallationof any electrically operated component, the applicable circuit breakers should
be opened, then tagged and safetied per customers procedures.
B. Before any procedure that will cause operation of a movable aircraft component, make certain of the
following:
(1) Any obstructions, such as workstands, should be free of the field of operation of the component to
prevent damage to the aircraft.
(2) All personnel working in or about the aircraft should be cognizant of the operation to prevent injury
to personnel.
C. Before ground operation of avionics system components, make certain adequate cooling air is provided
to components to prevent overheating of components.
D. The following is applicable to aircraft with HF antenna installed. When HF system is installed this antenna
is connected to the lightning arrestor and relay unit. If HF system is not installed or the lightning arrestor
and relay unit is removed from the aircraft, an HF antenna shorting strap must be connected to ground
the antenna to the airframe. The strap is provided and is stowed in the tail cone (Ref. Figure 201).
3. Ins~ectionICheckCommunication Equipment
A. Check Communications Equipment
(1) Check equipment for secure mounting and tight connectors.
(2) Check units, connectors, cables, and wires for signs of physical damage.
(3) Check control panels for physical damage, deformed dials or loose knobs, impaired markings,
marred surfaces.
(4) Check jacks for corrosion, rust, loose or broken parts, cracked insulation, bad contacts, or other
irregularities.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-00-00 Page 201
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
CONNECTOR^^\\^
AIR I-.'-' I
CAUTION: LIGHTNING ARRESTOR'AND REUY UNIT TO PREVENT RADIO

INlERFERE)(Cf NOWYAGYETIC
WHENEVER LIGHTNING ARRESTOR AND RELAY UNIT IS W T S SHWU) I USED FOR
REMOYED,lNSTALLHFANTENUSHORTlNGSTRAP ATTACHING FEED THRWCH
RELAY UNIT CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR 'MP
B SHORTING STRAP
I
CONNECTED
/ VIEW B AUTENM~
FEEDTHROUGH
CONNECTOR /FEDTHROUGH
INSTALLED ADJUSTMENT
SHORTING STRAP
STOWED
M2-6177A
Lightning Arrestor and Relay Unit

Figure 201

CODE 1 23-00-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
CLAIRCOM TELEPHONE SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
A. The Claircom system provides public telephone (voice and data) service to passengers throughout North
American airspace. The passenger initiates a phone call by dialing the desired phone number into a
handset. The call is transmitted on the Ultra High Frequency (UHF) band to the nearest ground station
utilizing the North America Telephone System (NATS) radio equipment, via airborne radio equipment
located in the right side wall of the forward cargo bay. The ground station then routes the call to public
switched telephone network (PSTN) at which point the user operates the system in the same way as a
standard pay telephone.
NOTE: Maintenance on this system will be performed by Claircom personnel. Replacement or adjustment of the
system is not to be accomplished by NWA personnel other than removallinstallation of system components
for access during major maintenance. If maintenance is necessary, notify Systems Operations Center
(SOC) at 1-800-532-8562.
2. Component Location
A. The Claircom telephone system Line Replaceable Units (LRU's) are installed in several locations
throughout the aircraft. The main LRU's, which provide the telephone call processing, are installed on the
forward cargo wall on the right side of the aircraft. The telephone system is powered by the aircraft's AC
bus. The interface of power is accomplished by the installation of acircuit breaker in the cockpit's overhead
circuit breaker panel. The Claircom telephone system consists of the following LRU's: (Reference Figure
1-5.)
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Filter
Power Supply Unit (PSU)
BaseBand Unit (BBU)
Radio Frequency Unit (RFU)
2 UHFIL-Band Antennas (2 required.)
Sidewall Disconnect Panels (2 required.)
Electrical Connection (ECO) Boxes and Phone Units (as shown, per aircraft configuration):
DC9-30: 38 ECO Boxes -D93-3100-01 lnstall

DC9-40: 42 ECO Boxes 4 9 4 - 3 1 04-00 lnstall
DC9-50: 48 ECO Boxes 495-3103-01 lnstall
Phone Units
DC9-30: 48 Phone Units (48 operational D93-3100) -01 lnstall

DC9-40: 56 Phone Units (54 operational and 2 pouch phones) -D94-3104-00 lnstall
DC9-50: 66 Phone Units (64 Type 1 handsets and 2 pouch phones) -D95-3103-01 lnstall
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 1
JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
3. Svstem Description
A. Radio Equipment
The radio equipment includes the BaseBand Unit (BBU), Radio Frequency Unit (RFU), Power Supply Unit (PSU),
Electromagnetic lnterference Filter (EMI), and two ultra-high frequency (UHF)/ L-Band Antennas.
Three phase 115 VAC from Bus 1 is supplied through a circuit breaker located on the EPC circuit
breaker panel (position L6 or 229). An Electromagnetic lnterference Filter (EMI) is installed in the 115
VAC line between the circuit breaker and the Power Supply Unit (PSU). The filter prevents EM1 from
entering the PSU via the power supply lines. The EM1 filter is installed in the forward cargo bay wall
on the right side of the aircraft. (See Figure 5.)
The Power Supply Unit (PSU) (reference 23-19-34) supplies regulated direct current (DC) power
to the system. It also provides status monitoring interfaces, fail-safe functions, and voltage transient
protection. The PSU is installed in the forward cargo bay wall on the right side of the aircraft. (See
Figure 5.)
The BaseBand Unit (BBU) (reference 23-1 9-35) performs the following major functions within the
air terminal. The BBU is installed in the forward cargo bay wall on the right side of the aircraft. (See
Figure 5.)
(a) The BBU Interfaces the phone units to the radio channels.
(b) During transmit operations the BBU selects a channel for transmission to a ground station,
performs baseband processing (voice compression and modulation/ demodulation) for that
channel, and upconverts the signal to radio frequency (RF). The BBU also communicates with
the receiving ground station to determine the best power output level.
(c) During receive operations, the BBU downconverts the received signal and routes the signal via
ISDN "S" interface to the appropriate phone unit. The BBU receives channel availability
information on the pilot channel using a channel thread which is not currently occupied by voice
traffic. During voice traffic a low-rate overhead data channel is multiplexed onto traffic channel
by the ground station which carries air terminal transmit power and Doppler frequency
adjustment commands.
(d) The BBU also provides the 10-MHz reference for the air terminal.
The Radio Frequency Unit (RFU) performs the following functions and is installed in the forward cargo
bay wall on the right side of the aircraft (see Figure 5).
(a) Obtains the upconverted 895-MHz signal from the BBU and amplifies it in a solid state power
amplifier (SSPA) for transmission at UHFIL- band antenna.
(b) Receives the 850-MHz signal transmitted from a ground station and passes the signal first
through a low-noise amplifier that increases the power level. The RFU then outputs the signal
to the BBU for down conversion.
(c) Provides filtering to protect against radio frequency interference (RFI).
The UHF/L-Band Antennas (reference 23-1 9-1 1) are 3.5 inch tall omnidirectional blade type
antennas. There are two antennas installed on the lower fuselage (see Figure 5). Both function as
transmit antennas (operating at 895 MHz); one also functions as a receive antenna (operating at 850
MHz).
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
B. In-Cabin Equipment
(1) The in-cabin equipment includes the seatback phone units, and electrical connection (ECO) boxes
which are located throughout the cabin. Additionally, the DC9-40, -50 (Year 2000) configuration
includes console and pouch phone units. (Reference Figure 1,1A, 1B, 2,2A, 2B, 2C.) Each phone
unit provides the following functions:
(a) Voice and modem data services between users and the PSNT (Public Switched Telephone
Network).
(b) A credit card reader for credit card billing.
(c) A three-line liquid crystal display (LCD) that displays call progress messages for the user.
(d) A standard 12 button dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) key pad, along with three special
functions keys and volume control.
(2) Electrical connection boxes (ECO) (reference 23-19-41) convert the phone cable wiring to the
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) wiring used to communicate with the radio equipment.
One ECO is installed for each seat group in the aircraft that will have phone unit(s) installed (see
Figure 1, 1A, 1B, 2, 2A, 2B, 2C). ECO boxes are available in one, two, and three registered jack
(RJ)-45 configurations to accommodate single or multiple phone units is a seat row or for phones
mounted on bulkheads. The ISDN connects the in-cabin equipment to the radio equipment. The
ISDN is subdivided into "S" interfaces (called "S" loops). Each "S" loop can serve up to 8 phone units
via multiple ECO boxes. The "S" loop starts at the junction box and connects to the IN connector on
the ECO box. Another cable connects the out connector of the ECO to the IN connector of another
box up to a maximum of 8 ECO boxes. A terminator is installed on the OUT connector of the last ECO
box in the "S" loop.
(3) A sidewall junction panel is installed on each side of the aircraft between frames. These junction
panels allow for the disconnection of the "S" loops.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 Page 3
JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
FIRST CLASS ROW

3 PHONES INSTALLED 3 PHONES INSTALLED
1 TRIPLE OUTPUT ECO BOX 1 TRIPLE OUTPUT ECO BOX
WITH TERMINATOR WITH TERMINATOR
FIRST CLAS
2 PHONES
1 DUAL OU
FIRST CLASS ROW -,hw,

2 PHONES INSTALLED
1 DUAL OUTPUT ECO BOX
I
I
kr
SIDEWALL DISCONNECT
FIRST CLASS "S" LOOP

FROM SIDEWALL DISCONNECT
FIRST CLASS "S" LOOP I FIRST CLASS SEAT ROW

FROM SIDEWALL DISCONNECT 2 PHONES INSTALLED
SIDEWALL DISCONNECT
I COACH CLASS SEAT ROW
2 PHONES INSTALLED
COACH CLASS SEAT ROW

2 PHONES INSTALLED
1 DUAL OUTPUT ECO BOX - C O A C H CLASS " ? LOOP
-COACH CLASS SEAT ROW

COACH CLASS SEAT ROW 1 PHONE INSTALLED
1 PHONE INSTALLED 1 SINGLE OUTPUT ECO BOX
1 SINGLE OUTPUT ECO BOX
COACH CLASS SEAT ROW 1 \COACH CLASS SEAT ROW

1 PHONE INSTALLED 1 PHONE INSTALLED
1 SINGLE OUTPUT ECO BOX 1 SINGLE OUTPUT ECO BOX
WlTH TERMINATOR
WlTH TERMINATOR
Cabin Components (DC9-30)

Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
COACH CLASS "J' LOOP

COACH CLASS "5" LOOP --/ FROM SIDEWALL DISCONNECT
FROM SIDEWALL DISCONNECT 9

1 PHONE INSTALLED COACH CLASS SEAT ROW
1 SINGLE OUTPUT ECO BOX 1 PHONE INSTALLED
COACH CLASS SEAT ROW 14 COACH CLASS "S" LOOP

1 PHONE INSTALLED FROM SIDEWALL DISCONNECT
WlTH TERMINATOR
15
1 PHONE INSTALLED
16 16 WITH TERMINATOR
COACH CLASS "S' LOOP

17
.COACH CLASS SEAT ROW

1 PHONE INSTALLED PER ROW
18 1 SINGLE OUTPUT ECO BOX

1 PHONE INSTALLED
1 SINGLE OUTPUT ECO B
19 19 COACH CLASS SEAT ROW
1 PHONE INSTALLED
WlTH TERMINATOR
20
COACH CLASS SEAT ROW -

1 PHONE INSTALLED
WlTH TERMINATOR

Figure 1 (Sheet 2 )
Effectivity Page 5
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
CABLE ASSY. (TYP)

SEAT ROW 1
TWO PHONES BACK OF
SEAT ROWS 1 THRU 3 CENTER CONSOLE
DUAL TAP (ECO) BO
FIRST CLASS DIVIDER
OPTIONAL POUCH -
PHONE ASSY. AND
CABLE ASSY.
TWO PHONES BACK OF

SEAT ROWS 5 THRU 7 7
SINGLE TAP (ECO) BOX

TRIPLE TAP (ECO) B
SEAT ROW 8 RH & LH
(SEAT ROWS 1 & 5
LH/RH - 6 & 7 RH)
--

Figure 2 (Sheet 1)
Effectivity Page 6
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST

AND ASSY. (TY P)
ONE PHONE BACK A J$ :

SEAT ROWS 9-1 6 LH &
CENTER RH
. I l l 2
Cabin Components (DC9-40 )

Figure 2 (Sheet 2)
Effectivity Page 7
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
SINGLE TAP (EC

BOX TYPE 1
HANDSET ASSY. 11
SEAT ROWS 17-2

LH & CENTER RH

Figure 2 (Sheet 3)
Effectivity Page 8
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
TWO PHONES BAC

OF SEAT ROW 1-3
- CABLE ASSY (TYP)
SEAT ROW 1 CENTER
CONSOLE LH & RH
DUAL TAP (ECO) BOX
FIRST CLASS DIVIDER
OPTIONAL POUCH
PHONE ASSY
AND CABLE ASSY
TWO PHONES BACK

OF SEAT ROWS 5-7
SINGLE TAP (ECO) TRIPLE TAP (ECO) BOX

SEAT ROW 8 RH & LH SEAT ROWS 1 & 5 LHIRH
6&7RH
"

Figure 3 (Sheet 1)
Effectivity Page 9
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST

AND ASSY. (TYP)
ONE PHONE BACK AT SEAT

ROWS 9-1 6 LH & CENTER RH-

Figure 3 (Sheet 2)
Effectivity Page 10
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST

TYPE 1 HANDSET ASSY
SEAT ROWS 17-26 LH &-

CENTER RH

Figure 3 (Sheet 3)
Effectivity Page 11
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
HANDSET
R-J-45 JACK
ECCI BOX TERMINATOR
Cabin Component Locations (DC9-30)

Figure 4 (Sheet 1)
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 Page 12
JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
- FLOORCABL
TRACK COVER
TAPE (DOUBLEBACKADHESIVE) --/

AND CABLE RACEWAY (CONDUIT)
(100')
Cabin Component Locations (DC9-40 and -50 )

Figure 4 (Sheet 2)
Effectivity Page 13
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
STRINGER 17 A -'
CARPET FOLDED BACK FOR CLARITY

CABUNG AND RACEWAY INSTAUS TIEDOWN STRAP
BENEATH THE CARPET.
SP~RALWRAP (12")
FLOOR CABLE LOOP 2
TAPE (DOUBLE-BACK ADHESIVE)

AND CABLE RACEWAY (CONDUIT)
(100') SEAT TWICK COVER (70') -/'
PLASTIC GROMMET (3")
FORWARD SEAT LEG
-OOR
FLOOR CABLE LOOP 4
CABLE
CABLE
LOOPLOOP B
8
CARPET FOLDED
BACK FOR CLARI
AUDIO MIX (CONDUIT) --/
SEAT TRACK

Figure 4 (Sheet 3)
Effectivity Page 14
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
FORWARD SEAT LEG
SEAT TRACK COVER

TAPE (DOUBLE-BACK ADHESIVE)
CABLE RACEWAY (CONDUIT)
TYPICAL SEAT TO SEAT CABLE ROUTING

LEFT SIDE
Cabin Component Locations (DC9-30,-40,-50)

Figure 4 (Sheet 4)
Effectivity Page 15
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
SEAT TRACK -/
TYPICAL SEAT TO SEAT CABLE ROUTING

RIGHT SIDE

Figure 4 (Sheet 5)
Effectivity Page 16
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
SEE 23-1817 FOR TYPICAL

SEAT BACK PHONE
REMOVAUINSTALLATION
A
SEE 23-19-17 FOR TYPICAL
CONSOLE PHONE INSTALLATION
SEAT ROW 1 ONLY \REF/
6
'
CABIN CARPET
CABIN FLOOR -
SECTION A - A
VIEW LOOKING AFT
FIRST CLASS SEATS
ROWS 1-3
Cabin Component Locations (DC9-40 and -50)

Figure 4 (Sheet 6)
Effectivity Page 17
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
SEE 23-1917 FOR TYPICAL

SEAT BACK PHONE
INSTALLAflONlREMOVAL
CABLE ASSY RJ45RJ11
TIEDOWN STRAP
SEE 23-19-41 FOR

TYPICAL ECO BOX
MOUNTING
CABIN CARPET
CABIN FLOOR -
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
RIGHT SlDE SHOWN - LEFT SlDE OPPOSITE
SECTION B B-
VIEW LOOKING AFT
TOURIST CLASS SEATS
RH SlDE ROW 5 ONLY

Figure 4 (Sheet 7)
Effectivity Page 18
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
SECTION C - C
VIEW LOOKING AFT
TOURIST CLASS SEATS
LH SIDE ROWS 6 & 7

Figure 4 (Sheet 8)
Effectivity Page 19
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST

SEAT BACK PHONE
INSTALLATIONFIEMOVAL
CABLE ASSY RJ45.R J11
TIEDOWN STRAP --,
SEAT TO SEAT CABLE RIGHT SlDE SHOWN
ROUTING /
h
'.
.,
.
. .
!
!
6
\..
'.. .-..- I
'jL.-..J
IM . 5 0 i
SECTION D - D
VIEW LOOKING AFT
TOURIST CLASS SEATS
RH SlDE ROWS 6 & 7

Figure 4 (Sheet 9)
Effectivity Page 20
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST

SEAT BACK PHONE
INSTALLATIOtVREMOVAL
CABIN CARPET
I
-..-
SEE TYPICAL
LEFT SIDE SHOWN SEAT TO SEAT CABLE
ROUTING
SECTION E - E
VIEW LOOKING AFT
TOURIST CLASS SEATS
LH SlDE ROWS 8 - 25

Figure 4 (Sheet 10)
Effectivity Page 21
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST

Figure 4 (Sheet 11)
Effectivity Page 22
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
UPPER EPC L-BAND ANTENNAS

BREAKER PANEL
OR rl fl
I I
1 I
LOWER EPC
BREAKER PANEL LRUs
Radio Component Locations

Figure 5
Effectivity Page 23
CODE 1 JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
12 UNITS 1
ROW-5
-- -- 7
ROW-8
]
8 UNITS-
UNIT/ROW ROW-1 5
I
I U N I T
ROW-16
5 UNITS
~ O W ~
ROW-20
- NC-MURE
CKPTPHONE
PROVISONS
LL-JJ IV
I I I I
DISCONNECT BRACKET
I
'-
I
-.'LVo
RH SIDEWALL DISCONNECT
PSU
UNIT
C23AT-2701 TRAY HARNESS ASSY~
BP
--
P9002
MP
7 I I P9150
STA 148
1 PASSENGER TRMINAL BLOCK
1
C23AF-1110 TELEPHONE ELECT PWR
REF-24-5 1-2 1
2 3 5 2 0 A ~ ~ A P - 1 6 2 1
I I I 5VAC
BUS-I
EPC UPPER CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
D I S C O N W T BRKT
AF-
C23CE3203
ROW4 ROW-20
I UNITIROW 1
ROW 3 SEESHT4 ROW-1 ROW4 ROW-8 6- UNITS
ROW-9 ROW-15
2 UNIT/ROW
3 UNITS-
I 2 UN, 1 UNIT/ROW
I 1 UNITrnOW
1 4 UNITS 3 UNIT: 7 UNITS 1
Telephone System Block Diagram (DC9-30)

Figure 6 (Sheet 1)
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 Page 24
JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
ELECTRICAL POWER CENTER (EPC) CIRCUIT

------------------------
BREAKER PANEL PASSENGER CLAIRCOM LINE REPLACABLE
I - UNITS (LRU)
- RACK - - -
r-- TELEPHONE 1 . LRU INTERCONNECT CABLE ASSEMBLYEM1C23AT-2701
FILTER
IPaWrnilPrn
NIT (PSU)
C23AP-1621 C23AP-1520
- I
I
I
87-10 AVIONICS AC BUS

j I BASE B A N D n P9003
1 : P9008A
STA 280, WL -100, RBL 18
P901R C23AL-1392
HBI b
-
NO 1 L-BAND ANTENNA
STA 289, WL -100 LBL 18

P9017
C2IAL-1392-
P9008B
P9007B ~ P 9 0 0 7 A '1 11
HluH I HANU s l ~ t
C23AF-1113 u
DISCONNECT (STA 320) I C23AF-1110
BBU BLOWER PSUBLOWER I
-------
STA 3 13, WL 4 0 , LBL 50
ECO BOX ECO BOX ' ECO BOX

P9028
- A [ out
P9208
IN
P92 10
-
C IN
NO29 (
IN
(-
STOWED OVERHEAD REAR S

A - FIRST CLASS SEATING ' SELECT SEATING
I- ROW 13 2 I- ROW 14-19
TOURIST CLASS SEATING
J L ROW 20 --I L ROW 21 J I
- ROW 22 --J
I
I
- -
t
-
LEFT HAND SIDE OF AIRCRAFT
I RIGHT HAND SIDE OF AIRCRAFT

FIRST CLASS SEATING
- -
SELECT SEATING - TOURIST CLASS SEATING
ROW 21 ROW 22
. 1.
yaI
ROW-1 7 ROW-2 7 ROW-3 ROW-5 ROW-6 7 r- ROW-7 I- ROW 8-11 7 r ROW 12 7 c ROW 13 -r r R O W 14-19 7 r ROW 20 -I 7 7 7
LEFT HAND SIDEWALL

DISCONNECT
(STA 438) ECO BOX
ECO BOX
Fn 3 ECO BOX-
ECO BOX
ECO BOX ECO BOX
3 ECO BOX
1
C23CE-3209 (LOOP-9) I
FOR (LOOP 1 I ) PHONE SYSTEM
Telephone System Block Diagram (DC9-40) SIMPLIFIED
Figure 6 (Sheet 2) INTERCONNECT
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-0 Page 25
JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
NOTES: (UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)
,
RADIO ALL SEAT TO SEAT CABLES ARE C23CE-3 110
J ? % f
REFERNCE t
/TERMINAL BLOCK
PASSENGER
TELEPHONE
i! SUPPLY UNIT (PSU) UNlT fRFU) ALL ECO TO HANDSET CABLES ARE C23PH-5900
TERMINATION PLUG MATES ON OUTPUT
24-5 1-2 1 C ~ ~ A P 520-
-1
115VAC
C23AP-1520 + P9002
CONNECTOR OF THE ECO BOX.
ELECT PWR
--+I
115V AC BUS-1
3 PHASE
---..-..-..-..-..----.--.---.-..-.- PSU COOLING FAN ! NO. 1 L-BAND ANTENNA
L
LOCATION STA. 148
J
I V j P9W4 P9007A 1 P9007H

C3AL-1392 NO. 2 L-BAND
BASE BANli u
UNlT (BBU).
! STA 289
P9011 5901 1 P9003 WL-100. LBL 18
C23AF-l I l l v P9008A P9008B
C23AL- 1392
C23AF-1110 P9010 A J9010 u
STA 280
~ R SIDEWALL
H
IDISC (STA 320) ! BBU COOLING FAN ,,,,, WL-100. RBL 18
STA 313, WL 4 0 , LBL 50
C23CE-32 10 (LOOP 10)
J9 1
CF C23CE-3110
:OCKPIT PHONE PROVISIONS
- FIRSTCLASS SEATING ' SELECT SEPTING I. COACH CLASS SEATING

?
I
L RIGHT HAND SIDE OF AIRCRAFT

'7LEFT HAND SIDE OF AIRCRAEL
LH SIDEWALL
DlSC (STA 440) I -
rmrc-wni 11 n n I ~
\ -
C23CE-3203 (LOOP 3) 7
C23CE-3205(LOOP 5)
1
C23CE-3207 (LOOP 7)
1
C23CE-3209 (LOOP 9)
1
1
ECO BOX
P9028
- FIRSTCLASS SEATING SELECT SEArlNG COACH CLASS SEATING
Telephone System Block Diagram (DC9-50)

Figure 6 (Sheet 3)
Effectivity
CODE I 23-1 9-0 Page 26
JAN 28/99
NORTHWEST
ANTENNA - PASSENGER TELEPHONE UHFIL-BAND - REMOVALIINSTALLATION

(SOC) at 1-800-532-8562.
1. General
A. The information in this section provides removal and reinstallation procedures for the Passenger
Telephone UHFIL-Band Antennas. The UHFIL-Band Antennas are located below the forward fuselage.
Removal and installation procedures are typical of all installations except as noted.
2. Tools and Equipment Required
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used instead of the following items:
A. Equipment
CAUTION: DAMAGE TO AIRPLANE SKIN MAY RESULT IF SEALANT IS REMOVED WITH METAL TOOLS.
(1) PneumaticIBattely Rotary Drill
(2) Tester, Bonding Meter (PIN T477W)
B. Consumable Materials
(1) Sealant - PS870B112
(2) Sealant - PR1826B114
I (3) Gel-Wrap, PIN EN110589-01

(4) Alodine 1200 (PIN 1201)
(5) 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite Pad (SIN 00-0490-3-3263)
(6) MEK or equivalent solvent
(7) Sealant removal tool-hardwood or plastic (PIN 1015-6 or equivalent).
3. Removalllnstallation UHFIL-Band Antenna
A. During maintenance, the passenger telephone system must be deactivated.
(1) Open the switch cover on the Power Supply Unit front panel and verify that the power switch is in OFF
position (reference 23-1 9-34).

CODE 1
APR 23/02
NORTHWEST
B. Remove UHFIL-Band Antenna
(1) Open the following circuit breakers:
(a) Passenger Telephone: Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel, I-dent location L6
(b) Passenger Telephone: Lower EPC Circuit Breaker Panel, I-dent location 229.
WARNING: TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
CAUTION: IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, DAMAGE TO AIRPLANE SKIN MAY RESULT IF SEALANT IS
REMOVED WITH METAL TOOLS.
(2) Using sealant removal tool (hardwood or plastic) completely remove sealing fillet from base of
antenna.
(3) Mask area at aircraft fuselage as closely as possible to base of antenna.

NOTE: The masked area of the aircraft fuselage will be used as a template for removal of non-conductive finish
prior to installation.
(4) Remove screws from antenna.
CAUTION: IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, USE CARE TO AVOID DAMAGE TO CONNECTOR.
(5) Carefully remove antenna in a direction side to side of the fuselage plane avoiding damage to
connector and area masked in above steps. The antenna should pull away from mounting without
excess force.
(6) Disconnect coaxial cable.
(7) Install protective caps on connectors if reinstallation is not made at this time.

CODE 1 23-1 9-1 1 APR 23/02
NORTHWEST
C. Install UHFIL-Band Antenna.
WARNING: IN THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES METHYL ETHYL KEYTONE IS USED AS A CLEANING

SOLVENT. STRICT ADHERENCE TO WARNING SHOULD BE COMPLIED WITH.
METHYL ETHYL KEYTONE IS AN AGENT THAT IS FLAMMABLE, EXPLOSIVE, POISONOUS,

AND AN IRRITANT. MAKE SURE THAT ALL PERSONS OBEY ALL OF THE PRECAUTIONS
WHEN METHYL ETHYL KEYTONE IS USED.
- GASIAIR MIXTURES MORE THAN THE LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (LEL) CAN CAUSE AN
EXPLOSION IF HlGH HEAT. SPARKS, OR FLAMES SUPPLY IGNITION. USE IN AN AREA OPEN
TO THE AIR. CLOSE THE CONTAINER WHEN NOT USED.
- DO NOT GET METHYL ETHYL KEYTONE IN THE EYES, ON THE SKIN, OR ON YOUR
CLOTHES. DO NOT BREATHE THE GAS.
WARNING: IN THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES ALODINE 1200 COATING IS USED AS A CONDUCTIVE

PRIMER FOR THE AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE AND ANTENNA. STRICT ADHERENCE TO
WARNING SHOULD BE COMPLIED WITH.
ALODINE 1200 COATING IS AN AGENT THAT IS POISONOUS, CORROSIVE, CARCINOGENIC,

AN OXIDIZER, AND AN IRRITANT MAKE SURE THAT ALL PERSONS OBEY ALL OF THE
PRECAUTIONS WHEN ALODINE 1200 COATING IS USED.
DO NOT USE IN AREAS WHERE THERE IS HlGH HEAT, SPARKS, OR FLAMES.

USE IN AN AREA OPEN TO THE AIR. CLOSE THE CONTAINER WHEN NOT USED.
DO NOT GET ALODINE 1200 COATING IN THE EYES, ON THE SKIN, OR ON YOUR CLOTHES.
DO NOT BREATHE THE DUST OR MIST.
AVOID SKIN CONTACT WlTH INGREDIENTS OR SOLUTION. WEAR RUBBER GLOVES AND
PROTECTIVE FACE DEVICES WHEN MIXING OR APPLYING. IF INGREDIENTS OR SOLUTION
CONTACTS THE SKIN, FLUSH WlTH WATER AND WASH THOROUGHLY WlTH SOAP AND
WATER.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-1 1 Page 403
APR 23/02
NORTHWEST
(1) Make sure the following circuit breakers are open, tagged, and safetied.
CAUTION: IN THE FOLLOWING STEP(S), BURNISH ONLY TO REMOVE EXISTING SEALANT, CORROSION
INHIBITING COMPOUNDS, PAINT AND PRIMER. DO NOT REMOVE METAL FROM SURFACE OR
APPLY EXCESSIVE PRESSURE THAT MAY OVERHEAT SURFACE.
(2) Using a 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite pad and power rotary tool, burnish clean the antenna mount aircraft
faying surface (area masked during antenna removal) of all existing sealant, corrosion inhibiting
compounds, paint and primer.
(3) Using a 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite pad and power rotary tool, burnish clean base of antenna.
(4) Using a Blue Scotch-Brite pad burnish clean the countersink antenna screw holes.
(5) Clean aircraft faying surface, base of antenna and countersink antenna screw holes. Use clean,
white, cotton cloth that has been well dampened with methyl ethyl ketone (MEK). Wipe dry.
(6) Apply Alodine No. 1200 solution to cleaned surfaces with brush.
(7) Allow to remain on surface until brown color develops. Then rinse with water and allow surface to
air-dry. To speed drying, surface may be blotted with clean, cotton cloth. Avoid rubbing as coating
is soft and can be easily removed.
(8) Remove cap, and secure coaxial cable to the antenna.
I (9) Wrap connector with Gel-Wrap, PIN EN110589-01.
(10) Place antenna in mounting position.
(11) Install and secure antenna mounting screws except two. (Use of stainless steel (cres) fasteners is
preferred.)
CAUTION: IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, BURNISH ONLY TO REMOVE EXISTING SEALANT, CORROSION
(12) Using a 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite pad and power rotary tool, burnish clean a small spot on aircraft
fuselage near antenna mount of all corrosion inhibiting compounds, paint and primer.
(13) Before installing last two mounting screws, perform antenna resistance check between the
countersink antenna screw holes and spot previously cleaned on aircraft fuselage. Use Bonding
Meter (PIN T477W) for resistance test.
(a) Resistance measured from countersink antenna screw holes to aircraft structure should not
exceed 2.5 milliohms.
NOTE: If measured resistance exceeds 2.5 milliohms the bond shall be inspected to determine if required
procedures have been performed properly.
(14) Install and secure remaining antenna mount screws.

CODE 1
APR 23/02
NORTHWEST
(15) Refinish spot cleaned on aircraft fuselage with Alodine, primer and paint as necessary.
(16) Apply a weather-aerodynamic fillet seal to the edge of the antenna and fastener heads. Use
PS870B112 or equivalent if a 16 hour cure time is available. Use PR1826B114 or equivalent if 1 hour
cure time is needed.
NOTE: Should any external antenna require replacement the fillet sealant may not have time to cure under line
maintenance environment, use the following procedure for installation of antenna:
(a) Install the antenna as described in applicable DC-9 MIM.
(b) In place of fillet sealant application, apply clear tape (PIN 853) to antenna edge-to-fuselage
skin, overlapping 112 inch minimum.
(c) At next RON (regular overnight) remove tape and apply fillet sealer per MIM. Create a log page
to document this procedure and defer to Maintenance Control.
(1 7) Remove excess sealant from around edge of antenna and fasteners with MEK or equivalent.
(18) Close the following circuit breaker, remove tags:
(19) Verify operation of passenger telephone system by calling the AT&T Platform by dialing any 0 +
number and wait for the AT&T bong. Once the AT&T bong is verified, push end to terminate call and
complete test.
(20) Return aircraft to required configuration.

CODE 1
APR 23/02
NORTHWEST
PASSENGER
m
0
NE
BGHT AC BUS
87-10
UPPER EPC
BREAKER PANEL
PASSENGER
L-BAND ANTENNAS
TELEPHOH
RIGHT AC BUS
B7-10
LOWER EPC
BREAKER PANEL
UHFIL-Band Antennas - Installation
Figure 401

CODE 1 23-1 9-1 1 APR 23/02
NORTHWEST
UHFIL BAND ANTENNA - INSPECTIONICHECK
1. General
A. Inspect UHFIL Band Antenna as follows:
(1) Inspect antenna to ensure no noticeable erosion or delamination has occurred. If antenna is
damaged, or has evidence of excessive erosion, or delamination; remove and replace antenna.
(2) Perform system test as required per DC-9 MIM 23-19-11.
NOTE: Peeled paint is NOT a sign of a damaged or defective antenna and is not cause for replacement.

CODE 1 23-1 9-1 1 JUN 24/99
NORTHWEST
HANDSET - PASSENGER TELEPHONE - REMOVAUINSTALLATION

system is not to be accomplished by NWA personnel other than removal/installation of system components
(SOC) at 1-800-532-8562.
1. General
Telephone Phone Units. There are four types of phone units: Bulkhead mounted, Console, Pouch, and
Seatback. Each unit consists of a retractable cord reel, handset and handset housing.
B. During maintenance, the passenger telephone system must be deactivated.
2. Procedure
A. Remove Phone Unit.
(1) Open the switch cover on the Power Supply Unit (PSU) (Ref. 23-19-34) front panel and verify that
the power switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING: TAG AND USE SAFETY CLIPS TO SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS. IFTHE BREAKERS ARE NOT
OPENED, TAGGED, AND SAFETIED, INJURY TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT
CAN OCCUR.
(2) Open the following circuit breaker:
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL IDENT LOCATION
Passenger Telephone Upper EPC Circuit L6 or 229

Breaker Panel
or Lower EPC Circuit

Breaker Panel
(3) Remove the handset from cradle and pull out enough handset cord for access to the mounting
hardware. See Figure 401.
(4) Remove the four cradle attach screws and retain. Partially remove cradle from opening in
(5) Disconnect the RJ-11 connection from the cradle and remove phone unit.
B. Install Phone Unit.
(1) Connect the RJ-11 connection from the ECO box to the phone unit. Install phone unit in seatback
opening (see Figure 401).
NOTE: Seatback phone units may require a Graphic Surround. If a Graphic Surround is required this component
must be installed subsequent to the mounting hardware. Also, when installing the RJ-11 connector ensure
it is properly seated before mounting the phone unit.
(2) Remove handset from cradle and pull out enough handset cord for access to the cradle mounting
hardware and fasten the four cradle attach screws.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-1 7 Page 401
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
(3) If the phone surround is not already attached to the cradle, snap fit the phone surround to the cradle.
(4) Close the following circuit breaker:
Passenger Telephone Upper EPC Circuit L6 or 229

Breaker Panel
or Lower EPC 229

Circuit Breaker Panel
(5) Check Handset for display "PRESS ON TO MAKE CALL". Installation is completed after verification
of display. If there is nothing displayed or "INOP" is displayed recheck handset connection. No effect
notify System Operations Center (SOC) at 1-800-532-8562.
C. Pouch Phone Units - Removal
(1) Remove the phone unit from the pouch phone mounting bracket by removing the mounting screws
and disconnecting the RJ-11 connector (located on the baggage restraint bar).
D. Pouch Phone Units - Installation
(1) Install the phone unit with the mounting screws.
(2) Install the phone unit by connecting the RJ-11 connector. The RJ-11 connector should be secured
with a tie strap.
(3) Remove tag installed on circuit breaker during the deactivation process.
(4) Engage the Passenger Telephone circuit breaker.
(5) Verify the proper operation of the phone system.

CODE 1
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
- npE i -T MY. (443
r CABLE ASSY RJ45-RJ11

' OR
M P E 1 HANOOn A8bY.
(2DjFOR BEAT ROW8 1,2,3,6, & 7 ONLY)
I
PHONE BURROUND
( a m ROW FOR SEAT ROWS 13 & 14 ONLY)
SOCKET HW CAP S C R M
I
I
I
' ...
" I !
' I
i
I
1 '-YI
" I
'1
/ I '
Typical Seatback Phone - Removal/lnstallation

Figure 401

CODE 1 23-1 9-1 7 NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
Typical Console Phone - Removal/lnstallation

Figure 402
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-1 7 Page 404
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
NTINQ BRACKET
AE8TRAINT TUBE -
/
I) \
'- TIEOOWN
STRAP
EQlmuuw
$EAT ROW 6ONLY
THI8 18 AN OPTIONAL CONFIGURATION FOR THE
D m 0 (WITH YEAR 2000 INTERIOR)
Typical Pouch Phone - Removal/lnstallation

Figure 403
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-1 7 Page 405
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
/
/
M P E I HAND= A m . -
Typical Bulkhead Phone - Removal/lnstallation

Figure 404
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-1 7 Page 406
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
POWER SUPPLY UNIT - PASSENGER TELEPHONE - REMOVALIINSTALLATION

(SOC) at 1-800-532-8562.
1. General
Telephone Power Supply Unit (PSU). The PSU is located forward cargo bay right hand side wall.
B. During maintenance, the Passenger Telephone System must be deactivated.
2. Procedure
A. Remove the Power Supply Unit.
WARNING: TAG AND USE SAFETY CLIPS TO SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS. IF THE BREAKERS ARE NOT
CAN OCCUR.
Passenger Telephone Upper EPC Circuit

Breaker Panel
or Lower EPC 229

CAUTION: WEAR AN ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) WRIST STRAP AT ALL TIMES WHILE
HANDLING AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT. CONNECTTHE WRIST STRAP GROUNDING CLIP TO
THE GROUNDING CONNECTION ON ANY OF THE EQUIPMENT TRAYS.
(3) Remove the access cover in the forward cargo compartment. See Figure 401.
(4) Turn both extractor fluted knobs counterclockwise until the PSU rack connector is completely
disengaged. Then remove the PSU.
6. Install Power Supply Unit.

HANDLING AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT. CONNECTTHE WRIST STRAP GROUNDING CLIP TO
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-34 Page 401
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST

Breaker Panel
or Lower EPC 229

(2) Slide the PSU into mounting tray until it makes contact with rack connector. Engage both hold down
fasteners and turn them clockwise until hand tight.
(3) Install the access cover in the forward cargo compartment.
(4) Remove circuit breaker tags and close passenger telephone circuit breakers.
(5) Verify operation of telephone system.

CODE 1
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
PASSENGER
TELEPHOM
RIGHT AC BUS
87-10
@ @
C(P?CIEQC.~
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
UPPER EPC
BREAKER PANEL
OR
LOWER EPC
BREAKER PANEL
Power Supply Unit - Installation
Figure 401

CODE 1
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
BASEBAND UNIT - PASSENGER TELEPHONE - REMOVAUINSTALLATION

system is not to be accomplished by NWA personnel otherthan removal/installation of system components
(SOC) at 1-800-532-8562.
1. General
Telephone Baseband Unit (BBU). The BBU is located forward cargo bay right hand side wall.
2. Procedure
A. Remove Baseband Unit.
WARNING: TAG AND USE SAFETY CLIPSTOSAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS. IFTHE BREAKERSARE NOT
CAN OCCUR.

Breaker Panel
or Lower EPC 229

HANDLING AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT. CONNECTTHE WRIST STRAP GROUNDING CLlP TO
THE GROUNDING CONNECTION ON ANY OF THE EQUIPMENT TRAYS
(4) Turn both extractor fluted knobs counterclockwise until the BBU rack connector is completely
disengaged. Then remove the BBU.
B. Install Baseband Unit.
HANDLING AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT. CONNECT THE WRIST STRAP GROUNDING CLlP TO
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-35 Page 401
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST

Breaker Panel
or Lower EPC 229

(2) Slide the BBU into the mounting tray until it makes contact with rack connector. Engage both hold
down fasteners and turn them clockwise until hand tight.
(3) Install access cover in the forward cargo compartment.

CODE 1 23-1 9-35 NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
I BASEBAND UNIT 1
UPPER EPC
BREAKER PANEL
OR
CHANNEL A CHANNEL 8
RLOT PILOT
DYIGNOSTC
PASSEE(CER
m w
KHr AI: BUS
87-10
BBU
LOWER EPC
BREAKER PANEL Baseband Unit - Installation
Figure 401

CODE 1 23-1 9-35 NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
RADIO FREQUENCY UNIT (RFU! - PASSENGER TELEPHONE - REMOVAUINSTALLATION

(SOC) at 1-800-532-8562.
1. General
A. The Information in this section provides removal and reinstallation procedures for the Passenger
Telephone Radio Frequency Unit (RFU). The RFU is located forward cargo bay right hand side wall.
2. Procedure
A. Remove the Radio Frequency Unit.
(1) Open the switch cover on the Power Supply Unit (PSU) (23-1 9-34) front panel and verify that the
power switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING: TAG AND USE SAFETY CLIPS TO SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS. IFTHE BREAKERS ARE NOT
CAN OCCUR.

- -
- - -
- --

Breaker Panel
or Lower EPC 229

HANDLING AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT. CONNECT THE WRIST STRAP GROUNDING CLlP TO
THE GROUNDING CONNECTION ON ANY OF THE EQUIPMENT TRAYS
(4) Turn both extractor fluted knobs counterclockwise until the RFU rack connector is completely
disengaged. Then remove the RFU.
B. Install the Radio Frequency Unit.

HANDLING AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT. CONNECTTHE WRIST STRAP GROUNDING CLlP TO

23-1 9-36
1
CODE 1
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST

Breaker Panel
or Lower EPC 229

(2) Slide the RFU into mounting tray until it makes contact with rack connector. Engage both hold down
fasteners and turn them clockwise until hand tight.
(3) Install the access cover in the forward cargo compartment.

CODE 1 23-1 9-36 NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
PASSENGER
m
ON
E
RIGHT CE BUS
87-10
UPPER EPC
BREAKER PANEL
OR
RFU
LOWER EPC
BREAKER PANEL
Radio Frequency Unit - Installation
Figure 401

CODE 1
NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
I ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR OUTPUT (ECO) BOX - REMOVAUINSTALLATION

1. General
A. This section provides removal and installation procedures for the ECO box. This component is a part of
the Claircom telephone system.
6. Deactivation: During maintenance, the passenger telephone system must be deactivated as follows:
(1) Open the switch cover on the PSU (Ref. 23-19-34) front panel and verify that the power switch is
in the OFF position.
(2) Disengage the Passenger Telephone circuit breaker (Ref. 23-19-34), placing it in the open position.
(3) Tag the circuit breaker accordingly, indicating, "Work In Progress."

WARNING: INADVERTENT CLOSURE OF THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT AND ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONNEL.
system shall not be accomplished by Northwest Airlines personnel other than removal/installation of
system components for access during major maintenance. If maintenance is necessary, notify Systems
Operations Center (SOC) at 1-800-532-8562.
2. ECO Box - Removal
A. Gain access to the ECO box.
(1) Remove the handset RJ-45 connector(s) from the ECO box.
(2) Remove the input and output (D subminiature) connectors from the ECO box. This is accomplished
by opening the spring latches and removing the connector from the ECO box.
NOTE: The last ECO box in the loop has a terminator plug installed on the output of the ECO box.
(3) If applicable, remove the terminator plug from the output connector of the ECO box.
(4) Remove the tie straps securing the ECO box.

(5) Remove the ECO box.
3. ECO Box - Installation
A. Gain access to the ECO box.
(1) Place the ECO box onto the mounting bracket.
(2) Insert tie straps through the slots of the mounting bracket and ECO box. Slide the tip of the tie straps
into the hole in the head of the strap and pull the tip until tight. Use a pair of diagonal cutters to remove
the excess strap.
(3) Install the handset RJ-45 connector(s) to the ECO box.
(4) Install the input and output (D subminiature) connectors from the ECO box. This is accomplished by
closing the spring latches on the ECO box.
NOTE: The last ECO box in the loop has a terminator plug installed on the output of the ECO box.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-1 9-41 Page 401
AUG 21/02
NORTHWEST
(5) If applicable, install the terminator plug on the output connector of the ECO box.
(6) Remove the circuit breaker tag installed during the deactivation process.
(7) Engage the Passenger Telephone circuit breaker.
(8) Verify the proper operation of the Claircom telephone system.
CABLE ASSY RJ45-RJ1 1

/
SF-.
'.I f
REAR STRETCHER BAR
TERMINATION ASSY
(SEAT ROWS 3,6,12,
20. & 25 RH
SEAT ROWS 1,6,12,
20.8 25 LH ONLY)
(SEAT ROWS 2 & 3 LH 8 RH,
SEAT ROWS 6 8 7 LH)
TRIPLE TAP (ECO) BOX
(SEAT ROWS 1 8 5 LH 8 RH,
SEAT ROWS 6 & 7 RH)
Typical ECO Box Mounting - Removal/lnstallation

Figure 401

CODE 1 23-1 9-41 NOV 02/96
NORTHWEST
VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF) - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The VHF system is used to provide communication between the aircraft and a ground station or another
aircraft. The system is a dual installation designated VHF-1 and VHF-2 and is used for transmitting and
receiving amplitude-modulated radio signals. The transmitting and receiving frequency selection is
controlled from the VHF navigation/communication remote control panels. The installation consists of the
following: two VHF communication transceivers, two control panels, and two antennas. Both VHF systems
operate independently; therefore, both transceivers can be operated simultaneously. The VHF systems
do not have interlocking features and are identical.
The VHF transceiver is a crystal-controlled, electronically tuned, transistorized unit that functions as a
transmitter and a receiver. The transmitter section is capable of producing a minimum of 25 watts of
amplitutde-modulated RF energy. The transceiver operates in the frequency range of 118.0 to 135.95
megacycles on 360 channels spaced 50 kilohertz apart. The receiver section contains the circuits required
for integrating the VHF communication system with the Air Traffic Control Signaling System (ATCSS). The
transceiver is housed in a short 112-ATR case, and is divided into five basic sections; front panel, top deck,
modulator side panel, IF and audio side panel, and rear panel. Mounted on the front panel is a rotary switch
for selecting monitoring voltages within the unit; a monitoring meter; a squelch disable switch; three jacks
labeled phone, mike, ext. meter; and a standard front plate handle. Electrical connections are made
through a dual connector mounted on the rear of the unit. All alignment, adjustment, and test points are
accessible with sub-assembly covers in place.
The VHF control panels, located on the control pedestal, remotely control the selection of transmitting and
receiving frequencies receiver volume, and receiver squelch. Each panel has electrical connectors
attached which make contact with receptacles mounted on a spring loaded plate in the pedestal cavity.
Depressing the control panel places tension on the spring loaded plate, thereby providing electrical
contact when the quick-release fasteners are engaged. The mounting plate partially ejects the control
panel from its cavity when the quick-release fasteners are released.
The VHF-1 antenna is a low drag, blade type located near the upper centerline of the fuselage at station
Y417. The VHF-2 antenna is identical except that it is located near the lower centerline of the fuselage
at station Y341.
Any of the audio control panels can be used to control the following VHF transceiver functions: selection
of either receiver section audio signal, and selection of either transmitter section for transmission. When
the oxygen mask microphones are used, the selected transmitter section is placed in operation by
pressing the microphone switch buttons, located on the outboard horns of the control wheels. When the
hand microphones are used, the button on top of the microphone must be pressed.
The desired VHF system is selected by rotating the microphone selector switch to the required position
(VHF-1 or VHF-2), and then placing the corresponding reception toggle switch to the on (up) position.
The microphone and headset of the audio integrating system are then connected to the selected VHF
system. Depressing the microphone push-to-talk button actuates the transmitter section and connects
the transmitter output to the system antenna. When the push-to-talk button is released, incoming signals
are fed from the receiver section to the headset.
Power is supplied to the VHF system when the airplane buses are energized, the system circuit breakers
are closed, and the appropriate on-off switches are in the on position. One 28-volt dc circuit breaker is
required for each system. The VHF-1 system will operate when the airplane is powered by battery only.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 2 23-20-00 J U N 03/02
NORTHWEST
TRANSCEIVER
NAVIGATION/COMMUNICATIO
CONTROL PANEL NOTE: VHF SYSTEMS ARE IDENTICAL 8B2-236A
Very High Frequency (VHF) - Pictorial Diagram

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 2 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
BLADE
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

I
VHF-1
t
ml0- 4-
VHF-1 TRANSCEIVER '
31- TO INTERPHONE AMPCIFIER TRANSMITTER
SECTION
t
MICROPHONE
I MIC SEL
I
TVHF
RECEPTION
TOGGLE
IWITCH
(~CRE
AUON-I C E W11R ANTENNA
FILTER
LOW PASS
- WMM-1
r
RECEIVER
I
B
I-
. 35
I
I
VOL
1
NOTES
VHF-1 CONKCTIONS SHOWN VHF-2
IDENTICAL EXCEPT SWWN T w S : o
+ VHF-1 ONLY. VHF-2 IS POWERED FROM
RIGHT RADIO BUS.
f DENOTES SIGNAL DIRECTION.
MIKE INPUT AN0 AUDIO OUTPUTS
SHOWN ARE TYPICAL.
Very High Frequency (VHF) - Simplified Schematic

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 2 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operation
A. When the VHF System is in the transmit mode, the audio picked up by the microphone is converted to
electrical energy and fed as input, though the audio control panel, to the transceiver. The input is applied
to an audio limiter which, to prevent overmodulation, compresses high amplitude voice input signals. An
audio amplifier receives the output of the limiter. The output from the audio amplifier is applied to a
modulator which modulates the VHF carrier signal at the power amplifier. The VHF signal at the output
of the power amplifier is applied through the antenna low-pass filter to the antenna. The antenna
low-pass filter samples the audio modulation on the VHF signal and feeds the sample back to the audio
amplifier. The sample is then fed to the headsets as a transmitter sidetone signal.
B. When the transceiver is in the receive mode, signals of the specified input frequency received at the
antenna are amplified by the transceiver RF amplifier. The audio output from the transceiver audio
amplifier is fed as input, through the VHF navigation/communicationcontrol panel and the audio control
panel, to the headsets or the flight compartment speakers.
3. To Operate Svstem
A. Energize electrical buses.
B. Place radio rack cooling fan switch in fan position.
C. Place controls to position indicated.
Control Position
Audio control panel microphone VHF-1 or VHF-2 as applicable

selector switch
Audio control panel reception uP

toggle switch
VHF navigation/communication Desired frequency

control panel frequency selection switch
VHF navigation/communication Turn clockwise to a comfortable level.

control panel volume off control
Audio control panel volume control Turn clockwise to a comfortable level.
VHF navigation/communication Squelch

control panel squelch-off switch
NOTE: System is now ready to operate. When microphone is energized, system antenna will radiate at selected
frequency.
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 2
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF! - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
A. The VHF system is used to provide communication between the aircraft and a ground station or another
B. The VHF transceiver is a crystal-controlled, electronically tuned, transistorized unit that functions as a
amplitutde-modulated RF energy. The transceiver operates in the frequency range of 118.0 to 135.95
megacycles on 360 channels spaced 50 kilohertz apart. The receiver section contains the circuits required
for integrating the VHF communication system with the Air Traffic Control Signaling System (ATCSS). The
transceiver is housed in a short 112-ATR case, and is divided into five basic sections; front panel, top deck,
modulator side panel, IF and audio side panel, and rear panel. Mounted on the front panel is a rotary switch
for selecting monitoring voltages within the unit; a monitoring meter; a squelch disable switch; three jacks
labeled phone, mike, ext. meter; and a standard front plate handle. Electrical connections are made
through a dual connector mounted on the rear of the unit. All alignment, adjustment, and test points are
accessible with sub-assembly covers in place.
NOTE: The 618M-2 and King 9000 Transceivers are slightly different internally and will not incorporate the switch
for monitoring voltage within the unit. Provisions are incorporated for monitoring (SWR) Standing Wave
Ratio, and all Transceivers are completely interchangeable.
C. The VHF control panels, located on the control pedestal, remotely control the selection of transmitting and
receiving frequencies receiver volume, and receiver squelch. Each panel has electrical connectors
attached which make contact with receptacles mounted on a spring loaded plate in the pedestal cavity.
Depressing the control panel places tension on the spring loaded plate, thereby providing electrical
contact when the quick-release fasteners are engaged. The mounting plate partially ejects the control
panel from its cavity when the quick-release fasteners are released.
D. The VHF-1 antenna is a low drag, blade type located near the upper centerline of the fuselage at station
at station Y341.
E. Any of the audio control panels can be used to control the following VHF transceiver functions: selection
hand microphones are used, the button on top of the microphones must be pressed.
F. Power is supplied to the VHF system when the airplane buses are energized, the system circuit breakers
required for each system. The VHF-1 system will operate when the aircraft is powered by battery only.
G. Selection of the desired VHF system on the audio control panel is made by pressing the appropriate
microphone selector push-button, and placing the corresponding reception toggle switch in the up (on)
position. The microphone and the headset of the audio integrating system is then connected to the desired
VHF system transmitter section. Depressing the microphone push-to-talk button actuates the transmitter
section and connects the output of the transmitter section to the output of the transmitter section of the
system antenna.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 5 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NAVlGATION/COMMUNICATIO
CONTROL PANEL NOTE: VHF SYSTEMS ARE IDENTICAL BB2-236A

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 5 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
Al,
UTING
EUY
VHF NAWGATIOW/COUUURICAT10W
CONTROL PANEL
1
RECEIVER
SQUELCH
& SQ 4 1
. SQWLCH
DISABLE
-
+t VHF-1 ONLY. VHF-2 IS POWERED
FROM RADIO BUS.
--t DENOTES SIGNAL DRECTION
W C INPUT AND AUDIO OUTPUTS
SHOWll ARE TYFlCU.

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 5 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operation
A. When the VHF system is in the transmit mode, the audio picked up by the microphone is converted into
electrical energy and fed as input, through the audio control panel, to the transceiver. The input is applied
to the audio limiter which, to prevent overmodulation, compresses high amplitude voice signals. The audio
amplifier receives the output of the limiter. The output from the audio amplifier is applied to the modulator
which modulates the VHF carrier signal at the power amplifier. The VHF signal at the output from the power
amplifier is applied through the antenna low-pass filter to the antenna.
NOTE: On aircraft 9952-9965 incorporating RW ECO 23-20-21 the VHF communication transceiver audio and
sidetone outputs are connected in parallel so that sidetone level is adjusted by the VHF volume control.
amplifier is fed as input, through the VHF navigation/communicationcontrol panel and the audio control
Control Position
Audio control panel microphone VHF-1 or VHF-2 as applicable

selector switch
Audio control panel reception UP

toggle switch
Audio control panel volume control Turn clockwise to a comfortable level.
VHF navigation/communication Desired frequency

VHF navigation/communication Turn clockwise to a comfortable level.


frequency.
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 5 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
controlled from the VHF navigationlcommunication remote control panels. The installation consists of the
NOTE: Either the 618M-1 or the 618M-2 transceiver may be used and are slightly different internally are
completely interchangeable.
amplitutde-modulated RF energy. The transceiver operates throughout the International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO) VHF communications frequency range. The receiver section contains the circuits
required for integrating the VHF communication system with the Air Traffic Control Signaling System
(ATCSS). The transceiver is housed in a short 112-ATR case, and is divided into five basic sections; front
panel, top deck, modulator side panel, IF and audio side panel, and rear panel. Electrical connections are
made through a dual connector mounted on the rear of the unit. Mounted on the front panel of the 618M-1
transceiver is a rotary switch for selecting monitoring voltages within the unit; a monitoring meter; a
squelch disable switch; three jacks labeled phone, mike, ext. meter; and a standard front plate handle.
Mounted on the front panel of the 618M-2 transceiver is a power meter and a push-to-test switch for
monitoring the Forward and Reflected power, a phone jack, a microphone jack, and a squelch test switch.
C. The VHF control panels, located on the control pedestal, remotely control the selection of transmitting and
receiving frequencies receiver volume, and receiver squelch.
D. The VHF-1 antenna is a low drag, blade type located near the upper centerline of the fuselage. The VHF-2
and VHF-3 antenna is identical except that it is located near the lower centerline of the fuselage.
G. Selection of the desired VHF system on the audio control panel is made by pressing the appropriate
microphone selector push-button, and placing the corresponding reception toggle switch in the up (on)
position. The microphone and the headset of the audio integrating system is then connected to the desired
VHF system transmitter section. Depressing the microphone push-to-talk button actuates the transmitter
section and connects the output of the transmitter section to the output of the transmitter section of the
system antenna.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 7 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NAVIGATlON/COMMUNICATlO

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 7 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operation
amplifier is fed as input, through the VHF navigation/communication control panel and the audio control
3. To Operate System

Control Position
(1) Audio control panel microphone VHF-1, VHF-2, or VHF-3 as applicable
selector switch
(2) Audio control panel reception

toggle switch
(3) VHF navigation/communication Desired frequency

control panel frequency selector
(4) VHF navigation/communication Turn clockwise to a comfortable level.

(5) Audio control panel volume control Turn clockwise to a comfortable level.
(6) VHF navigation/communication Squelch

control panel squelch control
frequency.
1. Operation
A. When the VHF system is in the transmit mode, the audio picked up by the microphone is converted into
to the audio limiter which, to prevent overmodulation, compresses high amplitude voice signals. The audio
amplifier receives the output of the limiter. The output from the audio amplifier is applied to the modulator
which modulates the VHF carrier signal at the power amplifier. The VHF signal at the output from the power
amplifier is applied through the antenna low-pass filter to the antenna. The antenna low-pass filter
samples the audio modulation on the VHF signal and feeds the sample back to the audio amplifier. The
sample is then fed to the headset as a transmitter sidetone signal.
Effectivity
CODE 7 23-20-00 Page 3
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
The VHF system is used to provide communication between the aircraft and a ground station or another
aircraft. The system is used for transmitting and receiving amplitude-modulated radio signals. The
transmitting and receiving frequency selection is controlled from the VHF communication remote control
panels. The installation consists of the following: VHF communication transceivers, control panels, and
antennas. The VHF systems operate independently; therefore, both transceivers can be operated
simultaneously. The VHF systems do not have interlocking features and are identical.
The VHF transceiver is a crystal-controlled, electronically tuned, transistorized unit that functions as a
(ATCSS). The transceiver is housed in a short 1/2-ATR case, and is divided into five basic sections; front
panel, top deck, modulator side panel, IF and audio side panel, and rear panel. Mounted on the front panel
is a rotary switch for selecting monitoring voltages within the unit; a monitoring meter; a squelch disable
switch; three jacks labeled phone, mike, ext meter; and a standard front plate handle. Electrical
connections are made through a dual connector mounted on the rear of the unit. All alignment, adjustment,
and test points are accessible with subassembly covers in place.
The VHF control panels, located on the control pedestal, remotely control the selection of transmitting and
receiving frequencies receiver volume, and receiver squelch.
The VHF antennas are low drag, blade type located along the lower and upper centerline of the fuselage.
Any of the audio control panels can be used to control the following VHF transceiver functions: selection
hand microphones are used, the button on top of the microphone must be pressed.
Power is available for the VHF system when the airplane buses are energized, the system circuit breakers
required for each system. The VHF-1 system will operate when the airplane is powered by battery only.
Selection of the desired VHF system on the audio control panel is made by setting the appropriate
microphone selector to the desired VHF System and placing the corresponding reception switch to the
on position. The microphone and headset of the audio integrating system are then connected to the
selected VHF system transmitter section. Pressing the microphone push-to-talk button actuates the
transmitter section and connects the output of the transmitter section to the system antenna.
Effectivity
CODE 10 23-20-00 Page 1
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
TRANSCEIVER
NAVIGATION/COMMUNICATIO

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 10 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operation
amplifier is fed as input, through the VHF communication control panel and the audio control panel, to the
headsets or the flight compartment speakers.
Control Position
Audio control panel microphone VHF system applicable

selector switch
Audio control panel reception UP

switch
VHF communication control Desired frequency

panel frequency selection switch
VHF communication control Place to a comfortable level.

panel volume-off control if applicable
Audio control panel volume control Place to a comfortable level.

frequency.
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 10 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
VERY HIGH FREQUENCY WHF) - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
(ATCSS). The transceiver is housed in a short 1R-ATR case, and is divided into three planar sideboard
sections; a synthesizer, a receiver, and a transmitter-modulator. The synthesizer and the receiver utilize
card-type components which plug into the sideboard. The transmitter-modulator components are
conventionally mounted. Each sideboard connects to the interconnect unit which contains the external
connector, a test connector, and the interwiring for the three sideboards. A common front panel holds the
sideboards together. Accessible on the front panel is a power meter and switch for reading forward and
reflected power, a phone jack, a microphone jack, and a squelch disable switch. Electrical connections
are made through a dual connector mounted on the rear of the unit.
C. The VHF control panels remotely control the selection of transmitting and receiving frequencies, receiver
volume, and receiver squelch. Each panel has electrical connectors attached which make contact with
receptacles mounted on a spring-loaded plate in the pedestal cavity. Depressing the control panel places
tension on the spring-loaded plate, thereby providing electrical contact when the quick-release fasteners
are engaged. The mounting plate partially ejects the control panel from its cavity when the quick-release
fasteners are released.
D. The VHF-1 antenna is a low drag, blade type located near the upper centerline of the fuselage. The VHF-2
antenna is identical except that it is located near the lower centerline of the fuselage.
G. Selection of the desired VHF system on the audio control panel is made by selecting the appropriate
microphone selector, and placing the corresponding reception switch to the on position. The microphone
and the headset of the audio integrating system is then connected to the desired VHF system transmitter
section. Depressing the microphone push-to-talk button actuates the transmitter section and connects
the output of the transmitter section to the system antenna. The transceiver sections interface the flight
recorder. Each time the transceivers are keyed, a mark is applied to the recorder tape, to indicate time
of transmission.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 20 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NAVIGATION/U)MMUNICATl
CONTROL PlWEL NOTE: VHF SYSTEMS M E IDENTICAL BBi-236A

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 20 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
AUDID CONTROL P A T L VW TRANSCEIVER

b
TRANSYITTER
4
ANTENNA
U I W PASS
FILTER
: NAVlCATlON/COMMUNlCAT10N
ITROL PANEL
1
- CIRCUITS
V W k 1 CONNECTIONS S M VHF-2
wmur EXCEPT AS S ~ THUS: Y 0
46 VHF-1 ONLY. V W - 2 IS POWERED
R O Y R M K ) BUS.
+DENOTES S l t M L DIRECTION
YIC INPUT AND AUDIO OUTPUTS
S W W ARE NPICM.

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 20
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operation
to a modulator which, to prevent overmodulation, compresses high amplitude voice input signals. The
output from the modulator is applied to transmitter drivers which modulate the VHF carrier signal to the
power amplifier. The VHF signal at the output of the power amplifier is applied through the antenna
low-pass filter to the antenna. A sidetone detector samples the audio modulation on the VHF signal and
feeds the sample to a receiver audio amplifier. The sample is then fed to the headsets as a transmitter
sidetone signal.
antenna are filtered, converted, and amplified by the transceiver IF amplifier. The audio output from the
transceiver audio amplifier is fed as input, through the VHF navigation/communication control panel and
the audio control panel, to the headsets or the flight compartment speakers.
Control Position
(1) Audio control panel microphone VHF-1 or VHF-2 as applicable

selector
(2) Audio control panel reception On

switch
(3) Audio control panel volume control Set to a comfortable level.
(4) VHF navigation/communication Desired frequency

(5) VHF navigation/communication Set to a comfortable level.

control panel volume control
(6) VHF navigation/communication Squelch

control panel squelch switch
frequency.
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 20 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
VERY HIGH FREQUENCYICOMMUNICATION !VHFlCOMM! -
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
A. The VHF system is used to provide communication between the airplane and a ground station or another
airplane. The system is a dual installation designated VHF-1 and VHF-2 and is used for transmitting and
receiving amplitude-modulated radio signals. The transmitting and receiving frequency selections are
controlled from the VHF communication remote control panels. The installation consists of the following:
two VHF communication transceivers, two control panels, two antennas. Both VHF systems operate
independently; therefore, both transceivers can be operated simultaneously. The VHF systems do not
have interlocking features and are identical.
amplitude-modulated RF energy. The transceiver operates throughout the International Civil Aviation
Organization (ICAO) VHF communications frequency range. The transceiver is housed in a short 112-ATR
case, and is divided into three planer sideboard sections: a synthesizer, a receiver, and a
transmitter-modulator which plug into the sideboard. The transmitter-modulator components are
conventionally mounted. Each sideboard connects to the interconnect unit which contains the external
connector, a test connector, and the interwiring for the three sideboards. A common front panel holds the
sideboards together. Accessible on the front panel is a power meter and switch for reading forward and
reflected power, a phone jack, microphone jack, and a squelch disable switch. Electrical connections are
made through a dual connector mounted on the rear of the unit.
NOTE: The 618M-2 and King 9000 transceiver are slightly different internally and will not incorporate the switch
for monitoring voltage within the unit. Provisions are incorporated for monitoring (SWR) Standing Wave
Ratios, and all transceivers are completely interchangeable.
C. The VHF control panels remotely control the selection of transmitting and receiving frequencies and
receiver squelch.
D. The VHF-1 antenna is low-drag, blade type located near the upper centerline of the fuselage at Station
at Station Y341.
of either receiver section audio signal, and selection of either transmitter section for transmission.
F. Power is supplied to the VHF system when the airplane buses are energized and the system circuit
breakers are closed. One 28-volt dc circuit breaker is required for each system. The VHF-1 system will
operate when the airplane is powered by battery only.
G. Selection of the desired VHF system on the audio control panel is made by pushing in the appropriate
microphone selector bottom, and pushing out the corresponding reception bottom to the ON position. The
microphone and the headset of the audio intergrating system is then connected to the desired VHF system
transmitter section. Depressing the microphone push-to-talk button actuates the transmitter section and
connects the output of the transmitter section to the system antenna. The transceiver sections interface
the flight recorder. Each time the transceivers are keyed, a mark is applied to the recorder tape, to indicate
time of transmission.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 1
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO OUTPUT
MICROPHONE
VHF AUDIO INPUT
COMMUNICATION
CONTROL PANEL DENTICAL

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 96 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL VHF TRANSMITTER

MICROPHONF SFI.ECTION ti
PUSHBOTTON SWITCHES
BOOM MIC O->J~D--- TRANSMITTER
HAND MlC B-99 I~ t - ~ 1 3 C M I C R O P H O N AEU O i O l :

SECTION
LOW PASS
HEADSET FILTER
B
20 VOL
RECEIVER
LU
SPEAKER SPEAKER SELECTION z
AMPLIFIER BUTTON s'
lu
I!
ISOLATION V)
I AMPLIFIER
VHF COMMUNICATION
COI
4
I_7-
RECEIVER
SECTION
SQUELCHI
DISABLE
1,
CIRCUITS
REMOTE
ON-OFF
-
NOTE: ' VHF-1 ONLY. VHF-2 IS POWERED
FROM RADIO BUS.
DENOTES SIGNAL DIRECTION
I- L
*
8 V DC EMER.)
-

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 96 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operation
A. The VHF communication system control panel provides for selection of an active and standby VHF Comm
frequencies.
VHF Communication System Control Panel

Figure 3
Left Comm frequency selector knobs - Rotating the frequency selector knobs allows the selection
of any VHF Comm frequency between 118.00(0) and 136.97(5) MHz. The third fractional
(thousandths) digit, shown in parenthesis (), does not appear in the Comm frequency readout. The
left knob tunes the 118 to 136 MHz frequency ranges and the right knob tunes the .00(0) to .97(5)
MHz frequency ranges.
Left Comm frequency readout -The selected Comm frequency is displayed in the readout.
Right Comm frequency selector knobs - Rotating the frequency selector knobs allows the selection
of any VHF Comm frequency between 118.00(0) and 136.97(5) MHz. The third fractional
(thousandths) digit, shown in parenthesis (), does not appear in the Comm frequency readout. The
left knob tunes the 118 to 136 MHz frequency ranges and the right knob turns the .00(0) to .97(5)
MHz frequency ranges.
Right Comm Frequency Readout - the selected Comm frequency is displayed in the readout.
Transfer Switch - Toggle Left or Right to select the active Comm frequency.
Left Frequency Indicator Lamp - Illuminatedwhen left frequency selector is active.
Right Frequency Indicator Lamp - Illuminated when right frequency selector is active.
SQ OFF button - Push in momentary button to turn squelch off. Squelch is off only when button is
pushed in.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 4
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
3. Operation Characteristics
A. When the VHF system is in the transmit mode, the audio picked up by the microphone is converted to
to the modulator which, to prevent overmodulation, compresses high amplitude voice input signals. The
output from the modulator is applied to the transmitter drivers which modulate the VHF carrier signal to
the power amplifier. The VHF signal at the output from the power amplifier is applied through the antenna
low-pass filter to the antenna. A sidetone detector samples the audio modulation on the VHF signal and
feeds the sample to a receiver audio amplifier. The sample is then fed to the headsets as a transmitter
sidetone signal.
antenna are filtered, converted and amplified by the transceiver IF amplifiers. The audio output from the
transceiver audio amplifier is fed as input, through the audio control panel, to the headsets or the flight
compartment speakers.

Control Position
(1) Audio control panel microphone selector VHF-1 or VHF-2 as applicable
(2) Audio control panel reception button ON (Push Out)
(3) Audio control panel volume control Set to a comfortable level.
(4) VHF communication control panel frequency Desired frequency

selection switch
frequency.
Effectivity Page 5
CODE 96 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF) - TROUBLE-SHOOTING
NOTE: Intermittent Loss of Radio Communication: Loss of radio communication has occasionally been reported
when flying through clouds or near thunderstorms. This may result from improperly bonded lightening strips
on the nose radome. Refer to DC-9 Maintenance Manual Chapter 23-60-00, Page 101.
NOTE: DC-9 Maintenance Manual Chapter 23-20-01, Page 101, provides detailed Trouble-Shooting of the VHF
coax and VHF Antenna system using the "Time Domain Reflectometer" (TDR) tester. Using this
trouble-shooting guide for suspected coax and/or antenna problems is recommended if tester is available.
Possible Causes Isolation Procedure Correction

A. NO RECEPTION
(1) Faulty Headset Check headset for proper operation Replace Headset if defective.
using interphone, ADF, or other
source.
(2) Faulty Audio Control Panel or Set up alternate stations control (a) Replace Audio Control Panel.
interconnecting wiring panel for reception. If reception is
alternate station's control panel

operates properly at original
station, see correction (a). If
reception is not obtained see
correction (b).
(3) Faulty receiver section Interchange transceiver with Replace transceiver.
alternate system transceiver.
(4) Faulty Transmit-receive relay Interchange transceiver with Replace transceiver.
alternate system transceiver.
(5) Faulty antenna or Set meter selector on front of Replace coaxial cable or antenna
interconnecting coaxial cable transceiver, to reflected power as necessary.
position, and check transmitting
function. If meter indication is
greater than 2, check coaxial cable
and antenna for lack of continuity
or insulation breakdown.
B. TRANSCEIVER WILL NOT CHANNEL PROPERLY
(1) Faulty control panel lnterchange control panel with one Replace control panel.
known to be serviceable.
(2) Faulty transceiver Interchange transceiver with Replace transceiver.
alternate system's unit.
(3) Faulty interconnecting wiring Check frequency selection and Replace wiring as necessary.
control wiring between control
panel and transceiver.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-00 Page 101
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

C. NO TRANSCEIVER OUTPUT
(1) Faulty transmitter section Interchange transceiver with Replace transceiver.
alternate system unit.
(2) Faulty Control Panel or Set up alternate stations control (a) Replace Audio Control Panel.
interconnecting wiring panel for transmissions. If proper
transmissions are obtained from
alternate audio ane el. (b) Repair interconnecting wiring.
interchange unii with 'original audio
control panel. If proper
transmissions are obtained from
original station, see correction (a).
If transmissions are not obtained,
see correction (b).
(3) Faulty microphone Listen to headset for sidetone Replace microphone if
during transmissions. If no malfunctioning.
sidetone is audible, check
microphone using interphone or
public address system.
(4) Faulty antenna coaxial cable Set meter selector, on front of Repair or replace coaxial cable and
or antenna transceiver, to reflected power antenna as necessary.
position and check transmitting
function. If meter indication is
greater than 2, check coaxial cable
and antenna system for lack of
continuity or insulation breakdown.

CODE 1
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
A. Trouble-shooting procedures consist primarily of isolation of faulty components. When trouble-shooting

the system, the headsets, microphones, control panels, and transceivers may be checked by using a
known operational station.
B. It is advisable to interchange the control panels, headsets, microphones, and transceivers of an alternate
system to help in isolating a component malfunction.
coax and VHF Antenna system using the 'Time Domain Reflectometer" (TDR) tester. Using this
NOTE: Intermittent Loss of Radio Communication: Loss of radio communication has occasionally been reported
when flying through clouds or near thunderstorms. This may result from improperly bonded lightening strips
on the nose radome. Refer to DC-9 Maintenance Manual Chapter 23-60-00, Page 101.
C. The sidetone is a built-in self-test feature of the transceiver. The sidetone is a sample of the modulated
radio frequency that is returned to the headset as audio for checking the voice character of the RF signal.
D. After replacement of a transceiver or VHF Comm Control Panel, a system check should be performed as
outlined in 23-20-00 Maintenance Practices.
NOTE: After replacement of an Audio Control Panel, the following functions should be verified to be operational:
(2) ATC Transponder
(4) Marker Beacon
E. The total VHF Communications System consists of three VHF transceivers, each independent of each
other, and capable of being monitored at any of the audio control panels. The input switching capabilities
of the control panel can be utilized to isolate particular problems.
F. A Trouble-Shooting index is provided in Section 3. and is to be utilized as an aid to quickly find the chart
that applies to a particular problem.
G. Refer to Section 4. for circuit breaker locations.
H. The simplified schematics on the trouble shooting charts are to be used in conjunction with the wiring
diagrams to help simplify the voltage and continuity checks.

CODE 6 23-20-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
A. The following equipment or equivalent substitute may be required during the trouble shooting procedures.
Item Name Number Manufacturer Use
A Volt-Ohm- Model260 Simpson Take AC and DC voltage

Meter readings and check circuit
continuity.
3. Trouble Shootina Index Communications System
A. The malfunctions that are covered in this trouble shooting procedure are listed as follows:
Malfunction Fiaure No.
No Reception at One Audio Station (Captain's, 101

First Officer's, Observer's, or Radio Rack).
No Reception at All Audio Stations 102

(One VHF System)
No Reception on One or More Channels. 103
Intermittent Reception at One Audio Station. 104
Weak Reception at All Stations. 105
Transmitter Will Not Transmit From One Audio Station 106

(Radio Rack).

(Captain's, First Officer's, or Observer's).
Transmitter Will Not Transmit From Any Station. 108
Weak or Distorted Transmission From One Station. 109
Transmitter Will Not Transmit On One Channel 110

(All Stations).

CODE 6 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
4. Circuit Breakers
A. Verify the following circuit breakers are opened before performing the Trouble Shooting Procedures.
Circuit Breaker Location
ADF-2 26 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.

VHF NAV-2 26 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
DME-2 26 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
DME-2 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
ATC-2 26 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
ATC-2 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
VHF NAV-2 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
Marker Beacon 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
ADF-2 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
AUX VHF NAV 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
VHF NAV-1 28 VDC Overhead Emergency DC Bus
VHF NAV-1 26 VAC Overhead Emergency DC Bus
Flight Interphone-1 28 VDC Overhead Emergency DC Bus
VHF COMM-1 28 VDC Overhead Emergency DC Bus
Integral Lights 26 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel
(Right and Left).
Effectivity
CODE 6 23-20-00 Page 103
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I NO RECEPTION AT ALL AUDIO STATIONS

(ONE VHF SYSTEM)
I
t 2. INTERCHAYGE VHF/COMM COYTROL
I PROBABLEFAULT
1. TRANSCEIVER
2 . VOLTAGE
I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT B R U K E R S AN0 REMOVE VHF
TRANSCEIVER.
PANEL.
1. FROM THE TRANSCENER RECEPTACLE, CONTINUITY

CHECK THROUGH VOLUME CONTROL (FULL CLOCKWISE)
OF THE VHF COMMflAV CONTROL PANEL A S FOLLOWS:
V H F - 1 R 5 0 - 4 5 PIN 3 5 TO TERMINAL STRIP 5 3 0 - 2 9 TEJIM 2 0
1
VHF-2 R50-47 PIN 3 5 TO T E R U I U L STRIP $ 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 2 2
VHF-3 RSO-99 PIN 3 5 TO TERMINAL STRIP 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 2 1
VARY THE VOLUME CONTROL SLOWLY CHECKING FOR OPE11 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM WINDING. 2. REMOVE VHF C O W CONTROL PANEL.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS. PIN 1 TO GROUND (TYPICAL A L L PLUGS) 3. CHECK CONTINUITY FROM VHF COMM CONTROL
PANEL TO TRANSCEIVER:
2. USING ALTERNATE VHF SYSTEM. VERIFY REPLACE VHF COMY
I
(a1 VHF-1 P 1 0 - 1 4 1 TO R 5 0 - 4 4
AN OPERATIONAL AUOlO NETWORK. CONTROLPANEL VHF-2 P 1 0 - 1 5 1 TO R50-46
VHF-3 P l O - 1 5 2 TO R5O-98
PIN 2 7 TO PIN 9
(bl VHF-1 P 1 0 - 1 4 1 TO R5O-45
VHF-2 P 1 0 - 1 3 1 TO R5O-47
1 VHF-3 P 1 0 - 1 5 2 TO R 5 0 - 9 9
PIN 2 1 TO PIN 27
1. RETURN TO DEFECTIVE VHF SYSTEM.
2. USE PHONE A N 0 MICROPHONE JACK, CORRECT WlRlNG OR FAULTY
ONTRANSCEIVER FRONTPANEL.
PIN CONNECTIONS.
3. CHECK FOR RECEPTION.
4. CHECK FOR SIDETONE.
SIDETONE NO SIOETONE RECEPTION

NO RECEPTION NO RECEPTION
OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

REMOVE TRANSCENER. CORRECT WIRING
CLOSE VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
MEASURE 2 8 VDC AS FOLLOWS: VHF TRANSCEIVER
I 1. OPENVHF COMM CIRCUIT I I I

VHF-1
VHF-3
R50-44
R50-98
I
I
1
2.
3.
BREAKERS
INTERCHANGE VHF
TRANSCEIVER.
CHECK FOR RECEPTION.
II
1 I
1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. INTERCHANGE TRANSCEIVER.
I
I
PINS TYPICAL
PIN 3 TO PIN 1
PIN 4 TO PIN 2
DC INPUT
DC INPUT
POWER GROUND
POWER GRWND
NO SIDETONE
RECEPTION NO RECEPTION
I I REMOTE ON/OFF
I
+
1. VERIFY AN OPERATIONAL ANTENNA SYSTEM.
L
I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

2. CONTINUITY CHECK USING APPLICABLE
PLUG:
I AUOlO OUTPUT MOT1
COMMON
2. INSERT A THRU LINE WATTMETER IN SERIES
WITH ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE. PER 2 3 - 2 0 - 0 VHF-1 R50-44
VHF-2 R 5 0 - 4 6 6 AUDIO OUTPUT COMMON
2 9 SIDETONE COMMON
1
II ARE
i i 0 ~ < PI)(S TYPICAL
PIN 3 TO VHF COMM C l R C U l l BREAKER.
PIN 4 TO VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKER.
PIN 1 TO GROUNO.
I
PIN 2 TO GROUND.
1. OPENVHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. CONTlNUlTY CHECK ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE. ANTENNA R
V
PIN TO PIN CONTINUITY I NO CONTINUITY
PIN TO GROUND
PIN TO SHIELD.
NO CONTINUITY 1 CONTINUITY 1 I
**
NOTES:
E/E
F E E 0 THROUGH
COMPARTMENT
VHF-1 P O W W E 0 FROM EMERGENCY BUS

REPLACE TRANSCEIVER.
CHECK FOR RECEPTION.
BREAKER. CHECK PIN CONTACT AT CORRECT WIRING
* VHF-2 POWERED FROM RIGHT RADIO BUS
VHF-3 WWERED FROM L E F T RADIO BUS
IDENTICAL EXCEPT AS S H W N THUS: 0
No Rece~tionat One Audio Station
(Captain's, First off icerk, Observer's, or Radio Rack)
Figure 101
CODE 6 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
CAPTAIN'S, FIRST OFFICER, OBSERVER.
II MOVE EMERGENCY SWITCH FROM THE

NORMAL TO THE EMER POSITION.
AUDIOSHOULDBEPRESENT AT EACH
POSITION
II 111 OPEN R I G H T INTERPHDNE AND
VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
(21 INTERCIUNGE AUDIO CONTROL
PANEL. I
I H U D S E T (OR JACK).
AUDlO CONTROL PANEL.
WIRING I
IllOPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMU ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
(11 CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND
VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
(21 CHECK HEADSET USING ALTERNATE
VHF SYSTEM OR STATION.
I (1) OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF
COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
(21 INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL I (21 CONllNUlTY CHECK AUDIO OUTPUT.
CAPTAIN'S
OBSERVER
P10-145
P10-146
F R S T OFFICER
RADIO RACK
NWE: PLUGS *RE TYPICAL.
P10-144
P10-147
PIN 4 3 TO HEADSET JACK (HOT).
I I AUDIO IN NORMAL
AND EYER.
AUOIO IN EMER
POSITION ONLY
PIN 1 TO GROUND
SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC I S APPLICABLE
TO A L L VOLTAGE AND CONTINUITY CHECKS.
FAULTY STATION
t L I
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
INTERCHANGE RETURN TO I (1) OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE A N 0

CONTINUITY CHECK THE AUDIO INPUT.
CHECK FROM FAULTY AUDIO STATION' nv "- 4 3 AUOIO OUTPUT
:I
I
I 11
HEADSET WITH FAULTY AUDIO. YHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS. - AUDIO COMMON
TO AUDIO STATION KNOW TO B E OPER-
HEADSET KNOWN TO POSITION (21 REMOVE AUDlO CONTROL PANEL PLUG. HEADSET
ATIONAL.
B E OPERATIONAL (31 CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE ClRCUlT
. AUDIO
1 BREAKERS.
(4) MEASURE 2 8 VOC AS FOLLOWS:
CAPTAIN'S P10-145
VHF-1 PIN 3 8 TO PIN 3 8
VHF-2 PIN 2 1 TO PIN 21
FIRST OFFICER ~10:144
C/PNO.lOR NO. 2 I
11 b 7 POWER GROUND
OBSERVER F'lQ-146
RADIO RACK P10-147 I
PIN 1 3 TO PIN 1 7
PIN 1 3 TO GROUND
NOTE: PLUGS ARE TYPICAL
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
ALTERNATE STATION I
I NO VOLTAGE
(11 OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE ClRCUlT BREAKERS.

(21 CONTINUITY CHECK AS FOLLOWS:
CAPTAIN'S P 1 0 - I 4 5 PIN 1 3 TO FLIGHT INTER-
PHONE C / P NO. 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER
FIRST 0FFICER.OBSERVER. OR RADIO RACK PIN 13.
TO FLIGHT INTERPHONE C / P NO. 2 ClRCUlT BREAKER.
AUDIO INPUTS
i
TYPICAL A L L
STATIONS
REPLACE
AUDIO CONTROL
PANEL
No Reception at All Audio Stations

(One VHF System)
Figure 102

CODE 6 23-20-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NO RECEPTION ON ONE OR
MORE CHANNELS
VHF COYYnLAV CONTROL PAllEL

VHF TRANSCEWER
(1) OPEN V W COUU CRCUK BREAKERS.

( D INTERCHANGEVHr COMIUNAV
CONTROL PANEL.
(3) CHECK FOR W E C T N E CHANNELS.
I I
(11 OPEN W F C W U CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
(21 INTERCHANGEW TMNSCENER.
(31 CHECX FOR OEFECTNE CHANNELS.
CONTROL PANEL.
W TRANJCENED lb) COUU/W*V CONTROL PANEL

VHF-1 R S M S mF1P10-141
VHF-2 R 5 M 7 W - 2 P10-151
WF-3 R M - 9 9 VHF-3 P 1 0 - U 2
WYMI)(AV PINS 1 TO L TRANSCENER
COUYrllAV PINS 2 TO 2. TRAYSCENLR
C O U Y M V PINS J TO 3. TRANSCENfR
COUU/WN PINS 4 TO 6. TRANSCWER
C O M U M V PINS 5 TO 7. TRANSCENER
W U Y M V PINS 6 TO 9. TRANSCENEA
C O M U M V PINS 7 TO 10. TRANSCENER
COYU/WY PINS 8 TO 11. TRANSCEIVZIL
COYY/NAV PINS 9 TO 12. TRAMSCUVER COMU/Y*V PWS 2 0 TO 26. TRAIIKLNR
COMU/NAV PIUS 1 0 TO 1% TRANSCENER
C O N W U V PINS 11 TO 1% TRANSCEIVER
I NOTE: W O faOUT OF F N E 6 1 BINARY CHART 01 SlYPLlFlED SCHEMATICS
+
YAY BE USED TO DETERUINE PINS A P P L C M L E TO THE CHANNEL.
CORRECT WRIYC AND

FAULTY PIN COIYECTW)NS
No Reception on One or More Channels

Figure 103
Effectivity
CODE 6 23-20-00 Page 106
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
OM AUDIO STATION
I PROBABLE FAULT
I
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONEAN0 VHF
C O W CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. ISOLATE PROBLEM BY WITCHING TO
ALTERNATE VHF SYSTEM.
-
1. OPEN FUCMT INTERPHONE AND VHF INTERCIUNCE HEADSET
COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS. WITH HEADSET KNOWN
2. INTERCHANGEAUDIO CONTROL PANEL. TO BE OPERATIONAL
-
EAMITTENT
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMM

c ~ c u r BREAKERS.
r R E P U C E AUMO
2 . CO~RIYUIT( . CHECK AUDIO INPUT
... .~THAT IS CONTROL PANEL
APsUCABLE TO THE VHF SYSTEUi ALSO.
CHECK FOR LOOSE. OR OAMACEDWRE AT
CAPTAIN'S P10-145
FIRST C&CER'S P10-146
RADIO RACK P1D-147
NOTE: PINS ARE T Y P C U AT EACH AUDIO STATION
WF-1
VHF-2
VHF-1
PIN 38
PlY 2 1
PIN 4 1
I CHECK HEADSET
J X K F O ( I LOOSE
CONNECTIOMS I
1 REPLICE
HEADSET
Intermittent Reception at One Audio Station

Figure 104
CODE 6 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I I
uI
YFAK RECEPTION AT A l l STATIONS
PROBABLE FAULT
(11 OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
I 1. TRANSCEIVER I (21 I N T E R C W W E VHF C O M M M V

CONTROL PANEL.
2. VHF COMWNAV CONTROL PANEL
3. ANTENNA W R M A L RECEPTION WEAK RECEPTION
AT STATIONS AT STATIONS
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND

I 2. USING PHONE AND MICROPHONE

JACK ON TRANSCENER FRONT
I , -2
POWER GROUND
PANEL. CHECK FOR RECEPTION
WEAK RECEPTION I RECEPTION NORMAL

REPLACE VHF COMM/
NAY CONTROL PANEL
* VHF COMM
-
&A!
3
P W E R GROUND
DC P W E R INPUT
DC P W E R INPUT
I
VHF C W V CONTROC PANEL I
1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT
BREAKERS.
5 AUDIO OUTPUT (HOT)

1 1. OPENVHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2 . REMOVE TRANSCENER FROM DEFECTIVE I 2. REMOVE TRANSCEIVER FROM DEFECTIVE VHF SYSTEM.
3. CONTINUITY CHECK THROUGH VOLUME CONTROL 2. CONTINUITY C I E C K USING APPLICABLE PLUG:
I VHF SYSTEM.
3. CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AN0 MEASURE
2 8 VDC AS FOLLOWS: I (FULL CLOCI(WISE1 ON THE VHF COMM/NAV CONTROL
PANEL USING TRANSCENER RECEPTEAL
V H F - 1 R50-45, PIN 3 5 TO TERMINAL STRIP
VHF-1
VHF-2
.... -
VHF-3
R50-44
R50-46
d50-98
I
S 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 2 0 . NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL TERMINAL
PIN 3 TO VhF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKER STRIP
GF-3 R50-98 VHF-2 R 5 0 - 4 7 , PIN 3 5 TO TERMINAL STRIP PIN 4 TO VtlF COMM CRCUlT BREAKER 530-29
PIN 3 TO 1 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 2 2 . PIN 1 TO GROUND
PIN 4 TO 2 VHF-3 R 5 0 - 9 9 PIN 35 TO TERMINAL STRIP PIN 2 TO ~ O U N O
4 . ALSO CHECK O N m F F SWITCH FOR GROUND S 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 21.
NO CONTINUITY ITINUIN 1 CONTINU

ANTENNA
BULKHEAD
E/E COMPARTMENT
FEED THROUGH

2. CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENNA COXIAL
CABLES: PIN TO PIN
PIN TO GROUND
SHIELD CONNECTOR TO SHIELD CONNECTOR
NO CONTINUITY I CONTINUITY
NOTES:
* v H F - ~ POWERED B Y EMERGENCY BUS
VHF-2 POWERED BY RIGHT RADIO BUS.
$ W F - 3 POWERED BY L E F l RADIO BUS
IOENTICAL EXCEPT AS SHOWN THUS. <>-
tinu
1 *
REPAIR OR REPLACE
COAXIAL CABLES REPLACE ANTENNA
REPLACE TRANSCEIVER
Weak Reception at All Stations

u CORRECT WIRING
CHECK Dt POWER
AND WIRING
Figure 105

CODE 6 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
r 1
I CHECK MICROPHONE CONTROL. I 1.OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
I 1. OPENVHF COUM AND FLIGHT INTERPHONE

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. CONTINUITY CHECK AS FOLLOWS:
RAOlO RACK P 1 0 1 4 7-
PIN 7 TO GROUND, PUSH TO T A L I SWITCH CLOSED
I 2.CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO INPUT AS FOLLOWS:
M O l O RACK P 1 0 - I 4 7
PIN 2 TO U l c R o P n o n E JACK UUOIO HOT)
PIN 1 TO GROUND (CHECK FOR FAULTY JACK CONTACTS)
MICROPHONE
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
WIRING
No CONTlNUlTY I CONTINUITY
1
1 CORRECT w w c
OR R E P U C E
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COUU CIRCUIT BREAKERS. PUSH 1 0 TALK
2. CHECK PUSH TO T A L K SWITCH BY CHECKING AH ALTERNATE VMF
SYSTEM.
3. CHECK SWR METER AND SIDETONE.
TRANSMITTER W L L NOT KEY PUSH TO TALK SWITCH OK

AND NO SIDETONE BUT NO SIDETONE
I I
t
v
1. OPEN FLIGHT INlERPHOYE AND VHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS. I I 1 OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
I I
1 2. CONTINUrTY CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO
I
2. CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE OUTPUT
CONTROL USING R U G S BETWEEN FAULTY OUTPUT USING PLUGS BETWEEN FAULTY
1. INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE AND OPERATIONAL STATIONS:
CHECK FOR VOICE TRANSMISSION AND OPERATIONAL STATIONS:
2. CHECK SWR METER AN0 SIOETONE.
CAPTAIN'S P10-145 CAPTAIN'S P10-145
U E T t R INDICATION NO SWR NO TRANSMISSION 1 TRANSMISSION I FIRST OFFICER'S

OBSERVER
R A M 0 RACK
P10-144
P10-146
PlD-147
FIRST OFFICER P 1 0 - 1 4 4
OBSERVER
R A W 0 RACK
P10-146
P10-147
VHF-1 PIN B TO PIN 8 VHF-1 PIN 3 TO PIN 3
VHF-2 PIN 9 TO PIN 9 VHF-2 PIN 4 TO PIN 4
-
-
VHF-3 PIN 1 0 TO PIN 10
REPUCE REPUCE
MICROPHONE MICROPHONE
VERIFY VHF
TRANSUISSION
u CORRECT WIRING
r l CORRECT WRING
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
1. OPEN VHF COMM AND FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT BREAKERS. 1 AUDIOCOMYON

Z. IIITERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL.
ALTERNATE AUDIO 2 UICROPHONE AUDIO
C M R O L PANfl 7 MICROPHONE CONTROL
TRANSMISSION NO SWR
110 READING
SIDETONE
NO TRANSMISSION
I
I 3
-
I
3 MICROPHONE AUDIO VHF-1
I
I
I 4 MICROPHONE AUDIO VHF-2
I I 4
II 5 MICROPHONE AUDIO VHF-3
5
-------------9
1I I
I
8
9
UICROPHONE CONTROL V W - 1
MICROPHONE CONTROL VHF-2

I
I 1 0 MICROPHONE CONTROL VHF-3
TERMINAL
1I
-- r
STRIP TO ALTERNATE AUDIO
AUDIO s30-52 CONTROL PANELS
CONTROL TO VHF TRANSCEIVERS
PAMEL
682-8408
Transmitter Will Not Transmit From One Audio Station

(Radio Rack)
Figure 106
Effectivity
CODE 6 23-20-00 Page 109
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
- - --
TRANSMITTER WILL NOT TRANSMIT FROM ONE AUDIO STATION 1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM
I I
(CAPTAIN'S, FIRST OFFICER. OR OBSERVER) 1. OPEN VHF COMM AhD F L l G H i INTERPHONE CIRCUIT BREAKERS. ClRCUlT B R U K E R S .
2. INTERCHANGE AUOI( CONTROL PANEL. 2. CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO INPUT USING
APPCKABLE PLUG AS FOLLOWS:
5-77
CAPTAIN'S P10-145
TRANSMIS510N 2 ~~$&ISSlON NO TRANSMISSION FIRST OFFICER P 1 0 - 1 4 4
OBSERVER P10-146
PIN 2 TO MICROPHONE U C K (AUDIO HOT)
PIN 1 TO GROUND ICHECK FOR FAULTY
JACK CONTACTS)
.
t
PROBABLE FAULT AUDIO
MICROPHONE CONTROL
AUDlO CONTROL PANEL
WIRING
CHECK MICROPHONE CONTROL.

1. OPEN VHF COMM AND FLIGHT INTERPHONE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS. I 1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT BREAKER
AND VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. CONTINUITY CHECK APPLICABLE PLUG AS
FOLLOWS:
NOTE: PINS ARE I Y P E A L .
CAPTAIN'S P 10-145
FIRST OFFICER P:O-144
II 2. CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE AUOlO
OUTPUT USING PLUGS BETWEEN FAULTY
AN0 OPERATIONAL STATIONS:
CAPTAIN'S P10-145
OBSERVER P :0-146 FIRST OFFICER P10-144
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF OBSERVER P10-146
COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. PIN 7 TO GROUND PUSH TO TALK
SWITCH CLOSED. VHF-1 PIN 3 TO PIN 3
2. CHECK PUSH TO TALK SWITCH BY VHF-2 PIN 4 TO PIN 4
PIN 1TO GROUND, PUSH TO TALK
CHECKING THE WJTlNG ACTION OF VHF-3 PIN 5 TO PIN 5
SWITCH OPEN.
SPEAKER AMPLIFIER.
NO CONTINUITY
t
INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE
CHECK MUTING & TUNING
+
CHECK FOR VOICE TRANSMISSION
I. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM
ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
CONTROL USING APPLICABLE PLUGS
BETWEEN FAULTYANDOPERATIONAL
STATIONS:
I
I
1
CORRECT WIRING
OR REPLACE
MICROPHONE
JACK
A
i AUDIO
n CORRECT WIRING
COMMON
CAPTAIN'S P10-145 2 MICROPHONE AUDIO
MUTING NO MUTING TRANSMISSION NO TRANSMISSION FIRST OFFICER P 1 0 - 1 4 4
OBSERVER P10-146 7 MICROPHONECONTROL
VHF-1 PIN 8 TO PIN B
==r-
VHF-2 PIN 9 TO PIN 9
AUDlO CONTROL P A N R
- NO CONTINUITY
I
3 MICROPHONE AUDIO
8 MICROPHONE CONTROL
I VHF-1
4 MICROPHONE AUDIO
IVHF-2
n
L
t 5 MICROPHONE AUDlO IVHF .3
CORRECT WIRING 1 0 MICROPHONE CONTROL
MICROPHONE REPLACE OR REPLACE
MICROPHONE CORRECT WIRING
VERIFY VHF PUSH TO TALK
SWITCH
ALTERNATE AUDIO CONTROL PANELS

Transmitter Will Not Transmit From One Audio Station VHF TRANSCENERS
(Captain's, First Officer's, or Observer's)

Figure 107

CODE 6
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
0
TRANSMllTER WILL NOT TRANSMIT FROM ANY AUDIO STATION
4
1. OPEN V H C O W CIRCUIT IYIEAKERS.
2. lNTERCHANGE TRANSCENU.
1
1
+
1. OPEN W F COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. I N T E R C H W E TMNSCEIVER.
TRANSMISSION I NoTUIISmsYoN
I I
VHF TRANSCEIVER
'-4
Y
TRANSMlSSlON NO TMNSMlSSlON 5 oc PDWCR INPUT

1. TRANSCENER AND SIOETONE AND NO SIOnONE VHF C o U4U- * DC P W E R INPUT
2. ANTENNA SYSTEM
3. POWER INPUT
I I I
n
4. WIRING
UEROPHONE AUMO
MPXOPHONE CONTROL
REPUCE TRANSCEIVER
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMM

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2. USING PWONE AND MICROPHONE JACKS ON
THEFROKT PANELOFTHE TRANSCEIVER,
CHECK SIDETONE WHILE CALLING THE TOWER.
I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. ANTENNA

T E R M I M L STRIP
530-29
I
i
I 2. R E U W E VHF TRANSCENER.
3. CLOSE VHF COUY ClllCUlT BREAKERS.
4. MEASURE 2 8 VDC AT THE APPLICABLE
PLUG AS F O L L W S !
CD
nuLanuo
FEED THROUGH
VE COMPARTMENT
C ANTENNA
B
I
I
WF-1 RSM4
VW-2 150-46 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
VHF-3 RSO-98
PIN 3 TO PIN 1 2. INSERT THRU LINE WATTUEfER AND PERFORM
PIN 4 TO PIN 2 FORWARD AN0 REFLECTED P O m R CHECK PER
23-20-0 M A I I I T E W K E PRACTKES.
1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS MOTE:. PlNS AnE TYPICAL
t
~
2. R E Y W E TRANSCEIVER VOLTAGE I NO VOLTAGE REFLECTED POWER MORE THAN M OF FORWARD POWER.

3. CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE INPUTS
USING THE APPLICABLE PLUG AS FOLLOWS:
1 I I
VMF-1
It5044 TO TERMINAL STRIP
PIN 3 0 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 1 4
CHECK R U G S FOR 2. CONTlNUlTY CHECK A N T E N M COAXIAL CABLES
PIN 3 1 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 15
FAULTY PlN CONTACT AS FOLLOWS:
VW-2
PIN TO PIN a ZERO OHM
R50-46 TO T ERMINAL STRIP
PlN TO SHIELD INFINITV
PIN 3 0
PIN 3 1
TO
TO
5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 1 8
530-29 TERM 1 9
I CONTINUITY I W CDNTlNUlTY 1
R50-98
PIN 3 0
TO
TO
VHF-3
TERMINAL STRIP
5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 1 6
1
PIN 31 TO S M - 2 9 T U I M 17
*..
jC VHF-1 POWERED FROM EYERU3lCY BUS
V W - 2 P O m R E O F R W RIGHT WID BUS
NO CONTINUITY
I 2. CONTlNUlTY CHECK USING THE APPLICABL:
PLUGS:
WF-1 R50-44
I Y V W - 3 POWERED FROM LEFT H U D W S
IDENTICAL EXCEPT S M M T W S : <>-
VHF-2 1150-46
WF-3 RSO-98
PlN 3 TO VHF C O W CIRCUIT M U K E R .
PlN 4 TO VHF C O W CIRCUIT M U K E R .
PlN I TO GROUND
PIN 2 TO GROUND
c
l CORRECT WIRING
Transmitter Will Not Transmit From Any Audio Sation

Figure 108
r-l CORRECT W R I f f i
R E P U C E ANTENIU CORRECT WRING
Effectivity
CODE 6 23-20-00 Page 111
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
r- WEAK OR DISTORTED TRANSMISSION

(ONE STATION1
I
-
- -
P R O B M L E FAULT
1. Y I ~ O P H O N E
2. AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
1.CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE A N D V W C W U

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. CHECK MICROPHONE USING ALTERNATE
1.OPEU FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COYY

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. INTERCHANCE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
I I N T E R C H I N U YICROPHONE WITH
STATION K W H OPUIATIOWAL
E CORRECTED
REPLACE
MICROPHONE
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COYY

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. CONTINUITY CHECK YICROPHONE OUTPUT
FOR LOOSE OR HIGH RESISTANT CONNEC-
TIONS.
CAPTAIN'S P10-145
FIRST CFFICER'S P10-144
OBSERVER PlO-146
RADIO RACK P10-147
W F - 1 PIN 3 TO SU)-52 TERY 2 2
VHF-2 F l M 4 TO 5 3 0 - 5 2 TERY 18
VHF-3 PIN 5 TO 5 3 0 - 5 2 TERM 2 0
NOTE; PINS ARE T Y P M L A T EACH PLUG
AUDIO CONTROL
PANEL TERMINAL STRl
530-52
TYPlCAL FOR ALL STATIONS
1
I CORRECT VIIRING, LOOSE WIRE.
W PIN ALIGUUENT .
Il REPLACE AUDIO
CDNTROLPANEL
I
Weak or Distorted Transmission From One Station
Figure 109
Effectivity
CODE 6 23-20-00 Page 112
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
r TRANSMITTER WILL NOT TRANSMIT ON

--
ONE CHANNB (ALL AUOlO STATIONS) I
PROBABLEFAULTS
VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER

VHF COMMR(AV CONTROL PANEL
WIRING
1 111 OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF

COYU CIRCUIT BRUIKERS 1
I 12) INTERCHANGE VHF COMM/NAV
CONTROL PANEL
13) CLOSE BREAKERS
141 CHECK FOR TRANSCEIVER TUNING
I
ON DEFECTNE CHANNELS
OEFECTWE 1 CORRECTED ,
I I
111 OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF
COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS
121 INTERCHANGE VHF COMM
TRANSCENER
I31 CLOSE BREAKERS
141 CHECK FOR TRAISCEIVER TUNING
ON OEFECTNE CHANNELS
TUNED 1 NOTUNING
I I
11) OPEN VHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS. CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
12) REPLACE VHF COYM I2 R E P U C E CONTROL
11) OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BRUIKERS

+
12) REMOVE VHF COMM TRANSCEIVER
1% OISCONNECT PLUG FROM VHF COMM/NAV CONTROL PANEL
141 CONTINUITY CHECK THE FOLLOWlNt WIRES USING THE APPLICABLE PLUG:
W TRANSCENER (b) VHFCOMM/)UVC!MTROL PANEL
VHF-1 R5O-45 VHF-1 P10-141
VHF-2 R5047 VHF-2 P10-151
VHF-3 R5O-99 VHF-3 P10-152
COMM/NAV PINS 1 TO 1. TRANSCEIVER C O M U W V PINS 12 TO lb. TRANSCENER

COMMflAV PINS 2 TO 2. TRANSCEIVER COMM/WV PINS 13 TO 17. TRARSCEMR
COUM/NAV PINS 3 TO 3. TRANSCENER C O M M W V PIUS 14 TO 18. TRARKENER
COMU/)UV PINS 4 TO 6. TRANSCENER COUMWV P l u s 15 TO 19. TRARSCENEII
COMM/NAV PINS 5 TO 7. TRANSCEIVER COMM/IUY PINS l b TO 21. TRANSCENER
C O M M W V PINS b TO 9. TRANSCEIVER C O M M W V PINS 17 TO 22. TRANSCENU
UIMMfiAV PINS 7 TO 10. TRANSCEIVER COYMWVPINS 18 TO 23. TRANSCENU
COMU/NAV PINS 8 TO 11. TRANSCEIVER C O U U W V PINS 19 TO 24. TRANSCENER
I
COUU/NAV PINS 9 TO 12. TRANSCEIVER C O U M M V PINS 20 TO 26. TRANSCEIVER
COMM/NN PINS 1 0 TO 13. TRANSCEIVER COMMlWIV PINS 21 TO 27. TRANSCENER
COMMI)(AV PINS 11 TO 15. TRANSCEIVER
NOTE: 2OUT OF 5 BINARY CHAR1 ON SlYPLlFlEO SCHEMATICS C A M BE USED

TO DETERYINE PINS APPLICABLE TO THE OEFECTIVE CHANNELS.
I CORRECT WIRING AND CHECK

FOR FAULN PIN CONNECTIONS
I
Transmitter Will Not Transmit on One Channel
(All Audio Stations)
Figure 110
CODE 6
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
VHF-1 C O W I NAV. WE-1 PANEL
28 VM: INPUT
MUTING CONTROL
VHF-1
TRANSCEIVER
28 VDC - EMER)
NOTE:
6 1 8 M - 1 T/R UNIT I S
SHOWW. T/R 6 1 8 M - 2
SLIGHTLY DIFFERENT
COMPLETELYBUT
IMTERNALLY
INTERCHANGEABLE.
AUDIO PANEL
28 VDC INPUT
VHF-1 W
-+TO SELCAL
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO W T W T
AUDIO COMMON
VHF-I
I
COMMUNICATION VHF-1
COMUUllCATlON
50 KHZ
TRANSCEIVER I ANTENNA
VHF-1 Communications - Simplified Schematic

Figure 111
Effectivity
CODE 6 23-20-00 Page 114
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
b i e u - 1 rm u n l r 1s
SHOWN. T l l l 6 1 8 M - 2
SUGIITLY DIFFERENT
INTERNALLY BUT
COMPLETELY
INTERCWNCE*BLE.
-4 TO S E L U L
AUDIO INPUT
AUDIO W T W T
AUDIO COMMON
WF-2
COMMUNlCATlOW
ANTENNA

Figure 112

CODE 6
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NOT
USED Nogo MAX I------
I
23 SPEAKER YUTlNC
- OFF10
26-25-23-22 27-24
L
TO
SELCAL I L
TO
SELCAL
OUT 5
WERTER
CARD MOTE:
6 1 8 U - 1 T/R UNIT 15
SHOWY. T f l 6 1 8 Y - 2
AUDIO OUTPUT
-)TO SELCAL
Hl OSC
T -
A F L T INTERWON
C/P NO. 2
iI
r7 R l E ~ ~TINDARD c ~ -D- 1 LINE FILTER -3 1 1 FJ(
AUDIO COMMON
VHF-3
0 1 , POWER CRD
COMMUNICATION VHF-3
COMMUNICATION
5 0 KHZ
TRANSCEIVER I ANTENNA

Figure 113
Effectivity
CODE 6 23-20-00 Page 116
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. General

known operational control station.
coax and VHF Antenna system using the 'Time Domain Reflectometet' (TDR) tester. Using this
NOTE: Intermittent Loss of Radio Communication:
Loss of radio communication has occasionally been reported when flying through clouds or near
thunderstorms. This may result from improperly bonded lightening strips on the nose radome. Refer to
DC9 Maintenance Manual Chapter 23-60-00, Page 101.
D. After the replacement of a transceiver or VHF comm control panel, a system check should be performed
as outlined in 23-20-00, Maintenance Practices.
NOTE: After replacement of an audio control panel, the following functions should be verified to be operational:
(2) ATC Transponder
(4) marker Beacon
E. The total VHF Communications System consists of two VHF transceivers, each independent of each

CODE 9 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
A Volt-Ohm- Model 260 Simpson Take AC and DC voltage

continuity.
3. Trouble Shootina Index Communications Svstem
Malfunction Figure No.
No Reception at One Audio Station 101
No Reception at All Audio Stations. 102

(One VHF System)
No Transmission or Reception on One or More 103

Channels.

(Radio Rack).

(Captain's, First Officer's, or Observer's).

CODE 9 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
4. Circuit Breakers

AUX VHF NAV 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel R.H.
(Right and Left).
Effectivity
CODE 9 23-20-00 Page 103
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
0 NO RECEPflON AT ONE AUDIO STAllON
PROBA3LF F A U L T
HEADSET (OR J A C K ) .
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
MOVE E M E 2 G t V C Y SWITCH FHOM THE
NORMAL TO THE € M E 2 POSITION
AUDIO SHOULD BE PQESENT AT EACH
POSITION
AUDIO I N EMER
POSIT101 ONLY
Ill OPLY L I G H T I N T E ~ P H O ~ E
VHF iCMV CIRCUIT BREALESS.
(21 INTEPC?Z\CE 4 u D l O CO'ITSOL
AND
WIRING
I I
A-
( 1 ) OPEN FLIZ": :NTE2PHOYL. n Y 3 y u F CUMhl CIRCUIT BREAKE'S.
(11 CLOSE F L I G q T INTERPSONE AkD ( 1 ) OPEN F L I G H T INTERPHO\-I A k D V h F (21 CONTI,<IIT f C-ECK ACOIO O C T i - 1 .
V H F C O M U CIRCUIT BREAKEZS. COMN CIRCUIT B R E 4 P k 3 S .
(2) INTERCHANGE 4UOIO CONTR>L CAPTA~N'S 150-56 FIRST O F i l C E R R50-58
( 2 ) CHECK HEADSET USING ALTE2NATE
PANEL. OBSEa.r.3 i55-60 RAJIO Z A C K R50-62
V H F SYSTEM OR STATION.
N';Ti: P L U G S ARE TYPICAL
PIN 1 9 TO H E A J S E l J A C K ( H 0 T I
PIN 1 TO H E A J S E T JACK (COMMONI
SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC I S A P P L I C A B L E
TO A L L VOLTAGE A N 0 CONTINUITY CHECXS.
CONTlhUITY CHECK THE AUO10 INPUT, ,,--C--

r
F A U L T Y STATIOY
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
19 AUDIO OUTPUT
-
INTERCHANGE
RETURY TO I (11 O P E l FLIGHT INTEUPLlOhF 4NI)
C H E C K F i l O M F A U L T Y AUDlO STATION I
HEADSET WITH
HEADSET KNOWN TO
FAULTY AUDIO VHF COUM CIHC'JIT 3.IEAYF3S
(2) REWOVE AUDIO CONT?OL P A V F L PLUC
TO AUDIO STATION KXOW TO B E OPtr7- -
A
1 AUDIO COMMON
I
POSITION ATIONAL. MEADSET
BE OPEL4TIOSAL ( 3 1 CLOSE F L l G r i I k l c 2 P H O I F CISCUIT
BRE4SESS V H F - 1 PI& 6 TO PIN 6
(41 MEASURZ 2? VOC A S FOLLOWS V H F - 2 PIN 2 4 TO PIN 2 4
F L I G H T INTERPMONE d l 3 2 8 VDC INPUT
CAPTAIN 5 R50-56
FIRST OFFICE? 1750-58
CIPNO.1OR N 0 . 2 I
11 1--14 W W E R GROUND
OBSERVER R50-60
I
RADIO R A C K 550-62
PIN 1 3 TO PIN 14
AUOlO CONTROL PANEL
PIN 1 3 T 0 6 3 0 U N D
ALTERHCTE STATION
NOTE PLUGS A 2 E TYPICAL
6 VMF-1
NO VOLTAGE
-- 24 VHF-2
I
( 1 ) OPEN F L l G H T INTE3PHONE CIRCUIT BREAKEQS

( 2 1 CONTINUITY CHECK A S F O L L O W S -
CAPTAIN'S R 5 0 - 5 6 PIN 1 3 TO F L I G H T I N T E R -
PHONE C / P NO 1 ClRCUlT B R E A K E 9
F I R S T OFFICER. R 5 O - 5 8 OBSELVER R 5 0 - 6 0 , OR
RADIO RACK 2 5 0 - 6 2 PIN 1 3 . TO F L I G H T INTERPHONE
C/P NO. 2 CIRCUIT B a E A K E R .
AUDIO INPUTS
TYPICAL A L L
STATIONS
REPLACE AUDIO CONTROL

MEADSET PANEL
No Reception at One Audio Station

Figure 101

CODE 9 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST

(ONE VHF S Y STEtll
I
I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT B R E A K E R S .
2. INTERCHANGE VHF/COUM CONTROL
PANEL.
I
I. TRANSCEIVE* 1 O
TRANSCEIVE9
P E N VHF COMM CldCUIT B R E A 6 i Q 5 'YO 3 t U G V E V H F
2. VOLTAGE
2 FROM THE TRAUSCtNCY I E C r P T A C L E , COYllNUlTY
CHECK THROUGH V O L U M ~CUYTLOL ( F U L L C L O C S A I S L )
O F THE VHF COUM NAV CONTKOL PANEL A S FOLLOWS
VHF-1 R50-45 PIN 3 5 TO R50-44 PIN 1 2
VHF-2 R5O-47 PIN 3 5 TO R50-46 P I N 12
1 CLOSE F L I G H T I N T i R P n O N E A N 0 VHF COMM

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
V A R Y THE VOLUME COMTROL SLOWLY CHECKING FOR OPEN
WINDING
1.
2.
OPEN V H F COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
REMOVE V H F C O M M CONTROL P A N E L .
3. CHECK CONTINUITY F R O M V H F COMM CONT?OL
1
P A N E L TO TRANSCEIVER.
2 . USING A L T E R N A T E V H F SYSTEM, VE-7fFY R E P L A C E VHF COMM (a1 V H F - 1 R 5 0 - 4 5 P I N 35 TO R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 12
AN O P E 2 A T I O N A L AUDIO NETWORK. COhTROL P A N E L V H F - 2 R 5 0 - 4 7 P I N 35 TO R 5 0 - 4 6 PIN 1 2
(bl V H F - 1 R 5 0 - 4 4 P I N 11 TO
TERMINAL STRIP 530-29 TERMINAL 1 2 .
V H F - 2 R 5 0 - 4 6 P I N 11 TO
TERMINAL STRIP 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERMINAL 15.
1. RETURN TO DEFECTIVE V H F S Y S T E M
2. USE PHONE AND MICROPHOVE JACK,
ON TRANSCEIVER FRONT P A N E L .
cOHYECT WIRING OR F A U L T Y 1 NO CONTINUITY I
PIN C U l \ i C I I O N S
3. CHECK FOR R E C E P I I O N
SIDETONE NO SIOETOSE
RECEPTION
NO RECCPTION NO RECEPTION
I 1.
2
OPEN V H F COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS
REMOVE T R A N S C E I V I 1 .
I 3 CLOSE V H F COMM ClilCUlT 9REAKEXS.

4. MEASURE 28 VOC AS F J L L O W S VHF TRANSCEIVER
I
1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT

BRE4KERS
VHF-1 R5J-44
7
PINS T Y P I C A L
I. OPEN V H F COLIM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. PIN 3 TO PIN 1 3 OC I N P U T
2. INTE2CHANGE VHF 2. L
'
,
INTERChANGE TRANSCEIVE?. 4 DC I N P U T
TRANSCEIVER. P I N 4 TO PIN 2
3 CHECK FOR RECEPTION , /

- 2
1 POWER
POWER GROUND
NO VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
VHF COMhVNAV A
RECEPTION
NO SIOETONE I I , I I
NO RECEPTION
I R E M O T E ON/OFF
1
rt I
I. OPEN VHF COMY CIRCUIT BREAKERS. $
I 1. VERIFY A N OPERATIONAL ANTENNA S Y S T E M . 1 2 CONTINUITY CHECK USING APPLICABLE
PLUG
AUOlO OUTPUT M O T )
I 2. INSERT A THRU L I N E W A T T M E T E R I N SERIES

WITH ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE, PER 2 3 - 2 0 - 0
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
R E F L ~ C T E OPOAER OVFR
1/9 OF b O H A r l V 0 POACR
I TRANSCEIVER
NOTE PINS ARE TYPICAL
,,I / -36
29' AUDIO OUTPUT COMMON
SIDETONE COMMON
PIN 3 TO V H F COMM CIRCUIT BREAKER.

t I
PIN 1 TO GROUND. L-J
PIN 2 TO GROUND. 530-29
1. OPEN V H F COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
L CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENNA COAXIAL C A B L E . ANTENNA %
v-
PIN TO PIN
PIN TO GROUND
F E E D THROUGH c
PIN TO SHIELD
NO CONTINUITY I CONTINUITY
I NOTES:
**
W E COMPARTMENT
1 1
V H F - I POWERED F R O M EMERGENCY B U S
R E P L A C E TRANSCEIVER.
CORRECTWIRIN~ VVH-2 POWERED F R O M RIGHT RADIO BUS
R E P L A C E ANTENNA B R t A K E R . CHECK PIN CONTACT AT
I O ~ N T I C A CEXCEPT A S SHOWN THUS: (
-
\

(One VHF System)
Figure 102
Effectivity
CODE 9 23-20-00 Page 105
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I NO TRANSMISSION OR RECEPTION
ON ONE OR MORE C H A N N n S I
I
VHF COMM/NN CONTROL PANEL
VHF TRANSCENER
WIRING
illOPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

121 INTERCHANGEVHF COMMfiAV
CONTROL PANEL.
I 3 1 CHECK FOR OEFECTNE CHANNELS.
DEFECTIVE 1 CORRECTEO
I 1
I I
I11 OPEW VHF COMU CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
12) INTERCHANGEVHF TRANSCEIVER.
131 CHECK FOR DEFECTNE CHANNELS.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS ClRCUIT BREAKERS.

12) REPLACE VHF 121 REPLACE VHF COMM/
I U V CONTROL PANEL.
ill OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

121 R E M W E V H F TMNSCENER.
(31 REMOVE PLUG FROM VHF COMMfiAV
CONTROL PANEL.
14) CONTINUITY CHECK THE FOLLOWING
WIRES USING THE APPLICABLE PLUGS:
id TRAllSCEWER Dl COMM/NAV CONTROL PANEL
VHF-1 1 5 0 - 4 5 VHF-1 R5O-24
VHF-2 R5O-47 VHF-2 R5O-25
C0UMI)UV PlNS 1 TO 1. TRANSCENER COMMRIAV PlNS 1 2 TO 15. TRANSCENER

COUM/WAV PINS 2 TO 2. TRANSCENER CDMMIIIAV PINS 13 TO 16. TRANSCENER
COMUfiAV PlNS 3 TO 3 . TRANSCENER COMMAAV PINS 14 TO 17; TRANSCENER
COMMfiAV PINS 4 TO 4. TRANSCENUI COMM/W*V PlNS 1 5 TO 18. TRANSCEWER
COMU/NAV PINS 5 TO b . TRANSCENER COMU/IUV PlNS 1 6 TO 19. TRANSCENER
C0MUI)UV PlNS 6 TO 7. TRAHSCENER COMM/Y*V PlNS 17 TO 21. TRANSCENER
COMUfiAV PINS 7 TO 9. TRANSCENER couutn~vPINS 1 8 TO 22. TRANSCENER
COMMfiAV PINS B TO 1 0 . TRANSCENER COMMllAV PlNS 1 9 TO 23. TRANSCENER
COMM/IUV PIHS 9 TO 11. TRANSCEWER C O U W A V PINS 31 TO 24. TRANSCENER
COMM/HAV PlNS 1 0 TO 12. TRANSCENER COMUI)UV PINS 3 2 TO 26. TRANSCENER
C O M U f i A V PlHS 11 TO 1 3 . TRANSCENER COMMRIAV PlNS 2 0 TO 27. TRANSCEIVER
NOTE: TWO 121 OUT OF F N E 0 1 BINARY CHART ON SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATICS

1
+
MAY BE USE0 TO OElERMlNE PlNS APPLICABLE TO THE CHANNEL.
CORRECT WIRING AND

FAULTY PIN CONNECTIONS
No Transmission or Reception on One or More Channels

Figure 103
Effectivity
CODE 9 23-20-00 Page 106
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
1 lNTERMlnENT RECEPTION AT
O N AUDlO STATION
I PROBABLEFAULT I
1
(
1. AUDIOCONTROL PANEL.
2. FAULTY PIN CONTACT I L W S E PLUCS).
3.WIRES LOOSE AT TERMINAL STRIPS.
4. LOOSE CONNECTION AT HEADSET JACK.
5. LOOSE GROUND STUDS.
I
I
I
1. CLOSE F L l W l T INTERPHONE AND VHF

COMM ClRCUn BREAKERS.
2. ISOLATE PROBLEM BY SWITCHING TO
+=+
INTERCHANGEHEADSET
WITH HEADSET KNOWN
TO BE OPERATIONAL
L-f-
INTERMITTENT NOT INTERMITTENT INTERMITTENT NOT I N 1
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM

CRCUIT BREAKERS. REPLACE AUDIO
2. COHTlNUlTY CHECK AUDIO INPUT THAT IS CONTROL PANEL
APPLICABLE TO THE VHF SYSTEM; ALSO.
CHECK FOR LOOSE, OR DAMAGED WIRE A T
PLUCS AND TERMINAL STRIPS:
CAPTAIN'S RSO-56
FIRST OFFICER'S RSO-58
OBSERVER R5O-60
RADIO RACK R50-62
CRECKHEAOSET
NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL AT EACH AUDIO STATION. JACK FDR LOOSE
VHF-1 PIN 6 CONNECTIONS
VHF-2 PIN 2 4
-
AUDlO CONTROL
PANEL
ERMINAL STRIP
s30-29
STATION 120
AUDIO
INPUT
CORRECT WIRING OR
PIN ALIGNMENT

Figure 104
CODE 9 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
<THWEST
TENANCE MANUAL
I WEAK RECEPTION AT ALL STATIONS

1 ...- .- --
r ---.-.F..A-
PROBAOLE ULT
I
1 11) OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
1. TRANSCEIVER ( 2 1 INTERCHANGE VHF COMM./NAV

CONTROL PANEL
2 . V H F COblhl/NAV COhTROL PANEL
3 ANTENNA
A T STATIONS AT STATIONS
I 4. WIRING
I
I
VHF IRANSCEl7iE3
1. CLOSE F L I G H T INTESPHONE A N 0
VHF COMhl CIRCUIT B R t A K E K S .
2 . USING ?HOVE A N 9 MICZOPHONE
JACK ON T ~ A ~ S C L I FRONT V L
P A N E L , C r F C I ( F,Jtl Z E C E P l l O N REPLACE VHF COMM/
AN0 SIOiTOhE NAV CONTilOL PANEL
WEAK RECEPTION RECCPTION N O a U A L VHF COMU

I
A I
I
t
1. OPEN VH' C O M Y CIRCUIT
BREAKEQS.
1
COMMlNAV CONTROL PANEL
I
P
iz
I
1. OPEN V H F COMM ClRCUlT B R E A K E S S .

1 1. OPCN VHF C O M U CIRCUIT BXEAKESS.
1. OPEN V ~ CF O W CIRCUIT 3 Z E A K t . d S
2 . REMOVE TSANSCClVEi( F a O M D E F E C l l V E 1 2. REMOVE TRANSCEIVES FROM DEFECTIVE VHF SYSTE
3 . CONTINUITY C n E C K THROUGH VOLUME CONTSOL
2. COYTlli1JITY CHECK USING A P P L I C A S L F PLUG:
I I
VHF S Y S T t U W U L L C L K W I S E I ON T H E VHF C O Y U / V A V CONTAOL VHF-1 R50-41
3. CLOSE CIRCUIT B R E A L E S S A N 0 hlLAS,;;tE P A N E L USING TRANSCEIVEQ RECEPTICAL VHF-2 X50-$6
2 8 VOC A S F O L L O W S .
NUTE. PINS ARE T Y P I C A L
V H F - 1 R 5 0 4 5 P I N 35 TO R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 1 2 TERMINAL
V H F - 2 R 5 0 4 7 PIN 35 TO 1750-46 PIN 12 PI11 3 TO VHF COMM ClRCUlT I R E A K L R STRIP
V H F - 1 R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 11TO TERMINAL STRIP PI11 4 TO V H F COMM ClRCUlT EREAXE* 530-29
I 1
5 3 0 - 2 9 TERMINAL 12. PIR 1 TO GROUND
PIN 3 TO 1 V H F - 2 R 5 0 - 4 6 PIN 11 TO TERMINAL STRIP PIR 2 TO GROUND
PIN 4 TO 2
5 3 0 - 2 9 TERMINAL 1 5 .
4 . A L S O CHECK O N I O F F SLIITCH FOR G2OUNO
t AT V H F COhlM(NP.V. CONT2OL.'PANEL.
VOLTAGk I LOW VOLTAGE 1 ANTENNA

BULKHEAD
FEED THROUGH
WE COMPARTMENT
1. OPEN V H F C O M M CIRCUIT d R U K E S S .
2 . CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENVA C O X l A L
CABLES. PIN TO PIN
P I N TO GROUNO
SHlELO CONNECTOR TO SHIELD CONNECTOR
NOTES:
V M F - 1 POWERED B Y EMERGENCY B U S .
* V H F - 2 POWERED B Y RIGHT RADIO BUS.
I D E N T I C A L EXCEPT A 5 S H W N TMUS: <>-
CORRECT WIRING
CHECK DC POWER
OR CORRECT
REPAIR OR R E P L A C E
COAXIAL C A B L E S R E P L A C E ANTENNA
REPUCE TRANSCENU CORRECT 'WIRING
I F A U L T Y GROUND I A H 0 WIRING

Figure 105

CODE 9 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
1RANS:AITTER WILL NO1 TRANSMIT FROMONE AUDIO STATION

(RADIO RACK)
t 2 CH[CK UICQUPHON~ AUDIO

RADIO RACK R 5 O - b l
I N P U ~S
I FJLlOWS
I PROBABLE F A U L T
MICROPHONE
I PIN 2 1 0 MICROPHONE JACK IAUOIO H O r l
PIN 1 1 0 MlCROPHONt J A C K (COMMON? (CHECKFOR F A U L T Y
AUOlO CONTROL PANEL
t
1 CLOSE F L I G H T INTERPHONE A N 0 V H F COMM CIRCUIT BSLAKEQS
I
2. C H t C K P U S H T O T A L K S W I T C H B Y C H E C K I N G A N A L T t R . W T E V H F
SYSTEM.
3. CHECK SWR UETER A N 0 SIOETONE.
TRANSMITTER W I L L NOT K E Y PUSH TO T A L K SWITCH OK

AND NO SIOETONE BUT NO SIOETONE
t
I - .-
1. OPEN FLlG'lT INTERPHOHE A N D VLiF COMU
C l R C U l l BTEAKFRS.
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTEPPHONE A N 0 VHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2 C O N T I N ~ I T Y CHECK MICROPHChF OUTPUT 2. CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE AUOlO

C O N l Z O L USING PLUGS B E W E C Y F A U L T Y OUTPUT USING PLUGS BETWEEN FAULTY
1. 1NTESCHAtiC.E MICROPHONE INTERCHANGE MICROPHOHE AND OPCRATIONAL STATIONS.
CHECK FOR VOICE TRAHSMlSSlON &NO O P E ~ A ~ I O N A LSTATIONS
2. CHECK SWR METER AN0 SIDETONE.
CIPIAIY j R50-55 CAPTAIN'S RSJ-55
FIRS1 OFFXEQ'S R50-57 FIRST OFFICER R 5 5 - 5 7
OBSERVES R50-51 OBSERVER R50-59
RADIO 9SCK R50-bl RADIO RACK R50-61
VHF-L P1Y 2 1 1 0 PIN 2 1 V H F - 1 PIN 3 TO PIN 3
VHF 2 PIN 2 2 TO PIN 2 2 V H F - 2 PIN 4 T O P I N 4
n
REPUCE
MICROPHONE
VERIFY VHF
TRANSMISSION
CORRECT W R I N G
I
L
1 OPEN V H F COMM AND F L I G H T INTERPHONE CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2 . IWTEXCHAHGE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL.
I ALTERNATE AUDIO
n
CONTROL P A N R
-, V
h
-- 20
i
AUDIO COMROL PANn
AUDIO COMMON
MICROPHONE AUDIO
MICROPHONE CONTROL
ND SWR READING SWR READINGS

TRANSMlSSIOI( NO TRANSMISSION
NO SIOETONE
I I I ., MICROPHONE AUOIO VHF-2
21
-- I I 2 1 MICROPHONE CONTROL V H F - 1
2 2 MICROPHONE CONTROL V H F - 2
iry
TERMINAL
STRIP T O A L T E R ~ A T EAUDIO
AUOIO s30-52 CONTROL PANELS
CONTROL T O VHF TRANSCEIVERS
PANEL

(Radio Rack)
Figure 106
Effectivity
CODE 9 23-20-00 Page 109
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
TRANS,MITTER WILL NOT TRANSMIT FRV.\ONE AUDIO S T A I I O N :. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONF ANJ'4b'F C O M M
I
1 . OPEN VHF Cow11 4 3 0 FLIGHT INTERPHChr C l i l c ~ l TB R E A K E R S CIRCUIT B R E A X E 9 5
( C A P I A I N ' S , FIRST OFFICER. OR OBSERVER)
2. INTERCHAYCE AUOtO CONTROL PANEL !. CHECK MlCROPHOhE AUDIO I N P V T U S I N S
A P P L I C A B L E PLUG AS F O L L O W S .
CAPTAIN'S R50-55
F I R S T OFFICER RS0-57
OBSERVER R50-59
PIN 2 TO MICROPHONE J A C K (4UOlO Hart
PIN 1 TO MICROPHONE JACK : C O M V O N I
(CHECK FOR F A U L T Y JACK CONTACTS1
t
PROBABLE F A U L T AUOIO
CONTROL
MlCROPHOhE
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
WIRING
I. OPEY VHF COMM AN0 FLIGHT It!TERPtlOllE

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
. OPEN FLIGHTINTERPHOYE CIRCUIT BREAKER
A N D V H F COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS. I
I
2 C O N ~ I H U I T Y CHECK APPLICARLE PLUG AS . CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO
FOLLOWS ON
A UD
T POPERATIONAL
U T USING PLUGS
STATIONS.
BETWEEN F A U L T Y
NOTE P I 3 S ARk TYPICAL
CAPTAIY'S RSO-$5 CIPTAIh'S R50-55
1. CLOSE F L I G H T I k T E R P H O h i A N 0 VHF
COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2. CHECK PUSH TO T A L K SWITCH B Y
I FIRST OFFICER R 5 8 - 5 7
OBSC3'IE? R50-59
PIN 20 TO PIN 1 , PUSH TO T A L K I F I R S 1 OFFICER
OBSERYEI
V H F - 1 PIN 3
V H F - 2 PIN 4
R50-57
1750-59
TO PIN 3
TO PIN C
CHECKING THE M U r l N C ACTION OF
J
YT
SPEAKER A ~ I P L I F I E R . NO CONTINUITY
NO CONTINUITY
I
, INTERCHINCE MICROPHONE
CHECK MUTING L TUNING
I INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE
I
~ l a # : u t T BRFAKERS
2. COnTldUITY CHECK MIC20PHONE OUTPUT
COITEOL
BEWI
USING APPLICAaLE PLUGS
E N F A U L T Y A N 0 OPERATIONAL
CORRECT WIRING
OR R E P L A C E
MICROPHONE
i
23 CORRECT WIPING
AUDIO COMMON
2 MICROPHONE AUDIO
2 0 MICROPHOME CONTROL
AUDIO CONTROL PANR
CONTROL 4 MICROPHONE AUOlO
PANEL
2 2 MICROPHONE CONTROL
REPLACE
MICROPHOHE REPLACE
V t R I F Y VHF MICROPHONE
TUNING SWITCH
I TEfWINAL
STRIP
530-52
ALTERNATE A U D I O C O N T R O L P 4 h E L S
Transmitter Will Not Transmit From One Audio Station V H F TRANSCEIVERS
(Captain's, First Officer's, or Observer's)

Figure 107
Effectivity
CODE 9 23-20-00 Page 110
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
VHF TRANSZilVER
7
I --PROBCBLE
1. TRANSCEIVES
FAULT
-
I I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

2. INTERCHANGE rRANSCEIVER.
AND SIDETONE AND NO SIDE l o & :

I 2 INTERCHANGE T R A N S C E I V t R .
V H F COMM *-
, , 2
3
4
POWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
DC POWE? lhPUT
OC P O W E I INPUT
2. A N I E Y N A S Y S T E M
3. POWE? INPUT I
4. WlRlRG I MlCROPHOhE AUOIO
MICROPHO%E C O N T R O L
l CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE A N 0 V H F C O M u -

CIRCUIT BREAUESS
2. U S l W PHONE A N 0 MICHOPHONE JACKS ON
T H E F i l O N T P A H E L O F THETRANSCEIVEP, T E R M I N A L STRIP
CHECK SIOETONE W H I L E C A L L I N G T H E TOWER 530-29
SIDE TONE AND NO TRANSMISSION SIOETONE A N 0 1. OPEN VHF C O M M CIRCUIT BREAKERS. ANTENNA
TRANSMISSION AND NO SIDETONE NO TRANSMISSION
2. REUOVE VHF TRANSEilVE?.
3.
4.
CLOSE VHF C O M M CIRCUIT BUEAKFRS
MEASURE 2 9 VOC AT THE A P P L I C A B L C
PLUG AS FOLLOWS
3- BULKHEAD
F E E 0 TNROUGH
E/E COMPARTMENT i
ANTENNA
VHF-1 R50-44
I
VHF-2 R50-46 1. OPEN VHF COMhl CIRCUIT B R F A K E R S .
PIN 3 TO PIN 1 2. I N S E i l THRU L I N E W A l i M E r t R AND P E R F O R M
PIN 4 TO PIN 2 FOQ'SARD A N 0 R E F L E C T E D POWER CHECK P t R
2 3 - 2 ' 3 - 0 UAINTCNANCE P R A C r l C E S .
1. OPEN VHF COMM CISCUIT B R E A K E R S NOTE. PINS ARE r Y P l C A L
-
2. REMOVE TRANSCEIVER I VOLTAGE I NO V C L 145E
I R i r L E r : i i 3 $O:',E? M O 2 t THL!4 1;9 O F FORe.\R3 POWER.
3. CONTINUITY c n E c K MICROPHONE INPUTS

USING THE A P P L I C A B L E PLUG A S FOLLOWS: I
VHF-1
R50-44 TO T E R M I N A L STRIP
PIN 3 0 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 1 4
2. C O ~ T I N U I T Y C H E C K L N T E Y N A COAXIAL C A B L E S
PIN 3 1 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 1 3
A S FOLLOWS
VHF-2 P:H 10 PIN 1 ZERO OH<$
1150-46 TO T E R M I N A L STRIP
PIX TO SHIELD INFINITY
PIN 3 0 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 17
PIN 3 1 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 T E R M 16
WTE:
*VHF-1 POWERED F R O M EMERGENCY B U S
2. CONTINUITY CHECK USING THE A P P L I C A B L E

PLUGS
M U S U R E CEUTER PIN ON ANTENNA TO C A S E
I jC VHF-2 POWERED F R O M RIGHT HAND BUS
IDENTICAL EXCEPT SHOWN THUS. 7)

VHF-1 R50-44
VHF-2 R50-46
PIN3 TO VHF C O M M CIRCUIT BREAKER

PIN4 TO VHF C O M M CIRCUIT B R E A E P .
PIN1 TO GROUND
PIN2 TO GROUNO
t NOTE PINS A R E T Y P I C A L
NO CONTINUITY I
CORRECT WIRING
I CORRECT W R I N G
RLPLACE ANTENNA
CORRECT W R I N G

Figure 108

CODE 9 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
( WEAK OR DISTORTED TRANSMlSSION

[ONE STATION) I
PROWBLEFAULT
1. MICROPHONE
2. AUDIO COWTROL PANEL
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. CHECK MICROPHONE USINGALTERNATE
VHF SYSTEM.
ONE VHF SYSTEM I A L L VHF SYSTEMS
II
1.OPEN FLIGHT IHTERPHOHE ANDVHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE w m
STATION KNOWN OPERATIONAL
2, INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
NOT CORRECTED
I
( CORRECTED
I
I CORRECTED
REPUCE
MICROPHONE

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
FOR LOOSE MI HIGH RESISTANT CONNEC-
TIONS.
CAPTAIN'S RSO-55
FIRST OFFICER'S 1150-57
DBSERVER R5049
RADIO RACK RSOJl
W F - 1 PIN 3 TO 530-52 TERM 4
VHF-2 PIN 4 TO SJO-52 TERM 3
NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL AT EACH PLUG
TERMINAL STRIP
530-52
TYPICAL FOR ALL STATIONS

I
I CORRECT WIRING, LOOSE WIRE,
OR PIN ALIGNMENT.
I
Figure 109
CODE 9 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
WARNING
VHF-I LIGHT
COMM-NAV-DME DIMMING
CONTROL P A H E L
.
--
-
,..
Z! ' OBSERVER'S
A AUDIO P A N E L
0
- 5 7
-
&r.-.x?A -== . =
ffE5C-a A
.-
- 21
,
A
3
RADIO RACK
AUDIO P A N E L
a
6 -7
FREQUENCY STANDARD C A R D ] 6 1 ~ ~ T- R2 U N I T S SHOWN.

TRb18M-1 A N D K T R 9000
VHF-I
COMPLETELY
1 A INTERCHANGEABLE.
FORWARD
VHF-1 Communication
Figure 110
Effectivity Page 11 3
CODE 9
J U N 03/02
NORTHWEST
VHF-2
COMM -NAV-DUE
CONTROL PANE1
1r
WARNING
LIGHT
DIMMING
SEI.CAL
CON THOL
I
u5c3
.>-.-.
Fb-.x--...... e wrccem.
-. -- 27 - SELCAL
-
-
-24
A
a
-
OBSERVER'S
AUDIO P A N E L
&->z-.?.-.-.7-G < ~.:~cr.xE==.:.

PwER
b--
clRculr
DECODER
IFREQUENCY STANDARD CARDI
mGcs
6 1 8 U - 2 T R U N I T S SHOWN.
VHF-2
I I
T R 6 1 B U - I A N 0 K T R 1000
COUMUNICATION I OSC r L l c w i * olrrrar*r
TRANSCEIVER 50 K H z INTERNALLY BUT
I I COMPLETELY
L -- - - - - INTERCHANGEABLE
FORWARD
VHF-2 Communication
Figure 111

CODE 9 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. General

coax and VHF Antenna system using the 'Time Domain Reflectometer" (TDR) tester. Using this
thunderstorms. This may result from improperly bonded lightening strips on the nose radome. Refer to DC9
Maintenance Manual Chapter 23-60-00, Page 101.
(2) ATC Transponder
(4) Marker Beacon
I. Complete simplified schematics are shown in Figures 110 and 111.
Effectivity
CODE 15 23-20-00 Page 101
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

continuity.
No Reception at One Audio Station. 101

(One VHF System)
No Transmission or Reception on One 105

or More Channels.

(Observer or Radio Rack).

(Captain's or First Officer's).

CODE 15
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
4. Circuit Breakers

(Right and Left).

CODE 15 23-20-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
0 NO RECEPTION AT ONE AUDlO STATION
I PROBABLE FAULT
HEADSET (011 JACK).
AUDlO CONTROL PANEL.
I MOVE EMERGENCY SWITCH FROM THE
NORMAL TO THE EMER POSITION
AUOIOSHOULDBE PRESENT AT EACH I ( 1 ) OPEN
. FLIGHT
.. INTERPHOYE AND
(2) INTERCHANGE AUOIO CONTROL
I
I
WIRING
I
(1) CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 11) OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMU CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
(1) OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF (2) CONTINUITY CHECK AUDIO OUTPUT.
VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS. COMM CRCUlT BREAKERS.
12) CHECK HEAOSET USING ALTERNATE (2) INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL U P T A I I ' I R50-56 FIRST OFFICER R 5 0 - 5 8
VHF N S T E M OR STATION. PANEL. OBSERVER R M - 6 0 RADIO RACK R50-62
- AUDIO IN IlORMAL AUOlO I N EMER

NOTE: PLUGS ARE TYPICAL
PIN 19 TO HEADSET JACK(H0T 1
AND EYER POSITION ONLY PIN 18 TO hCADSET JACK 1COMMON)
SIMPLIFIED s c H E w n c IS APPUUBLE
TO A L L VOLTAGE AND C O N T l N U l M CHECKS.
FAULTY STATION
AUDIO CONTROL PANE
INTERCHANGE
HEADSET w m
HEADSET KNOWN 'I 0
BE OPERATIONAL
RETURN TO
FAULTY AUOlO
POSITION
(11 OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND
VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
(2) REMOVE AUDlO CONTROL PANEL PLUG I CONTINUITY CHECK THE AUOlO INPUT,
CHECK FROM FAULTY AUOIO STATION
TO AUDIO STATON KNOW TO BE OPER- I nv
i
HEADS ET
-
. 8
I
19 AUDlO OUTPUT
AUDIO COMMON
I
(3) CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT
BREAKERS.
(4) MEASURE 2 8 VDC A S FOLLOWS:
CAPTAIN'S R50-56 I VHF-1 PIN 6 TO PIN 6
FLIGHT INTERPHONE ! 3 2 8 VOC INPUT
I
I
FIRST OFFICER
OBSERVER
RADIO RACK
PIN 1 3 TO PIN 1 4
R50-58
R5O-60
R50-62
CIPNO.1OR NO. 2
1 1t l
I
I
4 POWER GROUWO
I I
PIN 1 3 TOGROUNO AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
ALTERNATE STATION
W T E : PLUGS ARE TYPICAL
7 NO VOLTAGE
24 VHF-2
I 11) OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE ClRCUlT BREAKERS.

(2) CONTINUITY CHECK AS FOLLOWS:
I CAPTAIN'S R 5 0 - 5 6 PIN 13 TO FLIGHT INTER-

PHONE C/P NO. 1 CRCUlT BREAKER
FIRST OFFICER, R5O-58 OBSERVER R50-60. OR I
I RADIO RACK RSO-62 PIN 13. TO FLIGHT INTERPHONE
C / P NO. 2 ClRCUlT BREAKER. I AUDIO INPUTS
N P K A L ALL
STATIONS
REPUCE
HEADSET
REPLACE
AUOIO CONTROL
PANEL.

Figure 101
e
l CORRECT WIRING
CHECK AND
CORRECT OC
7
CORRECT Wl41NG
7
CORRECT WIRING
REPLACE
AUDIO CONTROL
PANEL
Effectivity
Page 104
CODE 15 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
NO RECEPTION AT ALL AUDIO SlATlOFlS

(ONE VHF SYSTEM1

1
2. INTERCHANGE VHF/COMM CONTROL
I PROBABLE FAULT
1. TRANSCEIVER L. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND REMOVE VHF
PANEL.
2. VOLTAGE TRANSCEIVER. RECEPTIOM NO RECEPTION

3 . ANTENNA SYSTEM
1. FROM THE TRANSCENER RECEPTACLE, 2ONTINUITY
CHECK THROUGH VOLUME CONTROL (FULL CLOCKWISE1
OF THE VHF COUM/NAV CONTROL PANEL AS FOLLOWL
VHF-1 R50-45 PIN 3 5 TO R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 1 2
VHF-2 R50-47 PIN 3 5 TO R50-46 PIN 1 2

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
VARYTHEVOLUMECONTROL SLOWLYCHECKINCFOROPCN
WINDING.
CONTINUITY WIRES AS FOLLOWS:
1 1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
2.
3.
REMOVE VHF COMM CONTROL PANEL.
CHECK CONTINUITY FROM VHF COMM CONTROL
2. USING ALTERNATE VHF SYSTEM, V E R I R PANEL TO TRANSCEIVER:
AN OPERATIOWL AUDIO NETWORK. REPLACE VHF COMM (a1 VHF-1 R 5 0 - 4 5 PIN 3 5 TO R50-44 PIN 1 2
V H F - 1 R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 11 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 PIN 1 2
CONTROL PANEL VHF-2 R 5 0 - 4 7 PIN 3 5 TO R 5 0 - 4 6 PIN 1 2
VHF-2 R 5 0 - 4 6 PIN 11 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 PIN 1 5
(bl VHF-1 R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 11TO
TERMINAL STRIP 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERMINAL 1 2 .
VHF-2 R 5 0 - 4 6 PIN 11TO
TERMINAL STRIP S3O-29 TERMINAL 1 5 .
1. RETURN TO DEFECTIVE VHF SYSTEM.

2. USE PHONE AND MICROPHONE JACK,
ON TRANSCEIVER FRONT PANEL.
CORRECT WIRING OR FAULTY
PIN CONNECTIONS.
I NO CONTINUITY

I
SIOETONE
NO RECEPTION
NO SIDETONE
NO RECEPTION
RECEPTION
I
2.
3.
4.
REMOVE TRANSCENER.
CLOSE VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
MEASURE 28 VOC AS FOLLOWS:
I CORRECT WIRING I VHF TRANSCEIVER
VHF-1 R5044
1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT VHF-2 R50-46 I'
2. INTERCHANGE VHF
TRANSCEIVER.
I I
I PINS TYPICAL
PIN 3 TO PIN 1
PIN 4 TO PIN 2
NO VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
VHFCOMM& 1
/---
3
4
2
DC INF'UT
OC INPUT
POWER GROUND
1 POWER GROUND
RECEPTION NO SIDETONE VHF COMMMAV A
NO RECEPTION I
I I 1 I I 1 REMOTE O M F F
-
I
I 1. VERIFY AN OPERATIONAL ANTENNA SYSTEM. I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

PLUG:
r-l
2. INSERT A THRU LINE WATTMETER IN SERIES
/-'
WITH ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE, PER 2 3 - 2 0 - 0
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES. REPLACE VHF-1 R50-44
TRANSCEIVER VHF-2 R 5 0 - 4 6
VHF-1 B
I- ,,I 6 AUDIO OUTPUT COMMON
1
2 9 SIDETONE COMMON
REFLECTED POWER OVER 1/9 OF FORWARD POWER
I
NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL <VHF-2)
PIN 4 TO VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKER.
PIN 1 TO GROUND.
Gc'
I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. I PIN 2 TO GROUND. S30-29
I 2. CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE.

PIN TO PIN
PIN TO GROUND I ANTENNA * a %
BULKHEAD
I PIN TO SHIELD.
NO CONTINUITY
4
I CONTINUITY
4
I FEED THROUCH
V E COMPARTMENT
**
NOTES:
pi?- I] R E P U C E ANTENNA BREAKER.CHECKPINCONTACTAT CORRfCT WIRING

VHF-1 POWERED FROM EMERGENCY BUS
VHF-2 POWERED FROM RIGHT RADIO BUS
IDENTICAL EXCEPT AS SHOWN THUS:
< )
(One VHF System)
Figure 102
Effectivity
Page 105
CODE 15 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I
I
W U RECEPTION AT ALL STATIONS
I
1
r PROBABLEFAULT
1 1
(1) OPENVHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
1. TRANSCEIVER (2) INTERCMffiE VHF COMM/MV
CONTROL PANEL.
2. VHF C O M W A V CONTROL PANEL
3. ANTENNA NORMAL RECEPTION WEAK RECEPTION
4 . WlRlNG AT STATIONS AT STATIONS
1 I
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND

VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREIKERS.
I
2. USING PHONE AND MICROPHONE
JACK ON TRANSCEIVER FRONT POWER GROUND
PANEL, CHECK FOR RECEPTION
AND SIDETONE.
REPLACE VHF COMM/
NAVCONTROLPANEL
~ I I 2 P O W U tllOUND
I
WEAK RECEPTION I RECEPTION NORMAL
$W F COMM
I
I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT 1
BREAKERS.
2. INTERCHANGE TRANSCEIVER. 1 12-1 35 AUDIO OUTPUT (11611
W K RECEPTION 1 RECEPTION NORMAL
1. OPEN VHF COMU CRCUlT BREAKERS.

2. REMOVE TRANSCEIVER FROM DEFECTIVE VHF SYSTE 1. OPEN VHF COMM CRCUlT BREAKERS.
I
I3. CONTINUITY CHECK THROUGH VOLUME CONTROL
I 2. CONTINUITY CHECK USING APPLICABLE PLUG:
1I
VHF SYSTEM. (FULL CLOCKWISE) ON THE VHF COMMDAV CONTROL
3. CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AN0 MEASURE PANEL USING TRANSCEIVER RECEPTICAL VHF-1 R5O-*4
28 VDC AS FOLLOWS: VHF-2 R5O-46
C
VHF-1 R 5 0 4 5 PIN 3 5 TO R50-44 PIN 1 2 NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL
VHF-1 R50-44 VHF-2 R 5 0 4 7 PIN 3 5 TO R 5 0 4 6 PIN 1 2
VHF-2 R50-46 VHF-1 R 5 0 4 4 PIN 11TO TERMINAL STRIP PIN 3 TO VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKER
STRIP
1 3 0 - 2 9 TERMINAL 12. PIN 4 TO VHF COMM CRCUlT BREAKER
PIN 3 TO 1 530-29
VHF-2 R 5 0 4 6 PIN 11TO TERMINAL STRIP PIN 1 TO WOUND
PIN 4 1 0 2 PIN 2 TO WlOUNO
4. ALSO CHECK ON/OFF SWITCH FOR GROUND
5 3 0 - 2 9 TERMINAL 15.
AT VHF COMM/NAV. CONTROWANEL.
VOLTAGE LOW VOLTRGE I NO CONTINUITY
I
1. YTlNUlTY
NO COI
I CONTINUITY
ANTENNA
BULKHEAD
VE
FEEDTHROUGH
COMPARTMENT
1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREIKERS,

2. CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENNA COXIAL
CABLES: PIN TO PIN
PIN TO CROUNO
kO CONTINUITY I CONTINUITY 1
NOTES:
*~)#-l
POWERED BY EMERGENCY BUS.
*VHF-2 POWERED BY R I W T RADIO BUS.
IDENTICAL EXCEPT AS SHOWN THUS: ) '(
REPAIR MI REPLACE
COAXIAL CABLES REPLACE ANTENNA

Figure 103
n CORRECT WlRlNG
CORRECT WlRlNG
OR CORRECT
FAULTY CROUNO
CHECK DC POWER
AND WIRING

CODE 15
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I I N f E R M I l l N RECEPllON AT
ONE AUDIO STATION
I PROBABLEFAULT
I 1. AUDIO CONTROL PANEL.

2. FAULTY PIN CONTACT (LOOSE PLUGS).
3.WIRES LOOSE AT TERMINAL STRIPS.
I
4.LOOSECONNECTlON AT HEADSET JACK.
5.LOOSE GROUND STUDS.
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF

COUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. ISOLATE PROBLEM BY SWITCHING TO
I
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF INTERCHANGEHEADSET
CDMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. WITH HEADSET K N W N
2. INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL. TO BE OPERATIONAL
lNTERMlTTENT I NOT INTERMITTENT

-
-
MITTENT
I I

CIRCUIT BREAKERS. R E P U C E AUDIO
CONTROL PANEL
2. CONTINUIPI CHECK AUDIO INPUT THAT I S
APPLICABLE TO THE VHF SYSTEM: ALSO,
CHECK FOR LOOSE, OR DAMAGED WIRE AT
PLUGS AND TERMINAL STRIPS:
CAPTAIN'S R50-56
FIRST OFFICER'S R50-58
OBSERVER R50-60
RADIO RACK RM-6 2 CHECKHEADSET
JACK FOR LOOSE
NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL A T EACH AUDIO STATION.
CONNECTIONS
VHF-1 PIN 6 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 PIN 1 2
VHF-2 PIN 2 4 TO 530-29 PIN 1 5
AUDIO CONTROL
PANEL TERMINAL STRI
S3l-29
r
VHF-1 6 12
VHF-2 2 4 15
REPAIR OR
CORRECT WIRING OR REPLACE
P1X ALIGNMENT
TYPICAL ALL
STATIONS J

Figure 104
CODE 15 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
ON ONE OR MORE CHANNELS
I
1 PROBABLE F*ULT I
I VHF COUUlNAV CONTROL PANEL
VHF TRANSCENER
WIRING I
111OPEN VHF COUU CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
I21 INTERCHANGE VHF COUURUV
CONTROL PANEL.
131CHECK FOR DEFECTNE CHANNELS.
DEFECTIVE I CORRECTEO
I I
I IllOPEN VMF COUU CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

12) INTERCHANGE VHF TRANSCENER.
(31 CHECK FOR OEFECTNE CHANNELS.
I
CIRCUIT BREAKERS CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
I21 REPUCE VHF I21 R E P U C E VHF COMM/
TRANSCEIVER NAY CONTROL PANEL.
(1)OPEN VHF COUU CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

t n REUWEVHF TRANSCENER.
13) REYOYEPLUG FROM WF c o m ~ n . w
CONTROL PANEL.
I 4 1 CONTIRUIlY CHECK THE P O L L W I N G
(.) TRANSCEIVER l b l COMUlWAV CONTROL PANEL
VHF-1 1 5 0 4 5 VHF-1 1 5 0 - 2 4
VHF-2 1 5 0 4 7 VHF-2 R50-25
COUU/NAV PlNS 1 TO 1. TRAYSCENEI COUMI)(AV PlNS 1 2 TO 15. TRANSCENER

COMU/%AV PINS 2 TO 2. TRANSCENER COUU/NAV PlNS 1 3 TO 16. TRANSCENER
c o u u m ~ PINS
v 3 TO 3. TRANSCENER COUU/NAV PlNS 1 4 TO 17. TRANSCENER
COUURUV PINS 4 TO 4. TRANSCENER COUURlAV PINS 1 5 TO 11. TRANSCEIVER
COUURUV PlNS 5 TO 6. TRANSCENER COUURlAV PIRS 1 6 TO 1 9 . TRANSCENER
COUURUV PlNS 6 TO 7. TRANSCENER COUU/NAV PlNS 1 7 TO 21. TRANSCEIVER
COUM/WV PlNS 7 TO 9. TRANSCEIVER COUUflAV PINS 1 8 TO 22. TRANSCENER
C0UUI)UV PlNS B TO 1 0 . TRANSCEIVER C O U U h A V PlNS 1 9 TO 23. TRANSCENER
COUU/%AV PINS 9 TO 11. TRANSCENUI COUU/NAV PINS 3 1 TO 24. TRANSCEIVER
I COUUlWAV PINS
COUU/%AV PINS
ILO TO 12. TRANSCENER
11 TO 13. TRANSCENOI
COUY/NAV PlNS 3 2
COUU/NAV PINS 2 0
TO
TO
26. TRARSCENER
27. TRANSCENER
I NOTE: TWO 12) OUT OF FIVE I51 BINARY CHART ON SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATICS
MAY BE USE0 TO DETERMINE PlNS APPLICABLE TO THE CHANNEL.
C
I
I
CORRECT WRING AND
FAULTY PIN COYNECTIONS
1
I
Figure 105

CODE 15 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE ANOVHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

1. OPE9 VHF COUM AN0 FLIGHT INTERPHONE 2. CHECK MICROPHONE AUOIO INPUT AS FOLLOWS.
t CIRCUIT BREAKERS. OBSERVER R 5 O - 5 9
PROBABLEFAULT
MICROPHONE
I CONTINUITY CHECK A S FOLLOWS.
OBStRVER R 5 0 - 5 9
RADIO RACK R 5 0 - 6 1
PIN 2 TO MICROPHONE JACK (AUDIO k O T 1
PIN 1 TO MICROPHONE JACK (COMMONI lCHECK FOR F A U L T Y
JACK CONTACTSI
AUOIO CONTROL PANEL
I NO CONTINUITY 1 CONTINUITY 1 NO CONTINUITY 1 CON1 INUITY
t
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE ANDVHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. C H E C K P U S H T O T A L K S W I T C H B Y C H E C K I N G A N A L T E R N A T E V H F
SYSTEM.
3. CHECK SWR METER AND SIOETONE.
AND NO SIDETONE
1. O P I N F L I G H T INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMM 1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE A N 0 VHF COMM

ClPCUlT BREAKERS. CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
1 1
1
2 . C O l T l N U l T V CHECK MICROPHONE OUTPUT 2. CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE AUOIO
1. INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE CONTROL USING PLUGS BETWEEN F A U L T Y OUTPUT USING PLUGS BETWEEN F A U L T Y
2. CHECK SWR METER A N 0 SIOETONE. CHECK FOR VOICE TRANSMISSION AN9 OPERATIONAL STITIONS: AND OPERATIONAL STATIONS:
CA2TAIN'S R50-55 CAPTAIN'S R50-55

METER INDICATION
SIOETONE
NO SWR READING
NO SIOETONE
NO TRANSMISSION I TRANSMISSION
1 F W S T OFFICER'S
OBSERVER
RA310 RACK
R50-57
R5O-59
R5O-61
FIRST OFFICER
OBSERVER
RADIO RACK
R50-57
R5O
0 - 56 91
VW'-1 P I N 2 1 TO PIN 2 1 V H F - 1 PIN 3 TO PIN 3
VHz-2 PIN 2 2 TO PIN 2 2 VHF-2 PIN 4 TO PIN 4
-1 NO CONTINUITY
b 1 1 NO CONTINUITY 1
I
REPLACE
MICROPHONE REPLACE
MICROPHONE
VERIFY VHF
-
TRANSMISSION
I CORRECT WIRING I
---
SEE
NOTE:
AUDIO CONlROL PANEL
I
I 1. OPEN V H F C O M U A N 0 FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. INTERCHANGE AUOIO CONTROL PANEL.
I ALTERNATE AUDIO
CONTROL PANEL
1
2
AUDIO COMMON
MICROPHONE AUDIO
TRANSMISSION
NO SWR READING
NO SIOETONE
NO TRANSMISSION m I
I
3 MICROPHONE AUDIO VHF-1
I 4 MICROPHONE AUDIO VHF-2
I I
21 2 1 MICROPHONE CONTROL V H F - 1
22
I 22 MICROPHONE CONTROL V H F - 2
REPLACE
AUOlO
NOTE. OXYGEN MASK MICROPHONE U S E 0
AT OBSERVER STATION ONLY
LJ---l!ll,
TERMINAL
STRIP
530-52 TO ALTERNATE AUOIO
CONTROL PANELS
CONTROL TO VHF TRANSCIVERS
PANEL

(Observer or Radio Rack)
Figure 106

CODE 15 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
TRANSMITTER WILL NOT TRANSMIT FROM ONE AUDIO STATION 1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 V H F COMM
ICAPTAJN'S OR FIRST OFFICER1 1. OPEN VHF COMM AN0 FLIGHT IYTERPHOYE CIRCUIT BREAKERS CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL. 2. CHECK MICROPHONf AUOIO INPUT USING
APPLICABLE PLUG A 5 FOLLOWS:
CAPTAIN'S RSO-55
FIRST OFFICER R 5 0 - 5 7
PIN 2 TO MICROPHONE JACKIAUDIO HOT!

PIN 1 TO MICROPHONE JACK K O M M O N I
(CHECK FOR F A U L T Y JACK CONTACTS1
t NO CONTINUITY CONTINUITY
PROBABLEFAULT
MICROPHONE
AUOIO CONTROL PANEL
WIRING I I PANEL
I
i
I CHECK MICROPHONE CONTROL. I

I1. OPEN VHF C O M M A N D FLIGHT INTERPHONE
CIRCUIT Y1EAKERS. I 1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT 8REAKE
A N 0 VHF COMM ClRCLlT BREAKERS.
I2. CONTINUITY CHECK APPLICABLE PLUG AS

FOLLOWS: I 2. C o n n N u I T Y CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO
OUTPUT LSING PLUGS BETWEEN FAULTY
I
IKITE: PINS ARE TYPICAL. AND OPERATIONAL STATIONS
1 CAPTAIN'S R50-55
FIRST OFFICER R 5 0 - 5 7 CAPTAIN'S R50-55
FIRST OFFICER R5O-57
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF OBSERYER R50-59
I 2. CHECK PUSH TO T A L K SWITCH BY

CHECKING THE MUTING ACTION OF
SPEAKER AMPLIFIES. I t
V H F - 2 PIN 4 TO PIN 4
NO CONTINUITY
t
CHECK MUTING 6 TUNING
I
r--11. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHOYE A N 0 VHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1 2 . EONTISUITY CHECK MlCllOPHONE OUTPUT
I CONTROL USING APPLICABLE PLUGS

B E M f . E N F A U L T Y AND OPERATIONAL
STATIINS
I
I
CORRECT WIRING
OR REPLACE
MICROPHONE
I
v-l CORRECT WIRING
1 AUDIO COMMON
I
CAPILINS R50-55 2 MICROPHONE AUDIO
MUTING NO MUTING OBSERVER
A
V H F - I PIN 2 1 TO PIN 7 1
AUDIO CONTROL P A N n
, NO CONTINUITY
4 MICROPHONE AUDIO
CORRECT WIRING
MICROPHONE REPLACE OR REPLACE
CORRECT WIRING
VERIFY VHF MICROPHONE PUSH TO T A L K
TERMINAL
STRIP
S3D-52
ALTERNATE AUDIOCONTROL PANELS
VHF TRANSCENERS

(Captain's or First Officer's)
Figure 107

CODE 1s 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
0I TRANSMITTER WILL NOT TRANSMIT FROM ANY AUDIO STATION
t
PROBABLE FAULT
1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKEdS.
I
TRANSMISSION 1 NO TRANSMISSION
VHF TRANSCEIVER
POWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
1. T R A N X E N E R
2. ANTENNA SYSTEM
3. POWER INPUT
VHF COMM *- DC POWER INPUT
DC POWER INPUT
ii
4. WIRING
MICROPHONE AUMO
MICROPHONE CONTROL
REPLACE
REPLACE TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
t
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-
& JACK
2. USING PHONE AND MICROPHONE JACKS ON

THE FRONT PANEL OF THE TRANSCEIVER, TERMINAL STRIP
CHECK SIDETONE WHILE CALLING THE TOWER. 530-29
w 1
SIDETONE AND NO TRANSMISSION SIDETONE AN0 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. ANTENNA
TRANSMISSION AND NO SIDETONE NO TRANSMISSION 7
2. REMOVE VHF TRANSCEIVER. I
CD C
I 3.
4.
CLOSE VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
MEASURE 28 VDC AT THE APPLICABLE
PLUG AS FOLLOWS:
BULKHEAD
FEEDTHROUGH
E/E COMPARTMENT

PIN 3 TO PIN 1 2. INSERT THRU LINE WATTMETER AND PERFORM
' PIN 4 TO PIN 2 FORWARD AND REFLECTED POWER CHECK PER
23-20-0 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL
2 . REMOVE TRANSCEIVER VOLTAGE I NO VOLTAGE REFLCCTEO POWER MORE THAN 1/9 OF FORWARD POWER.
USING THE APPLICABLE PLUG AS FOLLOWS: I 1 I
VHF-1
R50-44 TO TERMINAL STRIP 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
PIN 3 0 TO 530-29 TERM 1 4
PIN 3 1 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 13 2. CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLES
AS FOLLOWS:
VHF-2
R50-46 TO TERMINAL STRIP PIN TO PIN = ZERO OHM
PIN 3 0 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 1 7 PIN TO SHIELD = INFINITY
PIN 31 TO 5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 1 6
1 CONTINUITY I NO CONTINUITY 1
+ *
NOTE:
VHF-1 POWERED FROM EMERGENCY BUS
I NO CONTINUITY I 2. CONTINUITY CHECK USING THE APPLICABLE

PLUGS:
MEASURE CENTER PIN ON ANTENNA TO CASE
GROUND, READ ZERO OHM.
jC VHF-2 POWERED FROM RIGHT HAND BUS
IDENTICAL EXCEPT SHOWN THUS:

VHF-1 R50-44 NO C W T I N U I P I
VHF-2 R50-46

PIN 4 TO VHF COMM CJRCUIT BREAKER.
PIN 1 TO GROUND
PIN 2 TO CROUND
c
l CORRECT WIRING

Figure 108
rl CORRECT WRING
REPLACE ANTENNA
CORRECT WIRING
Effectivity
CODE 15 23-20-00 Page 111
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
r WEAK OR DISTORTCDTRANSMISSION
(ONE STATION I
1 . UICROPHONE
3 . WIRING
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. CHECK MICROPHONE USING ALTERNATE
VHFSYSTEU.
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMU

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2.INTERCHAWCEAUDlOCONlROLPANEL
It INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE WITH
STATION K N W N OPERATIONAL
CORRECTED
I
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COUU

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. CONTINUITY CHECK UICROPHONE OUTPUT
TIONS.
CAPTAIN'S RSD-55
FIRST WFCER'S 1 5 0 - 5 7
OBSERVER R5O-39
RADIO RACK RSO-61
WF-1 PIN 3 TO 530-52 T U I U 4
VHF-2 PIN 4 1 0 S30-52 TERM 3
AUDIO CONTROL
lERMlNAL STRII
N P I C A L FOR ALL STATIONS

1
CORRECT WIRING, LOOSE WIRE, REPLACE AUDIO
OR PIN ALIGNUENT. CONTROL PANEL

Figure 109

CODE 15 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
SPACC PROVISIONS
FOR
S f LCAL CONTPOL PANEL
OBSER
AUDIO P A N E L
6 4
pR 5 0 4 1 A
'I-( RADIO RACK
' AUDIO P A N E L
VHF C O U U - I
IRANSCLIVLL
I I 1 3 4
I F R C O U H C V STANDARD C.ID I
VHF-I
C O Y N U N ICATION OrnVLR
15 XHZ I
TRANSCEIVER 92 I

Figure 110

CODE 15
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
,,..-.-
.--.
R ~ o - 5 5:c.r A .>:.=:--x=:.:.::-:.
VHF-2 - -
1 ~ 1
-2 2 4
c o ~ w o ~
4 --i CAPTAIN'S
COMM-NAV-DM€
AUDIO PANEL
CONTROL P A N E L
RCC - 2 4 - 4
SPACE PROVISIONS
:!+:.:- R5O-56 2: 8 :.:I.:>==. ron
SELCAL CONTROL PAUL1
R50.57- A
;
Z+>
FIRST OFFICER S
AUDIO P A N E L
2 4 4
~ ! R s o - s ~ = s.
Ill0 9
1312
II
- 23
NOT USED
- -----
r -fRLOULYCI S T A W A R D CARD
VHF- 2
COMMUNICATION VHF-2
TRANSCEIVER
COMMUNICATION 11.J1-01
11-21-01
23-21-01
ANTENNA 11.~1.01
ORW WARD RIGHT R A D I O n ~ c l . l M E L f 1

Figure 111

CODE 15 23-20-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. General

(2) ATC Transponder
(3) DME-I, -2
(4) marker Beacon
I. Complete simplified schematics are shown in Figures 111 and 112.

CODE 18
J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
2. Tools and Eauipment Required

- -

continuity.

No Reception at One Audio Station. 101

(One VHF System)
No Transmission or Reception on One 105

or More Channels.

(Radio Rack).

(Captain's or First Officer's).

(Observer).

CODE 18
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
4. Circuit Breakers

ADF-1 28 VDC Overhead Emergency DC Bus
VHF COMM-2 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel
(Right and Left) AC Bus
Effectivity
CODE 18 23-20-00 Page 103
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I NO RECEPTION AT ONE AUDIO STATION
I
MOVE EMERGENCY SWITCH FROM THE
111 O P t N FLIGHT I h l E R P H O h E A h 0
NORMAL TO THE EMER POSITION.
VHF COMM CIRCJ,T BREAKERS
AUDIO SHOULD B E PRESENT AT EACH
121 INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL
POSITION
PROBABLE F A U L T
HEADSET (OR JACK :.
AUDIO CONTROL P A N E L .
WIRING
AUDIO I N EMER
POSITION ONLY
NO AUDIO
OUTPUT. I
(11 OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE A N 0 VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.

( 1 1 CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND ! l I OPEh FLIGHT INTERPkOhE A h 0 VHF (21 CONTINUITV CHECK AUDIO OUTPUT.
V H F COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS. COMM C1RCU.T BREAKERS. R50-58
CAPTAIN'S R50-56 FIRST OFFICER
( 2 ) CHECK HEADSET USING ALTERNATE (2: INTERCHANGE AUDlO CONTROL R50-60 RADIO RACK RSO-62
OBSERVER
V H F SYSTEM OR STATION. PANEL.
IIOTE: PLUGS ARE TYPICAL NOTE: E X T E R N A L CHASSIS GROUND FOR
.
U S E ONLY AT RADIO RACK.
I NO AUDIO I AUDIO I PIN 7 TO HEADSET JACK (HOT)

PIN 1 8 TO HEADSET JACK (COMMON1
:ONTINUITY I CONTINUITY SIMPLIFIED SCHEMATIC I S A P P L I C A B L E

TO A L L VOLTAGE AND CONTINUITY CHECKS
I
F A U L T Y STATION
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
I
INTERCHANGE
HEADSET WITH
HEADSET KNOWN TO
( 1 1 OPEN F L I G H T INTERPHONE AND
V H F COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
CONTINUITY CHECK T H E AUDIO INPUT,
CHECK FROM F A U L T Y AUDlO STATION
TO AUDIO STATION KNOW TO B E OPER-
nv
II -
19
AUDIO OUTPUT
I
is AUDIO COMMON
( 2 1 REMOVE AUDlO CONTROL PANEL PLUG
B E OPERATIONAL ( 3 ) CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT
ATIONAL ' HEADSET
I
II
BREAKERS. V H F - 1 PIN 6 TO PIN 6
( 4 1 MEASURE 2 8 VDC A S FOLLOWS: V H F - 2 PIN 2 4 TO PIN 2 4
CAPTAIN'S R50-56 FLIGHT INTERPHONE3!& 2 8 VOC INPUT
C / P N O . l O R NO. 2
F I R S T OFFICER
OBSERVER
RADID RACK
R50-58
R50-60
R50-62
NO CONTINUITY
I
1
I
PIN 1 3 TOGROUND AUOIO CONTROL P A N E L
ALTERNATE STATION
NOTE. PLUGS ARE T Y P I C A L .
NO VOLTAGE
VHF-2 24
;
24
VHF-l
VHF-2
(1) OPEN F L I G H T INTERPHONE ClRCUlT BREAKERS.

( 2 ) CONTINUITY CHECK A S FOLLOWS:
CAPTAIN'S R S D - 5 6 PIN 1 3 TO FLIGHT INTER-
PHONE C I P NO. 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER
F I R S T OFFICER, R 5 0 - 5 8 OBSERVER RSO-60, OR
RADIO RACK R 5 0 - 6 2 PIN 1 3 . TO FLIGHT INTERPHONE
C/P NO. 2 CIRCUIT BREAKER.
AUDIO
TYPICAL
INPUTS
ALL
STATIONS
REPLACE
AUDIO CONTROL
PANEL
CORRECT WIRING CORRECT DC CORRECT WlRlllC CORRECT WIRING I REPLACE
AUDIO CONTROL I
Figure 101
Effectivity
CODE 18 23-20-00 Page 104
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST

(ONE VHF SYSTEM)
I
1. OPEN VRF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
.
2, INTERCWNGE VHF/COMM CONTROL
1 P R O M B L E FAULT 1 PANEL.
1. TRANSCEIVER 1. OPEN VHF COMH ClRCUlT BREAKERS AND REMOVE VHF
2. VOLTAGE TRANSCEIVER. RECEPTION NO RECEPTION
3. ANTENNA SYSTEM FROM THE TRANSCENER RECEPTACLE, CONTINUITY
2.
CHECK THROUGH VOLUME CONTROL [FULL CLOCKWISE!
OF THE VHF COMM/NAV CONTROL PANEL AS FOLLOWS:
VHF-1 R50-45 PIN 3 5 TO R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 1 2
VHF-2 R50-47 PIN 3 5 TO R 5 0 - 4 6 PIN 1 2 1
I 1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM

CIRCUIT BREAKERS. 1 VARYTHE VOLUME CONTROL SLOWLY CHECKING FOR OPEN
WINDING.
1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
2. REMOVE VHF COMM CONTROL PANEL.
3. CHECK CONTlNUlTY FROM VHF COMM CONTROL
I 2. USING ALTERNATE VHF SYSTEM, VERIFY

AN OPERATIONAL AUDIO NETWORK.
I CONTINUITY WIRES AS FOLLOWS:
VHF-1 R 5 0 - 4 4 P I N 11 TO 5 3 0 - 5 2 PIN 11
VHF-2 R 5 0 - 4 6 PIN 11 TO 5 3 0 - 5 2 PIN 1 0
REPLACE VHF COMM
CONTROL PANEL
PANEL TO TRANSCENER:
(a) VHF-1 R 5 0 - 4 5 PIN 3 5 TO R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 1 2
VHF-2 R 5 0 4 7 PIN 3 5 TO R 5 0 - 4 6 PIN 1 2
(b) VHF-1 R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 11TO
TERMINAL STRIP 530-52 TERMINAL 11.
VHF-2 RSO-46 PIN 11 TO
TERMINAL STRIP 530-52 TERMINAL 10.
I. RETURN TO DEFECTIVE VHF SYSTEM.

2. USE PHONE AN0 MICROPHONE JACK,
ON TRANSCEIVER FRONT PANEL.
CORRECT WIRING OR FAULTY
PIN CONNECTIONS.
1 NO CONTlNUlTY
1
4, CHECK FOR SIOETONE.
SIOETONE NO SIDETONE
RECEPTION
M RECEPTION NO RECEPTION
1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT

BREAKERS
1.
2.
3.
4.
OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
REMOVE TRANSCENER.
CLOSE VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS
MEASURE 2 8 VDC AS FOLLOWS:
VHF-1
VHF-2
RSO-44
R50-46
PlNS TYPICAL
u
CORRECT WIRING
VHF TRANSCEIVER
I
2. INTERCHANGE VHF PIN 3 TO PIN 1 3 DC INPUT
TRANSCEIVER.
PIN 4 TO PIN 2
/ 4 DC INPUT
( 3. CHECK FOR RECEPTION. I I I 21 POWER GROUND
NO RECEPTION RECEPTION RECEPTION NO RECEPTION

SIDETONE
VHF COMMMAV l 1 Y I
A
I 1. V E R l M AN OPERATIONAL ANTENNA SYSTEM. 1 1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.

II II
2. INSERT A THRU LINE W A T M E T E R IN SERIES PLUG:
W T H ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE, PER 23-20-0
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
REPLACE
TRANSCEIVER 36 AUDIO OUTPUT COMMON
2 9 SIOETOWE COMMON
REFLECTED POWER OVER 1/9 OF FORWARO FVUER
I
NOTE: PlNS ARE TYPICAL
PIN 3 TO VHF C O W CIRCUIT BREAKER.
PIN 4 TO VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKER
PIN 1 TO GROUND.
I 1. OPLN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS I PIN 2 TO GROUNO.
It
2. CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE.
PIN TO PIN
PIN TO GROUND
. .- --
A.N. TO. SHIELD
NO CONTlNUlTY I CONTINUITY
II CONTINUITY
I
1 NO CONTINUITY
I
ANTENNA
NOTES:
BULKHEAD
FEED THROUGH
W E COMPARTMENT
rn
piq 7 REF'LACE A N T E N U
1 BREAKER. CHECK PIN CONTACT AT CORRECT WIRING *
$ VHF-1 POWERED FROM EMERGENCY BUS
VHF-2 POWERE0 FROM RIGHT RADIO BUS
IDENTICAL EXCEPT AS s n o w THUS: /-\

(One VHF System)
Figure 102
Effectivity
CODE 18 23-20-00 Page 105
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I
+
r
WEAK RECEPTION AT ALL STATIONS
PROBABLE FAULT
,
I 1 1 OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
1 TQANSCEIVER (21 INTERCHANGE VHF COMM/NAV
CONTROL PANEL.
2. VHF COl.lt.1 N A V CONTROL PANEL
3 AHTENNA NORMAL RECEPTION WEAK RECEPTION
A T STATIONS AT STATIONS
4. WIRING
VHF TRANSCEIVER
1 CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND

2 . USING PHONE AN0 MICROPHONE POWER GROUNO
JACK ON TRANSCEIVER FRONT
PANEL. CHECK FOR RECEPTION REPLACE VHF COMM/ I I PGWER GROUND
NAV CONTROL PANEL
8 OC PGWER INPUT
$ VHF COMM OC POWER INPUT

P
I 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT

BREAKERS.
2 INTERCHANGE TRANSCEIVER.
I
VHF COMMINAV CONTROL PANEL
I
0
5 AUDIO OUTPUT (HOT1
N.C.
I
/I:=
WEAK RECEPTION RECEPTION NORMAL 1:
I1
N.O.
. .
v 1. OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

I I ( - >
2 . REMOVE TRANSCEIVER FR0.M OEFECTIVE 3 . CONTlhUlTY ChECK THROUGH VOLUME CONTROL 2. CON1INUlTY CHECK USING APPLICABLE PLUG:
VHF SYSTEM. ( F U L L CLOCKWISE) ON THE VHF C O H W N A V CONTROL
I 3. CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKERS AN0 MEASURE
28 VOC AS FOLLOWS.
I
PANEL USING TRANSCEIVER RECEPrlCAL
V H F - 1 R 5 0 - 4 5 PIN 35 TO R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 1 2
VHF-1 R50-44
VHF-2
NOTE: PINS
R50-46
ARE TYPICAL
v n f - 2 R ~ O - 4 7PIN 35 TO ~ 5 0 - 4 6PIN 1 2 TERMINAL

PIN 3 TO VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKER STRIP
V H F - 1 R 5 0 - 4 4 PIN 11TO TERMINAL STRIP
PIN 4 TO VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKER 530-52
5 3 0 - 5 2 TERMINAL 11
I 1
PIN 3 TO 1
PIN 4 TO 2
ALSO CHECK ON/OFF SWITCH FOR GROUND I VHF-2 RSO-46 PIN 11TO TERMINAL STRIP
530-52 TERMINAL10
PIN 1
2 TO
T O GROUND
I COMM/NPIV.
I
Y
" ATVHF C~NTROLIPANEL.
VOLTAGE 1 LOW VOLTAGE NO CONTINUITY NO CONTINUITY I CONTINU

ANTENNA F E E D THROUGH
E/E COMPARTMENT

2 . CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENNA COXIAL
CABLES: PIN TO PIN
PIN TO GROUNO
NOTES:
*
*VHF-1POWERED B Y LMERGENCY BUS.
VHF-2 POWERED BY RICH1 RADIO BUS.
IDENTICAL EXCEPT AS SHOWII THUS: <>-
REPAIR OR REPLACE
COAXIAL CABLES REPLACE ANTENNA REPLACE TRANSCEIVER

Figure 103
El CORRECT WIRING
CORRECT WIRING
OR CORRECT
FAULTY GROUND
CHECK DC POWER
AND WIRING
Effectivity
CODE 18 23-20-00 Page 106
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I INTERMITTENT RECEPTION AT
ONE AUDIO STATION
I
I
I -EL€ FAULT I
I
1. AUDlO CONTROL PANEL.
2. FAULTY PIN CONTACT (LOOSE PLUGS).
3. WIRES LOOSE AT TERMINAL STRIPS.
4. LOOSE COYNECTIOW AT HEADSET JACK.
5. L W S E CRWNO STUDS.
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONPANO VHF

COUM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. I
I
2. ISOLATE PROBLEM BY WITCHING TO
I I
. ... .
1
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 M F l n T m c n m E HUOSET
COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. WITH HEAOSET KNOWN
2. INTERCHANGE AUOlO CONTROL PAMEL. TO BE OPERATIOW..
INTERMITTEIIT NOT INTERMITTENT INTUIMITTENT I NOT INTERMITTENT
I
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONEANOVHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
I
REPLACE AUOlO
CONTROLPANEL
2. CONTINUITY CHECK AUOlO INPUT THAT I S
APPLICABLE TO THE VHF SYSTEM; ALSO, A
CHECK FOR L W S E , OR O A W E O WIRE AT
PLUGS AN0 TERMINAL STRIPS:
CAPTAIN'S
FIRST OFFICER'S
OBSERVER
RADIO RACK
R50-56
R50-58
RSO-60
R50-62
- 1
CHECKHUOSfl
MOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL AT EACH AUOlO STATION. JACK FOR LOOSE
VHF-1 PIN 6 TO 530-52 PIN 11
VHF-2 PIN 2 4 TO 530-52 PIN 1 0 - CONNECTtOHS
I NO CONTINUITY I
AUDIO CONTROL
PANEl
VW-1 6
TERMINAL STRIP
530-52
I
W F - 2 24
+
REPAIR OR
REPLACE REPLACE
AUOIO
HEADSET
CORRECT WIRING OR INPUT
PIN ALIGNMENT TYPICAL AU
STATIONS

Figure 104
CODE 18 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
ON ONE OR MORE CHANNELS
I
I PROEA8LE FAULT
VHF COMMfiAV CONTROL PANEL
VHF TRANSCEIVER
WIRING
111 OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

121 INTERCHANCE VHF C O M W W V
CONTROLPANEL.
0 1 CHECKFOR DEFECTIVE CHANNELS.
I 11) OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

121 INTERCHAWCE VHF TRANSCENER.
I 3 1 CHECK FOR OEFECTNE CHAIINELS. I
D
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
CORRECTED
w
(11 OPEN VHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS. I
(21 REPLACE VHF COMM/
NAV CONTROL PANEL.
11) OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT 8REAKERS.

(2) REMOVE VHF TRANSCEIVER.
131 REMOVE PLUG FROM VHF COMWNAV
COHTROL PANEL.
(4) CONTlNUlM CHECKTHE FOLLWING
(a) TRANSCEIVER l b l COMM/NAV CONTROL PANEL

VHF-1 RSO-45 V H F - I RSO-1
VHF-2 R50-47 VHF-2 R50-5
COMM/NAV PINS 1 TO 1. TRANSCEIVER COMM/IUV PlNS 13 TO 15. TRANSCEWER

C O U W M V PINS 2 TO 2. TRAWSCEIVPR COUMRUV PINS 1 4 TO 16. TRANSCEIVER
COMUfiAV PINS 3 TO 3. TRANSCEIVER CMIM/NAV PINS 1 5 TO 17. TRANSCEIVER
COMMfiAVPINS 6 TO 6. TRANSCEIVER COLIWNAV PINS 16 TO 1 8 . TRANSCEIVER
COUMMAV PINS 7 TO 7. TRANSCEIVER COYM/WAV PINS 1 7 TO 19. TRANSCENER
COMM/WAV PINS B TO 9. TRANSCEIVER COMMfiAV PlNS 1 8 TO 21. TRANSCEIVER
C O M M M V PINS 9 TO 10. TRAIISCENER COMWAV PINS 1 9 TO 22. TRANSCEIVER
COMWNAV PlNS 1 0 TO 11. TRANSCEIVER COMMMAV PlNS 3 1 TO 24. TRANSCEIVER
COUM/NAV PlNS 11 TO 12. TRANSCEIVER COUUMAV PlNS 32 TO 2 6 . TRANSCEIVER
COMMRlAV PlNS 1 2 TO 13. TRANSCEIVER COUMfiAV PlNS 22 TO 27. TRANSCEIVER
NOTE: TWO C2)OUT OF FIVE (51 BINARY C U R T ON SlUPLlFlEO SCHEMATICS

MAY B E USE0 TO DETERMINE PINS APPLICABLE TO T HE CHANNEL.
I
I
I CORRECT WIRING AN0
FAULTY PIN COIIWECTIONS I
Figure 105
Effectivity
CODE 18 23-20-00 Page 108
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
TRANSMlllER WlLL NOTTRANSMIT FROMONL AUDIO SlATlON

IRADIO RACK)
1. OPEN VHF COMM AN0 FLIGHT INTERPHONE 1l.OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE bNOVHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS. 2.CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO INPUT AS FOLLOWS:
2. CONTINUITY CHECK AS FOLLOWS: RADIO RACK R 5 0 - 6 1
RAOIO RACK R 5 0 - 6 1 PIN 2 TO MICROPHONE JACK (AUOIO HOT1
PIN 2 0 TO PIN 1, PUSH TO TALK SWITCH CLOSED. PIN 1TO MICROPHONE JACK (COMMON) (CHECK FOR FAULTY
MICROPHONE
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
WIRING
WO CONTINUITY I CONTINUITY 1 1 NO CONTINUITY I
JACK CONTACTS)
CONTINUITY
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE ANOVHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

2. CHECKPUSHTOTALKSWITCH BYCHECKINGANALTERNATEVHF
SYSTEM.
3. CHECK SWR METER AN0 SIDETONE.
I CORRECT WIRING
OR REPLACE
MICROPHONE JACK
I
AND NO SIDETONE
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMM 1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS. CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
1 1
2. CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO
I
1. INTERCHAHGE MICROPHONE INTERCHANGE MICROPHONE CONTROL USING PLUGS BETWEEN FAULTY OUTPUT USING PLUGS BETWEEN FAULTY
AND OPERATIONAL STATIONS: AN0 OPERATIONAL STATIONS:
2. W E C K SWR METER AND SIDETONE. CHECK FOR VOICE TRANSMISSION
CAPTAIN'S R5O-55 CAPTAIN'S R5O-55
SSION I TRANSMISSION . FIRST OFFICER'S
OBSERVER
R50-57
R50-59
FIRST OFFIOER R 5 0 - 5 7
OBSERVER R50-59
I RADIO RACK
VHi-1
R50-61
PIN 2 9 TO f l N 2 9
RAOIO RACK R5O-61
'
V!:.:-2 PIN 2 8 TO M N 2 8 VHF-2 PIN 34 TO PIN 3 4
REPUCE
REPUCE
NO CONTINUITY I NO CONTINUITY 1
MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
VERIFY VHF
TRANSMISSION
AUDIO CONTROL PANR
1. OPEN VHF C O W AND FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

2. INTERCHANGE AUOIO CONTROL PANEL.
I ALTERNATE AUDIO
C W R O L PANEL
TRANSMISSION
W SWR REAOING
NO SIMTONE
NO TRANSMISSION
.35
I MICROPHONE AUDIO VHF-1
3 4 MICROPHONE AUDIO VHF-2

I
2 9 MlCROPHONE CONTRM VHF-1
I
Cry
- 28 MICROPHONE CONTROL W F - 2
I
TERMINAL , I
REPLACE STRIP TO ALTERNATE AUOlO
+
AUDIO S30-29 CONTROL PANELS

CONTROL
TO VHF TRAWSCENERS
PANEL
882-9170

(Radio Rack)
Figure 106
Effectivity
CODE 18 23-20-00 Page 109
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMl
I
1 . OPEN VHF COMM AND FLIGHT INTERPHOHE CIRCUIT BREAKERS. CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2. INTCRCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL. 2. CHECK MICROPHONE AUOlO INPUT USING
APPLICABLE PLUG AS FOLLOWS:
CAPTAIN'S R50-55
- r
PROBABLEFAULT
0TRANSMISSION
AUOlO
:i ~,"~~";lSSION NO TRANSMISSION
PIN 2 TO MICROPWON€ JACK (AUDIO H 0 1

PIN 1 TO UICROPHOYE JACK (COMMON)
(CHECK FOR FAULTY JACK CONTACTS)
NO COh
CONTROL
MICROPHONE
AUOIO CONTROL PANEL
WlRlNG
CHECK MICROPHONE CONTROL

1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT BREAKE
OPEN VHF COMM AND FLEHT INTERPHONE
AN0 VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
2 . CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO
CONTINUITY CHECK APPLICABLE PLUG AS
OUTPUT USING PLUCS BETWEEN F A U L N
FOLLOWS:
A N 0 OPERATIONAL STATIONS:
NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL.
CAPTAIN'S R50-55 CAPTAIN'S R50-55
FlRST OFFICER R5O-57 FIRST OFFICER R50-57
PIN 2 0 TO PIN 1. PUSt! TO TALK OBSERVER R50-59
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF
SWITCH CLOSED. V H F - 1 PIN 3 5 TO PIN 35
PIN 3 TO MICROPHONE JACK (CONTROL)
2. CHECK PUSH TO TALK SWITCH BY PIN 1 TO MICROPHONE JACK (COMMON)
SPEAKER AMPLIFIER.
CORRECT WIRING
OR REPLACE
MICROPHONE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
f-l
CORRECT WIRING
2. CONTINUITY CHCCK MICROPHONE OUTPUT
CHECK MUTING 6 TUNING I INTERCHA)(GE MICROPHONE
I CONTROL USING APPLICABLE PLUGS
BETWEEN FAULTY AND OPERATIONAL
STATIONS:
F
CAPTAIN'S R50-55
1 MUTING NO MUTING TRANSMISSION NO TRANSMISSION (

FlRST OFFICER
OBSERVER
R50-57
R50-59
I
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
NO CONTINUITY
-
MICROPHONE
VERIFY VHF
REPLACE
MICROPHONE
OR REPLACE
PUSH TO TALK
SWITCH n CORRECT WIRING
TERM1NAL
STR IP
530-52
VHF TRANSCEIVERS

Figure 107
Effectivity
CODE 18 23-20-00 Page 110
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
- --
1. OPEN VHF COMM AN0 FLIGHT INTERPUONE CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

2. INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL. 1 1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHFCOMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS. I
1 2 . CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO
INPUT A S F O L L W S :
OBSERVER R50-59
PIN 2 TO MICROPHONE JACK UUOlO HOT)
PIN 1 TO MICROPHONE JACK (COMMON)
(CHECK FOR F A U L T Y JACK CONTACTS)
t I
NTINUITY I CONTINUITY
PROBABLEFAULT AUDIO
CONTROL
MICROPHONE PANEL
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
WIRING
r-
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE CIRCUIT BREAKER
AND VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
CHECK MICROPHONE CONTROL 2 . CONTINUITY CHECK MICROPHONE AUDIO
OUTPUT USING PLUGS BETWEEN FAULTY
1. OPEN VHF COMM AND FL,GHT INTERPHOHt
AND OPERATIONAL STATIONS:
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
CAPTAIN'S
2. CONTINUITY CHECK A S F O L L W S :
1. CLOSE FLIGHT INTERPHONE AND VHF OBSERVER RSO-59 OBSERVER R50-59
COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS. VHF-1 PIN 35 TO PIN 35
PIN 3 TO MICROPHONE JACK (CONTROL)
2. CHECK PUSH TO T A L K SWITCH BY PIN 1TO MICROPHONE Y L K (COMMON1
SPEAKER AMPLIFIER.. NO CONTINUITY
I
CHECK MUTING & TUNING
I IWTERCHANGE MICROPHONE
I
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMU
CI3CUIT BREAKERS.
CONTROL USING APPLICABLE PLUGS
BETWEEN FAULTY AND OPERATIONAL
STATIONS:
1
CORRECT WIRING
OR REPLACE
MICROPHONE
JACK
c
l CORRECT WIRING
i AUDIO COMMON
5
CMPTAIN'S R50-55 2 MICROPHONE AUDIO
FIRST OFFICER R50-57
MUTING NO MUTING TRANSMISSION NO TRANSMISSION 3 MICROPHONE CONTROL
OBSERVER R50-59
VIIF-1 PIN 2 9 TO PIN 29
T
NO CONTINUITY
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
!, I
F,
35 MICROPHONE AUOIO vHF-,
IvHF-l
MICROPHONE CONTROL
34 MICROPHONE AUDIO
n
2 8 MKROPHONE CONTROL
t
CORRECT WIRING
REPLACE OR REPLACE CORRECT WIRING
MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE PUSH TO T A L K
VERIFY VHF
mlTcn TERM lNAL
STRl P
530-52
VHF TRANSCENERS
Transmitter Will Not Transmit From One
Audio Sation (Observer)
Figure 108
Effectivity A
Page 11 1
CODE 18 23-20-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
0
TRANSMIITER WILL NOT TRANSMIT FROM ANY AUDIO STATION
PROBABLE FAULT
1. TRANSCEIVER
2. ANTENNA SYSTEM
TRANSMISSION
A N 0 SIOETONE
NO TRANSMISSION
AN0 NO SIDETONE
1
1 . OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS.

2 , INTERCHANGE TRANSCEIVER.
vHF
- -I ,
*A
4
I
A
5
4
i
2
I
I
VHF TRANSCEIVER
POWER GROUND
POWER CROUNO
OC POWER INPUT
OC POWER INPUT
3. POWER INPUT
4. WIRING
GMKROPHONE AUDIO
1 r l
MICROPHONE CONTROL
REPLACE TRANSCEIVER

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2. USING PHONE AND MICROPHONE JACKS ON
THE FRONT PANEL OF THE TRANSCEIVER, TERMINAL STRIP
CHECK SIDETONE WHILE CALLING THE TOWER. 530-29
1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS. ANTENNA

TRANSMISSION 1
2. REMOVE VHF TRANSCEIVER.
3 . CLOSE VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
I
a3
BULKHEAD
C ANTENNA
FEED THROUGH
4 . MEASURE 28 VDC AT THE APPLICABLE
PLUG AS FOLLOWS:
E/E COMPARTMENT I
VHF-1 R50-44
VHF-2 R50-46 1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS.
PIN 3 TO PIN 1 2. INSERT THRU LINE WATTMETER AN0 PERFORM
PIN 4 TO PIN 2 FORWAROANOREFLECTEOPOWERCHECKPER
2 3 - 2 0 - 0 MAINTENANCE PRACTICES.
1. OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKERS
2 . REMOVE TRANSCEIVER
USING THE APPLICABLE PLUG AS FOLLOWS:
R50-44 TO
VHF-1
TERMINAL STRIP
+
PIN 3 0 TO S 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 1 4 2. CONTINUITY CHECK ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLES
PIN 3 1 TO S30-29 TERM 1 3 AS FOLLOWS
VHF-2 PIN TO PIN :ZERO OHM
1750-46 TO TERMINAL STRIP PIN TO SHIELD :INFINITY
PIN 3 0
PIN 3 1
TO
TO
5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 17
5 3 0 - 2 9 TERM 16
I CONTINUITY
I
I NO CONTINUITY
I
t NOTE:
NO CONTINUITY 2. CONTINUITY CHECK USING THE APPLICABLE I MEASURE CENTER PIN ON ANTENNA TO CASE
GROUNO, REAO ZERO OHM.
*
* V H F - 1 POWERED FROM EMERGENCY BUS
VHF-2 POWERED FROM RIGHT HAND BUS
PLUGS:
I NO C O N T I N U I N I IDENTICAL EXCEPT SHOWN THUS: <=
PIN 1 TO GROUNO
PIN 2 TO GROUND
t NOTE: PlNS ARE TYPICAL
,
NO CONTINUITY
Transmitter Will Not Transmit From Any Audio Station

Cl CORRECT WRING
REPLACE ANTENNA CORRECT WIRING
Figure 109
Effectivity
CODE 18 23-20-00 Page 112
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
I WEAK OR DISTORTED TRANSMISSION

(ONESTATIONI I
PROBABLE FAULT
1. MICROPHONE
3. WIRING
t
1. CLOSE FLffiHT INTERPHONE AND VHF COMM
CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
I 2. CHECK MICROPHONE USING ALTERNATE

V W SYSTEM. I
ONE VHF SYSTEM I A L L VHF SYSTEMS
1. OPEN FLIGHT INTERPHONE AN0 VHF COMM

CIRCUIT BREAKERS. INTERCHANGE MICROPHONEWITH
STATION K N W N OPERAIIONAL
2. INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL PANEL.
t CORRECTED
REPLACE
MICROPHONE

CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
TIONS.
CAPTAIN'S R50-55
FIRST OFFICER'S R50-57
OBSERVER R50-59
RADIO RACK R50-61
V H F - I PIN 35 TO S3O-52 TERM 4
VHF-2 PIN 34 TO 5 3 0 - 5 2 TERM 3
NOTE: PINS ARE TYPICAL AT EACH PLUG.
AUDIO CONTROI.
PANEL ~ M I N A LSTRIP
530-52
NPICAL FOR A U STATIONS

v
I CORRECT WIRING, LOOSE WIRE,

OR PIN ALIGNMENT .
I REPLACE AUOIO
CONTROL PANEL
I
Figure 110

23-20-00
-
CODE 18
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
vnr-I
COUVOLI
.
- 2 ,9 A
CAPTAIN'S
COMM-WAV-DYE AUDIO PANEL
CONTROL PANEL SPACE PROVISIONS
- - - - - - -- - - - - FOR
SCLCAL C O N T R O L PAWEL
-
- AUDIO P A N E L
-6 -
j PRovlslons
SELCN
--2 I OEcOOEn
-
-
AUDIO P A N E L
-6 --I
uHF COMM-I
'PANSCEIVLA

Figure 111

CODE 18
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
VHF- Z
CAPTAIN'S
COMM-NAV-DME AUDIO PANEL
CONTROL PANEL SPACE PROVISIONS
FOR
SELCaL CONTROL PANEL
AUDIO PANEL
I AUDIO PANEL
8
-
VHF C O M M - 2
TRANSCEIVER
151312 -;
NOTUSI
C B A
-
MIXER
SHAPER
FILTER
2s K M Z
t
BUFFER
MULT
&
nt OSC
VHF-2
COYYUNICATION
TRANSCEIVER
I
I
I osc AMP ORIVER
,OK", 1
DRIVER

Figure 112

CODE 18
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
A. rouble-shooting procedures consist primarily of isolation of faulty components. When trouble-shooting

trouble-shooting guide for suspected coax and/or antenna problems is recommended if tester is available
as outlined in 23-20-00. Maintenance Practices.
(2) ATC Transponder
(3) DME-I, -2
(4) Marker Beacon
E. The total VHF Communications System consists of three VHF transceivers, each independent of each
F. A Trouble-Shooting Index is provided in Section 3 and is to be utilized as an aid to quickly find the chart
G. Refer to Section 4 for circuit breaker locations.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 101
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
A Volt-Ohm-Meter Model Simpson Take AC and DC voltage readings and

260 check circuit continuity
A. The following malfunctions that are covered in this trouble shooting procedure are listed as follows;
Malfunction Figure No.
No reception at one Audio Station (Captain's, First Officer's, Observer's)
No reception at all Audio Stations. (one VHF system)
No reception on one or more channels
Intermittent reception at one Audio Station.
Weak reception at all stations.
Transmitter will not transmit from one Audio Station (Observer's).
Transmitter will not transmit from one Audio Sation (Captain's or First Officer's).
Transmitter will not transmit from any station.
Weak or distorted transmission from one station.
Transmitter will not transmit on one channel. (All Stations)
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 102
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
4. Circuit Breakers
A. Verify the following circuit breakers are opened before performing the trouble shooting procedures.
Circuit Breakers Location
DME-1 26 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel L.H.
DME-1 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel L.H.
ATC-1 26 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel L.H.
ATC-1 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel L.H.
ADF-1 28 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel L.H.
ADF-1 26 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel L.H.
Audio Control Captain's 28 VDC Overhead Emergency DC Bus
Audio Contol FIO's and Ob- 28 VDC Lower EPC Transfer Bus
server's
VHF COMM-2 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel
VHF COMM-3 (Aux) 28 VDC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel
Integral Lights (Pedestal) 115 VAC Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel
CODE 96 23-20-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
1 0 RECEFYDN AT ONE WOIO STATION

WAJNS. n ~ OFFICER'S.
g OR OBSERYER'S I
NO II CHECK AN0
CORRECI OC
m I
No Reception at One Audio Station (Captain's, First Officer's, Observer's)
Figure 101

CODE 96 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NO RECEPTlOh AT ALL A-210 STATIONS

(ONE W F !Tf3'ELI)
I. TRANSCOVER
2. W X T G
VHF nW6EhE3
1. CLOSC wqo -
COUU ORCJK BROKERS
ur, Wf
2. USING K m M K W m Y . V E R n
LN OPCRATKYUL AUDiD H m O R K
I 4. CHECK FOR SIDETONE I
I CORRE' WINC / 1 "41 CHECK T ~RECEPnOti

REPME FOR scmR 1 CHECK LX PWYER
PLUGS
BUS CND CIRCUIT
OR RECEFTABLE

(One VHF System)
Figure 102

CODE 96 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
NO RECEPTION ON ONE OR
MORE CHANNELS
I
PROBABLE FAULT
VHF COMM CONTROL PANEL
VHF TRANSCEIVER
WIRING
II
(1) OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(2) INTERCHANGE VHF COMM I
' ' CONTROL PANEL
(3) CHECK FOR DEFECTIVE CHANNELS I
(1) OPEN VHF COMM CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(2) INTERCHANGE VHF TRANSCEIVER
(3) CHECK FOR DEFECTIVE CHANNELS
CORRECTEDj DEFECTIVE.
I I
CIRCUIT BREAKER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

(2) REPLACE VHF COMM
(2) REPLACE VHF
TRANSCEIVER
(1) OPEN VHF COMM ClRCUlT BREAKER
(2) REMOVE VHF TRANSCEIVER
(3) REMOVE PLUG FROM VHF COMM
CONTROL PANEL
(4) CONTINUITY CHECK WIRING
+
CORRECT WIRING AND
FAULTY PIN CONNECTORS
No Reception on One or More Channels

Figure 103
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 106
J UN 03/02
0
-
1. OPEN AUDIO CONTROL AND VHF
NORTHWEST
2. INTERCHANGE AUDIO CONTROL PANE
INTERMITTENT
I
I
1. OPEN AUDlO CONTROL AND VHF COMM

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
NOT INTERMllTENT
I
2. CONTINUITY CHECK AUDlO INPUT THAT IS

APPLICABLE TO THE VHF SYSTEM. ALSO
CHECK FOR LOOSE, OR DAMAGED WIRE AT
PLUGS AND TERMINAL STRIPS.
Effectivity
CORRECT WIRING OR
CODE 96
ONE AUDlO STATION
PROBABLE FAULT
1. AUDlO CONTROL PANEL
+
ALTERNATE VHF SYSTEM

INTERMITTENT ON ONE
W F SYSTEM M Y
I
I
I
REPLACE AUDlO
CONTROL PANEL
-
2. FAULTY PIN CONTACT (LOOSE PLUGS)
3. WIRES LOOSE AT TERMINAL STRIPS
4. LOOSE CONNECTION AT HEADSET JACK
. CLOSE AUDlO CONTROL AND VHF

,
ISOLATE PROBLEM BY SWITCHING TO
INTEAMITTENT ON ALL
VHF SYSTEMS

Figure 104
23-20-00
I
INTERCHANGE HEADSET
WITH HEADSET KNOWN
TO BE OPERATIONAL
REPAIR OR
REPLACE
HEADSET
Page 107
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
--
W W RECEPTION AT ALL STATIONS

1
-
1. TRINSCOVER
2. VHF COYY C M R O L PIUEL I 1. OPEN W D l O CONTROL ClRtlllT BEMEUS
2. I N E R C W C E WDKl CONTROL PMEL
1. CLOSE WDlO CONTROL M D WF REPLACE AUDIO

COUL aRcurr BRC*KERS CONTROL PANEL
1. OPEN WF couu a u c u r r mwms

2. CamMlm mat AHTENNA COUUL
UBES: PIN TO PIN
PIN TO CROIHD
MELDCONWJOR m MELDconnccrou
REPAR OR REPUCE
C W W CABLES M N M TRANSCNR

Figure 105
rl CORRECT WIRING
CORRECT WIRING
OR
FAULTY GROUND II DC POWER
AND WRING
I
CODE 96 23-20-00 J UN 03/02
NORTHWEST
TWSMITTER W I U NOT TRANSIT FROM ONE AUD:O SATION

(OBSERMR'S)
1. OPfN M(T COUY LHO W M O COHIROC

I
1. OPEN Wf COYU N O lLlDO Q)WTROC
cumn BRrrJIERs I
CORRECT WIRING
CORRECT WIRING OR REPLACE
OR REPLACE MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
1. O P M VM M Y Y AND N O I O CDmKX 1. OPEN w COUU uco vrm MPmMC

Cawll mvMms
2. CONTlNUflY M C K UlCROPHOIL W W 2. COlmNUflY C I E a ( rsaw)RlOnE W O K ,
mVT COWlRU m N C
a REPLACE
MICROPHONE
A CORRECT WIRING
Transmitter Will Not Transmit From One Audio Station (Observer's)

Figure 106

CODE 96
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
W S M I T K R WILL h3T TRANSIT FROM O N E AUDIO STATION

(WTAJhY OR f l R 9 OFFICER'S)
1 MlCROPUONf
AUDO CGWROL PANEL I 1. OPEN VHF COUU AND AUDKI CONlRDL
ClRNK B R m
II
1*N5
I 2. CHECK YICRORIONE &I00

MNXVPHONE JIO( H
U AND L To
UiO L COMKlJ
1. CLOSE U D K I COMROC AND WF

C M l Y CIRCUIT BPEMERS
REPLACE
CONTROL 1. OPEN WF COYU W D A 0 0 COPrmOL

PANEL CIRCUIT BREWERS
1. C O K n N U m CRECU YICR3PHONE WOlO

OVrPUT r n R M
I 2. COhTIMJm CHECK AUDIO CONTROL

Pma TO YK: PUO~ TO TALK SW(TCH
I
I I
-GE UYSMPHONE INTERCWGE MICROPMOW
W€O( YLn+G & NNING MICROPHONE CORRECT WIRING
CHECK FOR VOhE TR4NSYSSON
WDIO CDNTROC PANEL

I
YIC: BOOY. YlCROPnONC WDlO L

UICRWWNC W M O U
I I I. m u m
WlRffi
w c r umowcw m o i
I
MICROPHONE REPUCE
VERIFY W F MICROPHONE

Figure 107

CODE 96 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
TRANSMITER t+ LL h:' TRANSIT FROM ANY AUDIO STATION
VWT W S C M R
1 i
A
1
1 WWER GROUND
POWER GROUND
I. OPM mr couu mcun BRWERS
TRANSMISSON I NO TRANSMISSION
2. LsNC R(W AND MICROPHONE JACKS ON

M FROWT Pmn OF THE TRANSC~MR.
M C K SCETONE WILE W N C THE T(IWER
SI#X)((ELI(D I hOTRAPGUiSYQH SIDE TONE AND

TRIE6yrmoN
I
AVO NO SIDE TON:
I
NO TRUISUISSION
I 4. UWVRE 28 wc AT
R U G TO CROUND
my APPIJWU
I R E F L E r n WKn U m E TIun
1 /3 OF FORWARD PDlCR I
I
FAULTY CONTACT
\I
CORRECT WRING

Figure 108
r l CORRECT WlRlNG
rl CORRECT WlRlNG
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 11 1
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
(ONE STATION)
PROBABLE FAULT
1. MICROPHONE
2 AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
3. WRING
1 1. CLOSE AUDK) CONTROLANDVHF C O W

CIRCUITBREAKERS.
2. CHECK MICROPHONE WING ALTERNATE
VHF SYSTEM
ONE VHF SYSTEM
I
I A U V H F SYSTEM
I
l N T E R C W E MICROPHONE WITH
CtRCVrr BREAKERS
STATION KNOWN OPWATIONAL
2 INIEFICHANGEAUDK) CONTROL PANEL
I CORRECTED
REPLACE
MICROPHONE
I. O P E N A U W CONTROLAND VHF COMM

ClRCUrr BRE4KERS.
2 CONllNlJmCHECK MtCROPHONEOUTPUT
FOR LOOSE OR HGH RESISTANCE CONNECTIONS.
CORRECTWIRING. LOOSE WIRE.

OR RN ALIGNMENT
gIFiLCOMmI u
TERMINALSTRIP
NRCALFOR AUGTATDNG
I
REPLACE AUDIO
CONTROL PANEL
I
Weak or Distorted Transmission from One Station
Figure 109
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 112
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
TRANSMITTER WILL NOT TRANSMIT ON

-
ONE CHANNEL (ALL AUDIO STATIONS)
t
PROBABLE FAULTS
W F PAAM TRANSCEIVER
VHF C O W CONTROL PANEL
(1) OPEN AUDIO CONTROL AND W F

COMM CIRW~-r BREAKERS
(2) INTERCHANGEVHF C O W
CONTROL PANEL
(3) CLOSE BREAKERS
(4) CHECK FOR TRANSCEIVER TUNING
CORRECTED
1(1) OPEN AUDIO CONTROL AND VHF

(2) INTERCHANGE VHF COMM
TRANSCEIVER
(3) CLOSE BREAKERS
(4) CHECK FOR TRANSCEIVER NNWG
NO TUNING
.
(11 OPEN VHF COMM
ClRWlT BREAKERS
(2) REPLACE CONTROL
PANEL
I (1) OPEN VHF C O W CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1

(2) REMOVE VHF COMMTRANSCEIVER
(3) DISCONNECT PLUG FROM VHF CC)MM CONTROL PANEL
(4) CONllNUllY CHECK C O W CONTROL PANEL
TO TRANSCEIVER WlRlM
I NOTE: 2 OUT OF 5 BINARY CHARTONSIMPUFIED SCHEMTICS CAN BE USED

TO DEERMINE PINSAPWCABLE TO M E DEFECTIVECHANNELS
CORRECT WIRING AND CHECK

FOR FAULTY FIN CONNECllONS
Transmitter Will Not Transmit on One Channel (All Audio Stations)

Figure 110
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 113
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
VHF COMMUNICATION TRANSCEIVERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The VHF-1, VHF-2, and VHF-3 communication transceivers are located on the forward right radio rack
in the electrical/electronic compartment.
2. Removal/lnstallation VHF Communication Transceiver
A. Remove VHF Communication Transceiver.
(1) Open circuit breakers applicable to transceiver being removed; for example, if removing VHF-1,
open VHF communication -1 and VHF navigation -1 circuit breakers.
Circuit Breaker Panel Section
VHF Communication-1 Overhead Emergency dc bus
VHF Communication-2 Upper main Right radio bus
VHF Communication-3 Upper main Left radio bus
VHF Navigation-1 Overhead Emergency dc bus
VHF Navigation-2 Upper main Right radio bus
VH F Navigation-3 Upper main Left radio bus
WARNING: TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS. (SEE CHAPTER 20.)
(2) Loosen and disengage knurled nuts from mounting brackets on lower, front panel of transceiver.
(3) Pull transceiver inboard and out of mount.
B. Install VHF Communication Transceiver
(1) When installing VHF transceivers, make certain that circuit breakers in step 2.A. are open.
(2) Install transceiver on mount.
(3) Engage and tighten knurled nuts on mounting brackets on lower front panel of transceiver.
(4) Close circuit breakers opened in step 2.A.
I (5) Perform quick operational check to verify proper operation of transceiver. (See AMM 23-20-00, Page
Block 501 and subsequent.)
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-00 Page 201
AUG 06/02
NORTHWEST
VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHFI - ADJUSTMENTnEST
1. General
A. Perform outlined test to verify correct operation of systems. Tests are identical for each VHF system. The
Captain's and First Officer's Audio Control Panels and VHFICOMM-1 and -2 Control Panels are located
on the pedestal. (Reference Figure 501 for aircraft WIO E02310-01039 or Figure 502 for aircraft with
E02310-01039.) The Observer's Audio Control Panel is located on the overhead instrument panel.
B. Perform outlined tests with airplane outside of the hangar.
NOTE: The performance of the VHF System will be affected if the airplane is located in the hangar.
SELCAL
NAV COMM
RESET
@ :FQ @sQ
I
sQ
OFF
MlCR SEL
0INT
O c
VHF 2
q
& 6 R A
'OTH VOICE
N ~
-
It DMEl EMER MKR DME2
Audio Control Panel (W10 EO23lO-OlO39)

Figure 501

CODE 96 23-20-00 JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
TRANSFER
6
TRANSFER
DME
RADIO
rnrnrn@rnrnrn INTPH
11 VHF-1 VHF-2 VHF-3 INT CSV PA 11
BOOM
VOR-1 VOR-2 ADF DME-1 DME-2 MKR
IDENT
VHFJCOMM - VHFIDME - Audio Control Panel (With E02310-01039 Completed)

Figure 502
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 502
JUN 03/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operational Check VHF Transceiver
A. Operational Test
(1) At each audio panel, set appropriate volume control to midrange position and actuate applicable VHF
microphone selector switch.
(2) Press squelch disable switch on transceiver front panel.
(a) Background noise should be audible.
(3) Rotate volume control to verify noise level can be varied.
(4) On applicable VHF control panel, set channel transceiver to operating frequency.
(a) Verify normal communication is obtainable, and sidetone is audible over normal noise level in
flight compartment.
(5) If transceiver checks good, place switches on each audio panel to "OFF position and end test. If
transceiver does not check good or is a repeat write-up, continue to Section 3. for further test
procedures.
3. VHF Transmittinu Function Test
A. Set-up to Test Transmitter
(1) On radio rack audio control panel, set microphone selector to desired transmitter position, and place
reception toggle switch in up position for VHF system under test. Verify that all other toggle switches
are in down (OFF) position.
(2) Select assigned test frequency that is not in use at time of test.
B. Transceiver Test
NOTE: In the following step, before pressing push-to-talk button, listen in headset to make certain channel is not
in use.
(1) Contact a station to determine that transmission and reception are normal. Sidetone should be heard
when speaking into the microphone.
(2) Check microphone controls at each Audio Control Panel.
(3) Repeat entire test as necessary for remaining VHF system.

NOTE: Refer to Section 4. if a weak or no transmission condition is existing and the transceiver has been changed.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-00 Page 503
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
4. Transmitter Forward and Reflected Power Test (VSWR)

NOTE: The following test to be performed only if a weak or no transmission condition is existing and the transceiver
hasbeenchanged.
A. The following test equipment is required:
(1) Thruline RF Wattmeter, Model 43 with 50 Watt element (100-250mc) or:
(2) R.F. Power and VSWR Meter, Model Micromatch 707.

NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used.
B. Test Forward and Reflected Power
(1) Open, tag, and safety VHF circuit breakers.
(2) Locate the through bulkhead connector in the aft upper right side of E/E compartment.
(3) Locate adapter that mates the smaller coaxial cable (from the transceiver) to the larger cable (to
antenna).
(4) Utilize this point to open line and insert RF Wattmeter in series with the coaxial cable.
(5) If using Thruline RF Wattmeter, rotate 50 Watt element to point the element face arrow in the direction
of the coaxial cable leading to the antenna.
(6) If using Bendix Wattmeter, position the sensing element into the line so that the word TRANS is on
the side of the power input and the word LOAD is on the side of the coaxial cable leading to the
antenna.
(7) Close VHF circuit breakers.
(8) Select assigned test frequency that is not in use at time of test. Press push-to-talk button.
(Do not talk into microphone.)
(a) RF Wattmeter should indicate 20 Watts minimum of direct power output.

NOTE: The transceiver is designed for 20 Watts or more output. Any less power output shows a lowering of
transmitter performance.
(9) Cease all operations and open VHF circuit breakers.

(10) If using Thruline RF Wattmeter; plug in element 180 degrees to point the arrow in the direction of the
coaxial cable leading to the transceiver.
(11) If using Bendix Wattmeter; disconnect and rotate the sensing element so the word TRANS is on the
side of the coaxial cable leading to the antenna and the word LOAD is on the side of the power input.

CODE 96 23-20-00 JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
(13) Press push-to-talk button.

(Do not talk into microphone.)
(a) Reflected power indication on RF Wattmeter should be 2 Watts, or less. If meter indication is
greater than 25 Watts, meter indication should not be more than one ninth (119) of direct power.
(14) Open VHF circuit breakers.
(15) Remove RF Wattmeter and reconnect transceiverlantenna cables to adapter.
(17) Test complete.
(18) Ensure all circuit breakers opened for testing are closed and tags removed.

CODE 96
JU N 03/02
NORTHWEST
COAX CABLE TEST USING "TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER" (TDR) MODEL 1502
The Tektronix 1502 Time Domain Reflectometer is a highly accurate cable tester, to be used as a tool to find
problems in coaxial cables. It is easy to use, and will provide fast, accurate measurements. Because of electrical
and environment differences in cables and their applications, each waveform will likely differ.
NOTE: TDR Resolution and Accuracy; Resolution and Accuracy in a TDR are two separate items for consideration.
A short definition of each is in order to inform the user of the limitations of the TDR Tester. Experiment and
practice with the tester before applying it to long runs of coax cable. Much time and effort can be expended
chasing "Ghosts" caused by misinterpretations of CRT displays by the user.
RESOLUTION: Resolution measures how closely together two separate cable faults may be located before the TDR
perceives only one fault, and is determined primarily by the rise time of the pulses received by the TDR. The 1502
TDR resolves faults to within 0.6 inch on short high quality cable. On longer cables, the rise time is determined almost
entirely by the cable.
VERTICAL ACCURACY: Vertical Accuracy relates to how precisely a TDR displays return loss.
HORIZONTAL ACCURACY: Horizontal Accuracy relates to how precisely the distance to a fault can be measured.
It is determined by TDR time base stability and linearty as well as by how closely the propagation velocity of the cable
is known.
It is important to remember that any TDR provides electrical length from the instrument to the cable fault. To relate
electrical length to actual physical length, it is necessary to take into account the following factors:
1- Cable snaking, twist, and loops
2- Propagation velocity variation in a given type of cable
3- Sections composed of different cables with different propagation velocities
4- Accuracy of physical cable length measurement
1. TEKTRONIX 1502- "TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER" -(TDR) TESTER
A. General Description
(1) The Tektronix 1502 is a portable, battery powered "Time Domain Reflectometer" that uses radar
principles to test cables and provide a visual display of the cable faults. The test pulses are
transmitted via the CABLE output jack. Reflections are received at the same jack and displayed on
the Cathode-Ray Tube (CRT).
(2) Calibrated distance controls allow an operator to examine up to 1000 feet of cable with segments as
small as 1 foot displayed horizontally across the 10-division CRT screen. The horizontal CRT scale
is calibrated directly in distance units from 0.1 footldiv to 200 feetldiv in a 1-2-5 sequence.
(3) A 3 digit, direct reading dial indicates the distance to any cable discontinuity when the dial is used
to horizontally position the discontinuity's reflection to a CRT reference line.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 101
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(4) Vertical (Y-axis) deflection of the CRT beam is proportional to the amplitude of the reflected signal
plus the incident step. The sensitivity scale can be selected in seven calibrated steps from 5mrldiv
to 500mrldiv.
(5) The transmitted pulse is a stepsignal having an amplitude of approximately 225 mV. The rise time
of the pulse generator and the equivalent bandwidth of the deflection circuits provide a system
reflected rise time of 140ps or less. The displayed rise time of the incident edge of the step signal is
110 ps or less.
B. Equipment and Material
(1) Tektronix 1502 'Time Domain Reflectometer" (TDR) Tester

NOTE: TEST PROCEDURE FOR TDR "MODEL 1502 C" ON PAGE 116.
(2) Standard bnc Connector
(3) Test Cable Assemblies

NOTE: Several Test Cable Assemblies may be included in the tester with different aircraft side connections. The
type of test cable used depends upon the aircraft connector being attached to and will not effect operation
of the tester.
(4) AC Power Plug (Most testers have internal battery packs and the AC plug need not be used except
for battery charging.)
C. Operating Instructions
(1) Description of Operating Controls
CABLE: Standard bnc connector, delivers 110 ps rise time pulse to test cable.
FOCUS: Controls sharpness of CRT display.
INTENSITY: Controls brightness of CRT display.
POSITIONIFINE: Vertical controls for CRT display.
mr1DIV: Selects vertical deflection factor (50rldiv to 500 mrldiv) in a 5-2-1 sequence.
POWER: Push-pull, OFF-ON switch (pull for ON). Does not affect battery charging circuit.
GAIN: Screwdriver adjustment to set gain of vertical amplifier.
NOISE FILTER: Reduces displayed noise. Display rate is reduced 910 times.
BATTERY METER: Indicates relative charge of power pack.
ZERO REF CHECK: Push-button. When pushed, checks horizontal location of incident pulse
on CRT.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 102
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(k) ZERO REF SET Horizontal pulse position control for CRT display sets incident pulse edge to
a vertical reference line of CRT when DISTANCE dial is at 000 or ZERO REF CHECK button
is pushed.
(I) DISTANCE: Indicates distance from 1502 to point on cable. Has 2 ranges: 100 feet at X.l; or
1000 feet at Xl. Disabled when FEETIDIV at 200 (FIND).
(m) X.l XI: Twc-position switch for X.l or X I multiplier; affects both DISTANCE dial and FEETIDIV
control.
(n) FEETIDIV IV: Selects horizontal deflection factor:
(0) CABLE DIELECTRIC

SOLID POLY
SOLID PTFE
OTHER VAR: Three push-buttons and a screwdriver adjust for selection of the proper velocity
of propagation. VAR from 0.55 to 1.0 when OTHER is pushed (fully clockwise is for air dielectric).
VAR control has reference marks every 305 to indicate relative propagation constants.
(p) RECORD: Two-position lever switch: pushed up and then released, it initiates X-Y recorder or
a chart recorder.
(q) AC LINE FUSES: Protection for line power to battery charger circuitry (0.3 A fuses for 115 VAC,
0.1 5 A fuses for 230 VAC).

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
Front Panel Controls
D. Test Pre~aration
(1) Prepare TDR Tester.
(a) Pull power switch to "ON."
(b) Set Operating Controls to the following positions:
1) FOCUS: Midrange
2) INTENSITY: Midrange
3) ZERO REF: Fully clockwise
4) POSITION: Midrange
5) MrIDIV: 500
6 ) DISTANCE: 000
7) FEETIDIV: 1
8) XI-X.l: XI
9) CABLE DIELECTRIC: Solid Poly.

Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 104
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(c) Adjust "INTENSITY" and "FOCUS" for a clear, bright trace.
(d) Adjust "POSITION" to set the trace 2 divisions below the horizontal center line.
(e) Attach the standard cable to the "CABLE" connector.
(f) Turn "ZERO REF SET" counterclockwise until the incident pulse edge is located on a vertical
reference line.
NOTE: The incident pulse edge is the initial pulse viewed on the CRT. The vertical reference line may be any line
you choose from the center line to the left side of the screen. An arrow has been added on the second
vertical reference line to indicate a commonly used reference line. Figure 101 shows CRT screen with the
incident pulse edge prior to zero adjustment. Figure 102 shows CRT screen after zero adjustment.
Pulse Edge Prior to Adjustment

Figure 101

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(g) Adjust rotating "DISTANCE" dial to 000.
(h) Turn "ZERO REF SET" counterclockwise until the incident pulse edge is located on the Zero
vertical reference line.
NOTE: Figure 102 shows the incident pulse edge adjusted to the Zero vertical reference line. The reflected pulse
from the open end of the Test Cable is shown to the right of center sharply turning up.
Pulse Edge After Zero Adjustment

Figure 102
(i) Adjust the rotating "DISTANCE" dial clockwise to measure the length of the test cable attached.
(j) Press the "ZERO REF CHECK button and check the incident pulse edge returns to the vertical
reference line on the CRT.
(k) Reset the "DISTANCE" dial to 000.

Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 106
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT "TDR" TO OUTPUT VOLTAGE SOURCE OF ANY TYPE. DAMAGE TO THE
SAMPLING GATE AND TUNNEL DIODE MAY OCCUR WITH VOLTAGE IN EXCESS OF 5 V.
(I) The "TDR" is now ready for cable testing.
2. Test Aircraft Coax Cables
A. Test VHF Comm Antenna Cable
(1) Gain access to E & E compartment.
(2) Disconnect VHF COMM # 1 Antenna quick disconnects at station # 128. (See Figure 103.)
(3) Connect TDR Tester to VHF Comm # 1 Antenna Coax.
(4) Set mr/Div: 200.
(5) Carefully observe CRT while rotating "Distance" dial slowly clockwise to observe the entire length of
antenna coax cable.
(6) Observe "Bulkhead Quick Disconnect" for shorts, high resistance, or possible corrosion. (Refer to
M/M 20-90-1 21 for sample displays.)
(7) Continue to slowly rotate "Distance" dial until "Antenna" display is shown on CRT.
NOTE: Ensure test set FEETtDlV is set to 1 foot division.
(8) Compare display shown to the following sample displays: (See Figure 104 and 105.)
NOTE: The following sample displays are for two different type of Antennas currently in use. (See Figure 104A and
105A.) Verify the correct part number of the Antenna under test and match it to the sample display. The
sample displays shown were created from composite samples of several different aircraft with serviceable
systems. Slight differences in actual displays shown may be due to several different factors. Refer to
introductory paragraphs at the beginning of this document, or MIM 20-90-121 TEKTRONIX 1502- "TIME
DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER" - (TDR) TESTER. The final interpretation of serviceability or fault lies with
the user of the test instrument.
(9) Repeat steps (2) through (8) for VHF Comm #2 and VHF Comm #3 Antenna Coax (if applicable).
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 107
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
MODE S TRANSPONDER
COAX DISCONNECT STA 285
, r VHF 1
PANEL \ / STA 341
E & E BAY
TCAS DlRECTlONA1
MODE S / ATC TRANSPONDER

STA 213
STA 289
( IF INSTALLED )
#2 RAD ALT XMT
Coax Disconnect Panel E & E Bay Station 128

Figure 103

CODE 1 23-20-01 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
- -
VHF Comm #1-2 or 3 PN. DMC 50 Type Antenna

Figure 104
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 109
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
REPLACEABLE
ALUMINUM
ALLOY x' 1 /
GLASS
VHF Comm #1-2 or 3 DMC 50 Antenna

Figure 104A
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 110
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF Comm #1-2 or 3 PN 5890524-1 Type Antenna

Figure 105
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 111
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST

Figure 105A
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 112
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
B. Test Radio Rack Coax Cables to Quick Disconnect Panel.
(2) Disconnect Antenna Coax at all quick disconnects, station # 128. (See Figure 103)
(3) Connect Cable test assembly with bnclfemale type pin to TDR test set.
(4) Connect TDR test cable to center male coax pin at Radio Rack.
(5) Set mr/Div: 200
(6) Test coax between Radio Rack and Quick Disconnect Panel.
NOTE: Aircraft with #3 NAV have a bnc Tee connector next to the Quick Disconnect Panel. The #2 NAV cable
MUST be disconnected from the Tee connector for the TDR to properly display the #2 Inter-connect.
(7) Carefully observe CRT while rotating "Distance" dial slowly clockwise to observe the entire length of
Inter-connect coax cable.
(8) Continue to slowly rotate "Distance" dial until "OPEN" (6 to 8 feet) display is shown on CRT.
NOTE: Ensure test set FEETIDIV is set to 1 foot division.
(9) Compare display shown to the following sample display: (See Figure 106.)
NOTE: The sample display shown was created from composite samples of several different aircraft with
serviceable systems. Slight differences in actual display shown may be due to several different factors.
Refer to introductory paragraphs at the beginning of this document, or MIM 20-90-121 TEKTRONlX 1502-
'TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER"- (TDR) TESTER. The final interpretation of serviceability or fault
lies with the user of the test instrument.
(10) Repeat steps (4) through (9) for each Radio Rack Coax Connector Cable.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 113
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
Radio Rack to Bulkhead Disconnect Panel

Figure 106
C. Conclude Test.
(1) Disconnect TDR test set from aircraft.
(2) Reconnect all Antenna Coax connectors to Bulkhead Quick Disconnect.
(3) Reinstall and secure all TIR Units removed, perform LLM checks (if applicable).
(4) Secure aircraft to proper configuration.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-01 Page 114
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
COAX CABLE TEST USING "TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER" (TDR) MODEL 1502C
General
A. The Tektronix 1502C Time Domain Reflectometer is a short range metallic cable tester capable of finding
faults in metal cable. Tests can be made on coaxial, twisted pair, or parallel cable.
B. The 1502C sends an electrical pulse down a cable, and detects any reflections made by discontinuities.
This is known as Time Domain Reflectometry. The 1502C is sensitive to impedance changes. Problems
in the cable will be detected and displayed as changes in impedance along the cable. These will be
displayed as hills and valleys in the reflected pulse. The 1502C is capable of finding shorts, opens, defects
in the shield, foreign substances in the cable (water, etc.), kinks and more.
C. The 1502C is a highly accurate cable tester, to be used as a tool to find problems in metallic cables. It
is easy to use, and will provide fast, accurate measurements. Because of electrical and environment
differences in cables and their applications, each waveform will likely differ. The best way to learn these
differences is experience with the instrument. Experiment with different cables in known conditions and
see how they compare.
D. The l5O2C is equipped with various help screens. Simply press MENU for assistance. The instrument
will prompt you.
(1) The 1502C front panel is protected by a watertight cover in which standard accessories are stored.
Secure the front cover to the instrument by snapping the side latches outward. If the instrument is
inadvertently left ON, installing the front cover will automatically turn the power switch OFF.
The carrying handle rotates 325 degrees and serves as a stand when positioning the instrument.
Inside the case at the back of the instrument is a moisture absorbing canister containing silica gel. In
extremely wet environments it may be necessary to periodically remove and dry the canister. This
procedure is explained in the 1502C 'Service Manual'.
The 1502C can be stored in temperatures between -80 degrees F. to +I85 degrees F. if a battery is
not installed. If a battery is installed and the storage temperature is below -31 F. or above +I 42 F.,
then the battery should be removed and stored separately. The battery storage temperature should
be between -31 F, to +I 42 F.

CODE 2
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
F. Powering the l5O2C

NOTE: The 1502C is intended to be operated from a power source that will not supply more than 250V RMS
between the supply conductors or between either supply conductor and ground. A protective ground
connection by way of the grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.
(1) For AC operation, check the rear panel for proper voltage setting. The voltage selector can be seen
through the window of the protective cap. If the setting differs from the voltage available, it can be
easily changed. Simply remove the protective cap on the rear panel and select the proper voltage
range with a screw driver.
CAUTION: IF THE VOLTAGE SELECTOR IS CHANGED, THE LINE FUSE OF THE APPROPRIATE VALUE
LISTED ON THE TABLE ADJACENT TO THE FUSE HOLDER MUST BE USED.
(a) The AC power connector is a three-way polarized plug with the ground (earth) lead connected
directly to the instrument frame to provide electrical shock protection. If the unit is not connected
to any other power source, the unit frame must be connected to the earth ground.
(2) In the field the 1502C can be powered using the optional internal battery.
(a) The optional rechargeable lead-gel battery is accessible and can be removed from the
instrument case. When AC power is applied, the battery is charged at a rate dependent upon
the battery charge state.
(b) A fully charged battery will operate the 1502C for a minimum of 8 continuous hours (including
30 chart recordings) if the LCD backlight is turned OFF.
(c) If the battery is low, it will be indicated on the LCD (batllow). If the battery drops below
approximately 10 volts, the instrument will automatically shut down within minutes. Use of the
recorder will further reduce battery level. The battery should be fully recharged before further
use.
NOTE: Turn the POWER switch OFF after instrument shutdown.
1) Use of the instrument may be resumed if AC power is available.
G. Low Temperature Operation
(1) In temperatures below +50 F. a heater will activate, this warms an element built into the LCD module
and will heat the display to permit normal operation. Depending on conditions it may take up to 15
minutes to completely warm the LCD crystals. Once warm the display will operate normally.
NOTE: If the instrument is stored in temperatures below -14 F. voids may develop in the LCD. These voids will
disappear if the instrument is placed in an ambient temperature above +40 F. for 24 hours. Warmer
temperatures will shorten the time required to warm the LCD.
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-20-01 Page 102
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
2. RELATED ITEMS
A. Test Cable (3 ft precision ) Tek PIN 0124482-00.
3. DESCRIPTIONIOPERATION
A. The 1502C uses a step-type test signal for its measurements. For simplicity this signal is referred to as
a pulse. The following [ ] refer to the circled numbers on the front of the 1502C Control Panel facsimile
(Figure 101). The controls to the 1502C operate as follows:
(1) CABLE:
A female BNC connector for attaching a cable to the 1502C for testing.
(2) NOISE FILTER:

If the display waveform is noisy, the apparent noise can be reduced by noise averaging. Averaging
settings are between 1 and 128. The time for averaging is directly proportional to the averaging
setting chosen. A 128 setting may take the instrument up to 35 seconds to acquire and display. The
first two positions on the NOISE FILTER control are used for setting the vertical and horizontal
reference points. Selected value or function is displayed above the control on the LCD.
(3) VERT SCALE:

Sets the vertical sensitivity displayed in mp per division or vertical gain in dB. Although instrument
defaults to millirho, the operator may choose which mode from menu ('Set Up Menu'). Selected value
is displayed above the control on the LCD.
(4) DISTIDIV:
Determines the number of feet (or meters) per division across the display. Minimum setting is 0.1
ft/DIV (.025 meters); maximum setting is 200 WDlV 950 meters). selected value is displayedabove
the control on the LCD. A standard instrument defaults to WDIV. A metric instrument (Option 5)
defaults to mIDIV, but either metric or standard can be changed temporarily from the menu. The
default can be changed by changing an internal jumper. (See Service Manual.)
(5) Vp (VELOCITY OF PROPAGATION):

These controls are set according to the propagation velocity factor of the cable being tested. For
example, solid polyethylene commonly has a Vp of 0.66. Solid polytetraethylene (Teflon) is
approximately 0.70. Air is 0.99. The controls are decaded: the left control is the first digit; the right
control the second digit. For example, with a Vp of 0.66, the first knob would be set to .6, the second
knob to .06.
(6) POWER:
Pull knob up for Power ON, push knob in for Power OFF. When the front cover is installed, the Power
On switch will automatically be pushed in to OFF.
Effectivity
CODE P 23-20-01 Page 103
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
$POSITION:
This is a continuously rotating control that positions the display waveform up or down the LCD.
WPOSITION:
This is a continuously rotating control that moves a vertical cursor completely across the LCD
graticule. In addition, the waveform is also moved when the cursor reaches the extreme right or left
side of the display. A read-out is displayed (74igit maximum) in the upper right hand corner of the
LCD, displaying the distance from the front panel BNC to the cursor.
Another feature of the cursor is the 'Ohm-at-Cursor' read-out. This menu selected feature
calculates the impedance of the cable at cursor. See 'Ohms-at-Cursor' instructions in this section for
the limitations of this feature.
MENU:
Provides access to the menu, and also selects items chosen from the menu.
(10) VlEW INPUT

When pushed, this button toggles the display of the waveform acquired at the CABLE connector.
This function is useful to stop displaying the current waveform to avoid confusion when looking at a
stored waveform. Function defaults to ON when instrument is powered up.
(11) VlEW STORE:

When pushed, this button toggles display of the stored waveform.
(12) VlEW DIFF:

When pushed, this button toggles the display of the CURRENT waveform minus the STORED
waveform.
(13) STORE:
When pushed, the waveform currently displayed will be stored in the instrument memory. If a
waveform is already stored, pushing STORED will erase it. The settings of the stored waveform are
available from the first level menu under 'View Stored Waveform Settings'.

CODE 2
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
1502C Front Panel Controls

Figure 101
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-20-01 Page 105
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
4. Tester Setup Procedure
A. Turn Power On.
(1) Pull power switch to "ON"; CRT will display "Initializing" followed by normal CRT screen display.
B. Select Menu by pressing "MENU" button, located on top left side of control panel.
C. Select "SET UP MENU" by turning $ position knob to move cursor arrow (-.) to "SET UP MENU."
(1) Press "MENU" button.
D. Use $ Position knob to place cursor arrow (+) to "ACQUISITION CONTROL MENU."
(1) Press "MENU" button; ensure the menu screen shows the following:
(a) Max Hold is: OFF.
(b) Pulse is : ON.
(c) Single Sweep is : OFF.

NOTE: To change Menu Screen if not correctly displayed; use the position knob to move cursor arrow to desired
position; press "MENU" button to select OFF or ON.
E. Exit Aquisition Control Menu.
(1) Use position knob to move arrow cursor to "EXIT ACQUISITION MENU."
(2) Press "MENU" button; menu screen will be displayed; ensure the menu screen displays the following:
(a) Ohms at the Cursor is: OFF.
(b) Vertical Scale is: OFF.
(c) DistanceIDiv is: Ftldiv.
(d) Light is: ON.

NOTE: To change Menu Screen, if not correctly displayed, use the position knob to move cursor arrow to desired
position; press "MENU" button to select OFF or ON.
F. Position cursor arrow to "EXIT SETUP MENU."
(1) Press "MENU" button twice to return to normal operation.

NOTE: CRT screen will be displayed in normal mode.
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-20-01 Page 106
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
G. Adjust Propagation Velocity control knobs.
(1) Set P N control knobs.
(a) Set left control knob to .6 setting.
(b) Set right control knob to .06 setting.

NOTE: These controls are set according to the propagation velocity factor of the cable being tested. For example,
solid polyethylene commonly has a Vp of 0.66. Solid polytetra-ethylene (Teflon) is approximately 0.70. Air
is 0.99. The controls are decaded: the left control is the first digit; the right control the second digit. For
example, with a Vp of 0.66, the first knob would be set to .6, the second knob to .06.
H. Set DisVDiv control knob.
(1) Set Disffdiv control knob to 1ft.

NOTE: Distance range is displayed on CRT just above the control knob and will change as different Disffdiv are
selected. Normal Disffdiv for aircraft cable testing is Ift. range. The Disffdiv control knob can be adjusted
to show longer lengths of cable but resolution of the display is diminished as the selected position
increases.
I. Attach Coax to Test Instrument.
(1) Attach a known length of type coax being tested to BNC connector on front of test instrument.
NOTE: Most test instruments have a 3 to 3 112 ft precision BNC extension cable included. Any length of extension
cable may be used, but the p/v of the extension cable should match the type of cable being tested. (See
note below G.(b).)
J. Adjust "Vertical Scale" control knob.
(1) Adjust "Vertical Scale" knob on front panel of test instrument counterclockwise until 500 mp is
displayed on CRT just above adjustment knob.
K. Adjust "Noise Filter" control knob.
(1) Adjust "Noise Filter" control knob counterclockwise to the "Vert" position.
L. Adjust "Vertical Scale" knob on front panel of test instrument counterclockwise until 500 mp is displayed
on CRT just above adjustment knob.
M. Press "STORE button on front of test instrument panel.

NOTE: The "STORE" button sets the vertical reference line at the 500 mp setting.

CODE 2
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
N. Adjust "Noise Filter control knob.
(1) Turn "Noise Filter" control knob to the "HORZ position.
(a) Move cursor on CRT screen left and right by turning the e "Position" knob on the front of the
instrument.
(b) Set cursor to edge of rise at first lncident Pulse shown on CRT screen. (See Figure 102 below.)
(c) Press "STORE."
(d) Turn "NOISE FILTER" knob one detent clockwise above the HORZ setting.
NOTE: 1 Avg will be displayed on the CRT screen just above the Noise Filter knob. Displayed at the top right of
the CRT screen will be ft display at 000.0 ft.
Cursor at First Incident Pulse

Figure 102

CODE 2
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
0. Position Cursor to Second lncident Pulse.
(1) Slowly position cursor to the second lncident Pulse by moving the e "Position" knob clockwise; the
approximate length of the extension cable attached to the test instrument will be displayed at the top
right corner of the CRT in the ft window. (See Figure 103 below.)
Cursor at Second lncident Pulse

Figure 103
NOTE: The display 3.500 ft is only used as a reference. The actual length displayed will be the length of
the extension cable used.
(2) Turn Noise Filter knob counterclockwise to "HORZ." The CRT screen will show the Horz setup
screen.
NOTE: The cursor should already be positioned at the second incident pulse.
(3) Press "STORE button.
(4) Turn Noise Filter one detent clockwise; 1 Avg and 0.000 ft will be displayed on the CRT screen.
NOTE: Moving the Cursor to the second lncident Pulse, resetting the Noise Filter to "HORZ', pressing "STORE
button and turning the Noise Filter one detent to the 1 Avg position, zeroes the distance scale at the top
of the CRT screen. The instrument will now accurately show the length of the cable being tested as well
as any faults.
CAUTION: DO NOT CONNECT "TDR" TO OUTPUT VOLTAGE SOURCE OF ANY TYPE. DAMAGE TO THE
SAMPLING GATE AND TUNNEL DIODE MAY OCCUR WITH VOLTAGE IN EXCESS OF 5 V.
P. The instrument is now ready cable testing.
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-20-01 Page 109
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
5. Test Aircraft Coax Cables.
A. Test VHF Comm Antenna Cable.
Gain access to E & E compartment.
Disconnect VHF COMM # 1 Antenna quick disconnects at station # 128. (See Figure 104.)
Connect TDR Tester to VHF Comm # 1 Antenna Coax.
Carefully observe CRT while rotating (position knob e) "Cursor" slowly clockwise to observe the entire
length of antenna coax cable.
Observe "Bulkhead Quick Disconnect" for shorts, high resistance, or possible corrosion. (Refer to
M/M 20-90-1 21 for sample displays.)
Continue to slowly rotate (position knob e) "Cursor" until "Antenna" display is shown on CRT.
NOTE: Ensure test set DistanceIDIV is set to 1 foot division.
(7) Compare display shown to the following sample displays: (See Figure 105 and 106.)
NOTE: The distance display shown in Fig. 105 and 106 is only for display purposes. The actual distance will
depend on type of aircraft checked.
NOTE: The following sample displays are for two different type of Antennas currently in use. (See Figure 105A and
106A.) Verify the correct part number of the Antenna under test and match it to the sample display. The
sample displays shown were created from composite samples of several different aircraft with serviceable
systems. Slight differences in actual displays shown may be due to several different factors. Refer to
introductory paragraphs at the beginning of this document, or M/M 20-90-120 TEKTRONIX 1502G 'TIME
DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER" - (TDR) TESTER. The final interpretation of serviceability or fault lies with
the user of the test instrument.
(8) Repeat steps (2) through (8) for VHF Comm #2 and VHF Comm #3 Antenna Coax (if applicable).
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-20-01 Page 110
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
MODE S TRANSPONDER
COAX DISCONNECT STA 285
PANEL \
E&EBAY
MARKER BEACON
STA 189
MODE S / ATC TRANSPONDER

STA 213
STA 289
( IF INSTALLED )
#2 RAD ALT XMT
Coax Disconnect Panel E & E Bay Sta. 128

Figure 104
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-20-01 Page 111
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF Comm #I-2 or 3 PN. DMC50 Type Antenna

Figure 105
Effectivity
CODE P 23-20-01 Page 112
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF Comm #1-2 or 3 PN. DMC50-3/B Type Antenna # 1 Position

Figure 105A

CODE 2 23-20-01 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF Comm #1-2 or 3 PN. DMC50-3/B Type Antenna # 2 Position

Figure 105B

CODE 2 23-20-01 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF Comm #1-2 or 3 PN. DMC50-3lB Type Antenna #3 Position

Figure 105C

CODE P 23-20-01 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
REPLACEABLE
ALUMINUM
ALLOY
FIBERGLASS
VHF Comm #1-2 or 3 DMC 50 Antenna

Figure 105D
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-20-01 Page 116
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF Comm #I-2 or 3 PN5890524-1 Type Antenna

Figure 106

CODE P 23-20-01 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST

Figure 106A
B. Test Radio Rack Coax Cables to Quick Disconnect Panel.
(2) Disconnect Antenna Coax at all quick disconnects, station # 128. (See Figure 104)
(3) Connect Cable test assembly with bnclfemale type pin to TDR test set.
(4) Connect TDR test cable to center male coax pin at Radio Rack.
(5) Test coax between Radio Rack and Quick Disconnect Panel.
NOTE: Aircraft with #3 NAV have a bnc Tee connector next to the Quick Disconnect Panel. The #2 NAV cable
MUST be disconnected from the Tee connector for the TDR to properly display the #2 Inter-connect.
CODE 2
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(6) Carefully observe CRT while rotating (position knob U) "Cursor" slowly clockwise to observe the
entire length of Inter-connect coax cable.
(7) Continue to slowly rotate (position knob tt) "Cursor" until "OPEN" (6 to 8 feet) display is shown on
CRT.
NOTE: Ensure test set DistanceIDIV is set to 1 foot division.
(8) Compare display shown to the following sample display: (See Figure 107)
NOTE: The sample display shown was created from composite samples of several different aircraft with
serviceable systems. Slight differences in actual display shown may be due to several different factors.
Refer to introductory paragraphs at the beginning of this document, or M/M 20-90-1 20 TEKTRONIX 1502
C- ''TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER" - (TDR) TESTER. The final interpretation of serviceability or fault
lies with the user of the test instrument.
(9) Repeat steps (4) through (9) for each Radio Rack Coax Connector Cable.

CODE 2 23-20-01 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
Radio Rack to Bulkhead Disconnect Panel

Figure 107
C. Conclude Test.
(1) Disconnect TDR test set from aircraft.
(2) Reconnect all Antenna Coax connectors to Bulkhead Quick Disconnect.
(3) Reinstall and secure all T/R Units removed, perform LLM checks (if applicable).
(4) Secure aircraft to proper configuration.
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-20-01 Page 120
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF NAVIGATION/COMMUNICATlON CONTROL PANELS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The VHF-1 and VHF-2 navigationlcommunication control panels are installed on the pedestal in the flight
compartment.
2. Removal/lnstallationVHF-1 Naviaation/Communication Control Panel

A. Removal VHF-1 Control Panel
Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Panel Section
Pedestal (2) Left Console
(2) Press on panel face, release slot-head fasteners, then release hand pressure.
NOTE: When hand pressure is released, spring-loaded electrical connector partially ejects panel out of cavity.
(3) Remove panel from cavity.
B. Install VHF-1 Control Panel.
(1) Make certain circuit breakers called out in paragraph 2, step (1) are open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Insert control panel in cavity and press on panel face to engage panel receptacle with spring-loaded
electrical connector.
NOTE: Approximately 30 pounds of pressure is necessary to force control panel into proper position.
(3) While pressing on panel face, engage and lock slot-head fasteners.
(4) Close the following circuit breakers:

--
(5) Operate navigation-1 and communication-1 system to ensure proper operation of control panel.
(See Page
- 501, Adjustmennest.)
CODE I 23-20-02 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
3. Removal/lnstallation VHF-2 Naviaation/Communication Control Panel
A. Remove VHF-2 Control Panel

-
(2) Press on panel face, release fasteners, then release hand pressure.
NOTE: When hand pressure is released, spring-loaded connector partially ejects panel out of cavity.
B. Install VHF-2 Control Panel .
(1) Make certain circuit breakers called out in Step A (1) are open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Insert panel in cavity and press on panel face to engage panel receptacle with spring-loaded
connector.
(5) Operate navigation and communication systems to ensure proper operation of control panel. (See
Page 501, AdjustmentlTest.)

CODE 1 23-20-02 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF COMMUNICATION CONTROL PANELS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The VHF-1 and VHF-2 communication control panels are installed on the pedestal in the flight
compartment.
2. Removal/lnstallationVHF-1 Communication Control Panel

A. Removal VHF-1 Control Panel
(1) Open the following circuit breakers.
VHF communication-1 Overhead Emergency dc bus

(2) Release slot-head fasteners.
(3) Disconnect electrical connector and remove panel from cavity.

B. Install VHF-1 Communication Control Panel.
(2) Connect electrical connector and insert control panel in cavity.
(3) Engage and lock slot-head fasteners.
VHF communication-1 Overhead Emergency dc bus
(5) Operate VHF Communication-1 System to ensure proper operation of control panel. (See Page 501,
AdjustmenVTest.)
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-20-02 Page 201
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
3. Removal/lnstallation VHF-2 Communication Control Panel
A. Remove VHF-2 Control Panel
VHF communication-2 Upper main Right radio bus

(2) Release fasteners.
(3) Disconnect electrical connector and remove panel from cavity.
B. Install VHF-2 Communication Control Panel .
(1) Make certain circuit breakers called out in Step A (1) are open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Connect electrical connector and insert panel in cavity.
--
VHF communication-2 Upper main Right radio bus
(5) Operate communication systems to ensure proper operation of control panel. (See Page 501,
AdjustmenVTest.)

CODE 96 23-20-02 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
ADJUSTMENTrrEST VHF NAVIGATION/COMMUNICATlON CONTROL PANEL

1. AdiustmenVTest
A. General
On applicable audio control panel, place VHF switch to on position.
Place microphone selector switch to ON position for VHF system being tested.
Turn volume control to midrange, place squelch - OFF switch to SQUELCH position and select an
operating (tower) frequency on VHF comm control panel and request radio check.
While listening in headset, check for presence of signal.
Turn OFF, VHF and SQUELCH switches and turn ON, VOR switch for system being tested.
Select local operating VOR frequency on the VHF navigation control panel and listen in headset for
presence of station identifier tone signal.
Place VOR and volume control switches to OFF position.

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
u
1. Ad.iustmentKest VHF Communication Control Panel
A. General
On applicable audio control panel, depress VHF button. Ensure button is illuminated to reflect
connection to Audio Control Panel microphones.
Place Radiotlnterphoneswitch to radio.
Press the appropriate VHF button to the out position. Turn the volume control to the mid-range
position.
Select an operating (tower) frequency on VHF Comm panel and request radio check.
While listening in headset, check for presence of signal.
Reset all system switches/buttons.

CODE 96 23-20-02 JUN 11102
NORTHWEST
VHF ANTENNA - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
NOTE: DMC 50-11A (Blade Type) and PIN 5890524-1 (Square Type) 90W Antennas are being replaced by
Sensor Systems 565-8262-DC10A or DMC50-36 SOW Antenna on an attrition basis.
A. The VHF Antennas are located along the fuselage upper and lower centerline. Removalllnstallation may
differ depending upon type of antenna installed. (See Figure 201 or 202 as applicable.) The
Adjustmennest for the VHF antennas is identical (ref. Section 4). Engineering Order 2324-01000
repositions the VHF COMM connections at Station 133 disconnect panel. The #1 VHF COMM connects
to the top antenna. The #2 VHF COMM connects to the bottom antenna. The #3 VHF COMM connects
to the bottom antenna.
NOTE: If the #1 or #3 VHF COMM antenna is bad, the technician may:
Replace the bad #1 or #3 antenna, or:
Connect the # I or #3 VHF COMM to the #2 VHF COMM antenna at the overhead disconnect (station 140L).
MEL the #2 VHF COMM per MEL 23-9.
Add note to log page that the antennas are swapped at the overhead disconnect.
B. Refer to Section 4. for Adjustmennest after antenna installation.

NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used instead of the following listed items:
A. Equipment
(1) PneumaticfBattery Rotary Drill

CAUTION: DAMAGE TO AIRPLANE SKIN MAY RESULT IF SEALANT IS REMOVED WITH METAL TOOLS.
(2) Tester, Bonding Meter (PIN T477W)
(3) RF Wattmeter - (Optional for testing)

B. Consumable Materials
(1) Sealant - PS870B112
(2) Sealant - PR1826B114
(3) Gel-Wrap, P/N EN110589-01
(4) Alodine 1200 (PIN 1201)
(5) 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite Pad (SIN 00-0490-3-3263)
(6) MEK or equivalent solvent
(7) Sealant removal tool-hardwood or plastic (PIN 1015-6 or equivalent)
(8) Parker-0-Lube, or Aeroshell#16 grease (or equivalent).

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
3. Removal/lnstallationVHF Antenna
A. Remove VHF Antenna
(1) Open VHF communication-1 circuit breaker, located on emergency DC bus section of overhead
circuit breaker panel, or VHF communication-2 circuit breaker, located on right radio bus section of
upper main circuit breaker panel or VHF-3 circuit breaker.
CAUTION: IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, DAMAGE TO AIRPLANE SKIN MAY RESULT IF SEALANT IS
REMOVED WITH METAL TOOLS.
(2) Using sealant removal tool (hardwood or plastic) completely remove sealing fillet from base of
antenna. (Refer to Figure 201 (Sheet 1) or Figure 201 (Sheet 2.)
(3) Mask area at aircraft fuselage as closely as possible to base of antenna (or adapter).
NOTE: The masked area of the aircraft fuselage will be used as a template for removal of non-conductive finish
prior to installation.
(4) Remove screws from antenna.
NOTE: If DMC 50-11A (Blade Type) or PIN 5890524-1 (Square Type) 90W Antenna will be reinstalled, adapter
plate should be retained and not discarded.
If installation requires replacement with Sensor Systems 565-8262-DC10A or DMC50-3A 50W Antenna,
refer to Step 3.C. for installation.
CAUTION: IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, USE CARE TO AVOID DAMAGE TO CONNECTOR.
(5) Carefully remove antenna in a direction side to side of the fuselage plane avoiding damage to
connector and area masked in above steps.
NOTE: When removing antenna with side-to-side motion, antenna baseplate (if installed) may separate from
aircraft fuselage at the same time. This is acceptable as the baseplate is removed in the next step.
(6) Use sealant removal tool (hardwood or plastic) to carefully remove antenna adapter baseplate from
fuselage structure (If installed). Avoid damage to area masked in above steps.
(7) Disconnect coaxial connector from baseplate. Retain baseplate for installation if DMC 50-1 1A (Blade
Type) or PIN 5890524-1 (Square Type) 90W Antenna will be reinstalled.

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
NOTE:
LUBRICATE O-RING
SEALANT O-RING WITH PARKER-0-LUBE,
AEROSHELL #16, OR
EQUIVALENT.
c -
VIEW LOOKING DOWN
ADAPTER PLATE
r,
FUSELAGE SURFACE
UPPER ANTENNA INSTALLATION SHOWN

LOWER INSTALLATION SIMILAR
VHF Antenna - (DMC 50-1 1A Type)

Figure 201 (Sheet 1)

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF-1 COMM ANTENNA
A 4/
~ ~ ~ ~ l - l ~ ~ l ~ l ~ l l l 7 l l l l l ~ l 7
=,/ -7
1
L\ VHF-3 COMM ANTENNA

REF. EO 2324-01000
VHF-2 COMM ANTENNA
r OUTSIDE NUT MUST BE
PARALLEL TO C/L OF ANTENNA
SEALANT
I
FUSELAGE SURFACE
C
C C
VIEW A
UPPER ANTENNA INSTALLATION SHOWN
LOWER INSTALLATION SIMILAR
VHF Antenna - P/N 5890524-1 (Square Type)


CODE 1 23-20-03 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
B. Install VHF DMC 50-11A (Blade Type) or PIN 5890524-1 (Square Type) 90W Antenna
(Refer to Figure 201 (Sheet 1) or Figure 201 (Sheet 2) for graphics.)


- DO NOT GET METHYL ETHYL KEYTONE IN THE EYES, ON THE SKIN, OR ON YOUR



WATER.

CODE 1 23-20-03 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
Make certain VHF Communication-1 circuit breaker, located on emergency DC bus section of
overhead circuit breaker panel, or VHF Communication-2, or -3 circuit breaker located on right radio
bus section of upper main circuit breaker panel is open, tagged and safetied.
IN THE FOLLOWING STEP(S), BURNISH ONLY TO REMOVE EXISTING SEALANT, CORROSION
Using a 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite pad and power rotary tool, burnish clean the antenna mount aircraft
Using a 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite pad and power rotary tool, burnish clean both sides of the antenna
adapter plate.
Using a 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite pad and power rotary tool, burnish clean base of antenna.
Using a Blue Scotch-Brite pad burnish clean the countersink antenna screw holes.
Clean aircraft faying surface, both sides of the antenna adapter plate, countersink antenna screw
holes and base of antenna. Use clean, white, cotton cloth that has been well dampened with methyl
ethyl ketone (MEK). Wipe dry.
Apply Alodine No. 1200 solution to cleaned surfaces with brush.
Allow to remain on surface until brown color develops. Then rinse with water and allow surface to
Check the antenna O-ring, and replace it if damaged. Coat antenna O-ring with Parker+-Lube,
Aeroshell#16 grease (or equivalent).
(10) Attach antenna to baseplate by inserting plug and aligning mount holes. (Ref. Figure 201 Sheet 1 or
Figure 201 Sheet 2.)
(11) Connect and secure coaxial cable to the antenna adapter baseplate. (Refer to Figure 201 (Sheet 1)
or Figure 201 (Sheet 2.)
(12) Wrap connector with Gel-Wrap, PIN EN110589-01.
(13) Place antenna and adapter plate in position.
preferred.)

CODE 1 23-20-03 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PS870B112 or equivalent if a 16 hour cure time is available. Use PR1826B114 or equivalent if 1 hour
skin, overlapping 112 inch minimum.
(c) At next RON (regular overnight) remove tape and apply fillet sealer per MIM. Create a log page
to document this procedure and defer to Maintenance Control.
(20) Remove excess sealant from around edge of antenna and fasteners with MEK or equivalent.
NOTE: Make certain that sealant does not obstruct top antenna drain hole.
(21) Close VHF communication-1 circuit breaker located on emergency DC bus section of overhead
circuit breaker panel or VHF communication-2, or -3 circuit breaker located on right radio bus section
of upper main circuit breaker panel.
(22) Refer to Section 4. for Adjustmentrrest after antenna installation.

CODE 1 23-20-03 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
C. Install VHF Sensor Systems 565-8262-DC10A or DMC50-3B 50W Antenna


- DONOT GET METHYL ETHYL KEYTONE IN THE EYES, ON THE SKIN, OR ON YOUR



WATER.

CODE 1 23-20-03 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(1) Make certain VHF Communication-1 circuit breaker, located on emergency DC bus section of
overhead circuit breaker panel, or VHF Communication-2, or -3 circuit breaker located on right radio
bus section of upper main circuit breaker panel is open, tagged and safetied.
CAUTION: IN THE FOLLOWING STEP@), BURNISH ONLY TO REMOVE EXISTING SEALANT, CORROSION
(2) Using a 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite pad and power rotary tool, burnish clean the antenna mount aircraft
(3) Using a 2-inch Blue Scotch-Brite pad and power rotary tool, burnish clean base of antenna.
(4) Using a Blue Scotch-Brite pad burnish clean the countersink antenna screw holes.
(5) Clean aircraft faying surface, countersink antenna screw holes and base of antenna. Use clean,
white, cotton cloth that has been well dampened with methyl ethyl ketone (MEK). Wipe dry.
(6) Apply Alodine No. 1200 solution to cleaned surfaces with brush.
(7) Allow to remain on surface until brown color develops. Then rinse with water and allow surface to
(8) Remove Line Transformer (NWA 09-2393-3-0079, 23 inches long) if installed. Return to stock as
serviceable. (Refer to Figure 202 Sheet 1.)
(9) Install Adapter cable (NWA SIN 09-2300-3-0004) in place of Line Transformer removed in step (8).
(Refer to Figure 202 Sheet 2.)
NOTE: If aircraft already has a 50W Antenna installed, steps (8) and (9) are not required for antenna installation.
(10) Connect and secure the adapter cable to antenna.
(11) Check the antenna O-ring, and replace it if damaged. Coat antenna O-ring with Parker-0-Lube,
Aeroshell #16 grease (or equivalent).
(12) Wrap connector with Gel-Wrap, PIN EN110589-01.
(13) Place 50W Antenna in position. (The adapter plate used on previous DMC 50-1 1A (Blade Type) or
PIN 5890524-1 (Square Type) Antenna installations is not required.)
preferred.)

CODE 1 23-20-03 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PS870B112 or equivalent if a 16 hour cure time is available. Use PR1826B1/4 or equivalent if 1 hour
skin, overlapping 112 inch minimum. Create a log page to document this procedure and defer
to Maintenance Control.
(c) At next RON (regular overnight) remove tape and apply fillet sealer per MIM. Close log page.
(20) Remove excess sealant from around edge of antenna and fasteners with MEK or equivalent.
NOTE: Make certain that sealant does not obstruct top antenna drain hole.
(21) Close VHF Communication-1 circuit breaker located on emergency DC bus section of overhead
circuit breaker panel or VHF Communication-2, or -3 circuit breaker located on right radio bus
section of upper main circuit breaker panel.
(22) Refer to Section 4. for Adjustmentrrest after antenna installation.
Effectivity 2
Page 210
CODE 1
JUN 11/02
OLD INSTALLATION
+ Banana Plug
Adapter
Coax V//////////v/////////A
Plate
Feedline
Douglas
Line Transformer
4651569-505
NWA STIN 09-2393-3-0079
Sensor Systems Inc.
565-8262-DC10A
NEW INSTALLATION L/hm WI=
Coax Adapter Cable

Feedline NWA STIN 09-2300-3-0004
NORTHWEST
4. Adjustmentrrest VHF Antenna
A. Test VHF Antenna.
Place VHF switch to "ON" position on Captain's audio control panel.
Place microphone selector switch to position for VHF system being tested.
At each audio panel, set volume control to midrange position and actuate applicable VHF microphone
selector switch.
Press squelch disable switch on transceiver front panel. Background noise should be audible.
Rotate volume control to verify noise level can be varied.
Turn volume control to midrange, place squelch-off to "squelch" position, and select an operating
(tower) frequency on VHF communication control panel and request radio check.
While listening in headset, check for presence of signal and verify sidetone is audible over normal
noise level in flight compartment.
Set meter selector on front of transceiver to reflected power position (if applicable), actuate PTT
switch and check transmitter function. Meter indication should be less than 2. If meter indication is
less than 2, go to Step (16). If meter indication is greater than 2, perform Steps (9) through (15).
NOTE: If transceiver does not have meter selector, it will be necessary to perform Steps (9) through (13) to verify
transmitter reflected and output wattage measurement.
(9) Remove power from system. Insert RF wattmeter in antenna line by connecting antenna coaxial
cable to one side of wattmeter and transmitter antenna connector to other side of wattmeter. Rotate
wattmeter arrow to direction of antenna for forward power measurement.
(10) Apply power to system and press PTT switch. Wattmeter should indicate 25 watts minimum.
(11) Rotate wattmeter arrow to direction of transmitter for reflected power measurement and press PTT
switch. Wattmeter should indicate no more than two watts.
(12) Disconnect RF wattmeter.
(13) Reconnect aircraft coaxial cable(s) disconnected in step (9).
(14) Repair VHF COMM System as necessary.
(15) Re-test system.
(16) Job complete.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-20-03 Page 213
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
VHF ANTENNA - INSPECTIONICHECK

1. General
A. Inspect VHF Antenna as follows:
(1) Inspect antenna to ensure no noticeable erosion or delamination has occurred. If antenna is
damaged, or has evidence of excessive erosion, or delamination; remove and replace antenna.
(2) Perform system test as required per DC-9 MIM 23-20-03.

NOTE: Peeled paint is NOT a sign of a damaged or defective antenna and is not cause for replacement.

CODE 1 23-20-03 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
ACARS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This section contains descriptive information covering the Allied Signal MUA-45A Aircraft Communications
Addressing and Reporting System (ACARS)/ Air Communications (AIRCOM) Data Link System.
A. The ACARS (Aircraft Communications Addressing and Reporting System) MUA-45A Data Link System
is a two-way digital communications link (ground-to-air or air-to-ground) for transmitting data between
an aircraft and a ground station. ACARS enhances aidground communications by easing the flight
compartment work load and eliminating much of the airlground voice communications traffic. ACARS
enables a high-speed computer controlled digital data link between the airplane and ground facilities
using: a VHF transceiver, ARlNC data link stations, landlines, a central ARlNC control station, and airline
terminals. The data link exchanges routine airline operations information. ACARS also enables voice
"Phone-Patch" communications between the airplane and ground telephone circuits via: the VHF
transceiver, an ARlNC voice station, landlines, the central ARlNC control station, and ground telephone
systems. It automatically records and transmits 0001events times such as OUT (of the gate), OFF (the
ground), ON (the ground), and IN (the gate). The 0001events are determined by aircraft sensors on the
landing gear, doors, brakes, etc. The flight crew can manually enter data into the system for downlink
processing. The occurrence of 0001events is automatically recorded in terms of Universal Time Constant
(UTC). These event times are stored in protected memory locations, which cannot be modified by manual
entry, and are automatically transmitted to a ground station. The clock times are derived from an internal
UTC clock powered by a uninterruptable power source.
B. ACARS receives data inputs from airplane sensors, program wiring, and the pilot. Incoming data
communications are displayed to the pilot via a CNA--45B Control Unit. Outgoing data communications
are sent automatically or manually. Data is sent using ARlNC assigned frequencies (primarily 131.550
MHz), in ARlNC encoded audio frequency tone modulation. Actual data transfer from the aircraft to the
ground station is performed whenever a valid communications link is established between the aircraft and
the ground station. In addition to the acquisition, recording, and automatic transmission of data, the system
allows manual entry of data by the flight crew. Data is entered in the text mode via a 38 key control panel
and displayed on a 16 line, 22 character LCD display. When the complete message is entered, the crew
initiates downlink processing. Preformatted messages can be displayed on the LCD panel for entering
data in predefined fields prior to transmission to the ground station. The types of data the system
processes includes flight data and crew data.
At certain stations, the NWA ACARS VHF ground station provider ARlNC now has the capability to
remotely re-tune the aircraft transceiver connected to the ACARS Management Unit (MU). This retuning
is done automatically by ARINC's computer system to reduce the RF frequency congestion. When an
NWA aircraft downlinks an "ON" message (at touchdown), the ARINC's computer immediately uplink's a
message to the MU to re-tune the aircraft transceiver to an alternate frequency while on the ground. Then,
when the aircraft downlinks an "OFF" message (at takeoff), the ARINC's computer uplinks a message to
re-tune the transceiver to the base frequency. The selected frequency, as indicated in the frequency field
on the COMM DATA MODE page, will automatically change at the same time the MU retunes the affected
transceiver. Autotunes will happen on every flight where the capability exists, and in no way are to be
considered abnormal. Adequate default conditions exist in both the ACARS MU and the ARlNC computer
system to assure that the aircraft and the ground stations are communicating properly.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 1 23-26-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
An ACARS Control Display Unit status statement of "NO COMM-MSG IN QUEUE is NOT the result of an
Autotune fault. This statement will not be displayed unless both the alternate and the base frequencies
have been checked for activity.
(1) The following are the valid ACARS operating frequencies used in the USA by ARINC:
(a) BASE FREQUENCY; 131.55 Mhz
(b) ALTERNATE #I; 129.12 Mhz
(c) ALTERNATE #2; 130.02 Mhz
(2) All stations will eventually have Autotuning capabilities.
D. The MUA-45 Data Link System consists of the following components:
(1) MUA-45A Management Unit
(2) CNA-45B Control Unit
2. Component Description
A. MUA-45A Management Unit (MU)
(1) The management unit contains modulation and demodulation circuitry for interfacing with the aircraft
transceiver, a self-contained GMT clock, and RAM memory for storing 0001 event times and flight
numbers. The management unit provides the following interfaces:
NOTE: The interface hook-up varies from aircraft type.
(a) ARINC 429 high speed interface to the PPI-4B Weather Radar Indicator.
(b) ARINC 429 low speed interface for control unit interface and Digital Flight Data Acquisition Unit
(DFDAU).
(c) ARINC 419 interface for data printer and interface to VHF transceiver.
The seven character (42 bit) aircraft registration number as well as a two character (12 bit) aircraft
identification number are hardwired to the management unit. These digital representations are used
by the management unit to identify uplinked messages addressed to it and provide identification for
downlinked messages.
A programmable read-only memory contains the instructions that control all system operations.
Information transfer is controlled by a microprocessor whose bus structure connects all I/O devices
directly to the system bus via programmable 110 interface devices. The operation of these interface
devices can be modified by simple changes in the system program.
The Central Processing Unit (CPU) periodically senses each 110 device to determine what action, if
any, should be taken. When the system has information to transmit or receive, the microprocessor
interrupts its sensing routine and executes the appropriate processing routine.
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 1 23-26-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(6) The management unit is housed in a standard ARlNC 4 MCU case. Power for the self-contained
GMT clock and 0001 memory is derived from the aircraft +28v HOT Battery Bus. The front panel
of the management unit contains a test switch and LED indicators which give a visual indication
whether the management unit and the control unit are functioning properly. The management unit
has built-in-test equipment (BITE) circuits which routinely test the Airborne ACARS system for
proper operation.
B. CNA-45B Control Unit (CU)
(1) The control unit provides the flight crew interface with the ACARS System. The CNA-45B Control
Unit consists of a 38 key control panel and a 16 line, 22 character LCD display. The flight crew can
enter text via the keyboard, display the data on the LCD, then downlink the data to a ground
processor. The flight crew can also select preformatted messages by pressing the appropriate key.
The message is displayed on the LCD and data may be entered into predetermined fields and then
downlinked. The control unit has a microcomputer which monitors keyboard status, controls the
interface with the MUA-45A Management Unit, and controls the LCD display. The control unit has
an extender board for easy access to major signals. It receives data from and sends data to the
management unit. It receives power from the management unit. All lighting is provided from the
aircraft 5 volt lighting bus.
(2) CNA-45A Keyboard Control Panel key definitions:
The ENTISEND key either transfers data from the CU displayldata register to management unit
(MU) memory, or sends an entered message to the ground, depending on the function and mode
in use.
The curser movement keys (up-arrow and down-arrow) move the cursor up and down the data
page. Holding either key down causes the function to repeat.
The CLR key deletes the previously entered data or text. On received messages pages (RCVD
MESSAGES 1 & 2), this key deletes undesired uplink messages held in MU memory.
The SHIFT key shifts the system between upper and lower case function.
The MAlN MENU key displays the MAlN MENU page.
The NEXT PAGE key cycles the display to the next page, when one is present.
The PREV PAGE key cycles the display to the previous page, when one is present
The VOICEIDATA key, when pressed will switch between voice mode or data mode. In Data
Mode it places the aux VHF transceiver into data demand mode to allow uplink and downlink
for ACARS messages. In Voice Mode it places the AUX VHF into voice mode to allow for voice
communications. No ACARS data can be sent while in voice mode.
The PRINT key will send the CU display page to the printer if available. When messages are
received, the entire message is printed, even though only one page may be displayed on the
CRT. The message is printed in the format in which it is received (40,66, or 80 characters).
NOTE: One exception to the "PRINT" key function is when the "MESSAGE WAITING" status message is being
displayed. This indicates that an uplink message has just been received. Pressing the "PRINT" key in
this case causes the "MESSAGE WAITING" status message to extinguish, and the uplinked message to
be channeled to the printer. The message will be stored in the memory whether or not a printer is installed.
(j) The DIMIBRT key is a horizontal mounted rocker switch, which when pressed to the left
decreases the CRT display intensity, and when pressed to the right increases the CRT display
intensity. There are approximately 15 visually detectable steps of intensity.
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 1 23-26-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(k) The SPACE key enters a space in the data entry.
(I) The PI1key, when in lower case, enters a slash in the data entry.
(m) The TI, key, when in lower case, enters a comma in the data entry.
(n) The W. key, when in lower case, enters a period in the data entry.
(0) The YI- key, when in lower case, enters a dash in the data entry.
(p) The alpha-numeric keys enter the appropriate alpha-numeric character depending on the case
function selected.
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 1 23-26-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
ACARS - TROUBLESHOOTING
1. General
A. NWA has been experiencing a high number of ACARS Management Unit (MU) removals with the shop
findings of NO TROUBLE FOUND (NTF). NWA also is experiencing a high quantity of ACARS downlink
message traffic due to assorted troubleshooting practices used by Maintenance personnel following a pilot
report. The following information should help to provide a better understanding for troubleshooting and
repairing of the ACARS system.
B. The communication links involved in the ACARS system include three main components or levels as
follows:
Level A- The aircraft avionics equipment
Level B- The service provider (ground radio)
Level C- The host computer system (NWA)
Maintenance personnel's primary responsibility is to maintain the aircraft avionics equipment (Level A
Equipment). Problems with the service provider and host computer system, Level B and C, can contribute
to a pilot report on a particular aircraft, but will tend to effect other aircraft as well.
C. An aircraft ACARS system can be returned to service following a discrepancy by accomplishing successful
BITE and LlNK tests from the ACARS main menu. The BITE and LlNK tests verify proper operation of the
aircraft avionics equipment, Level A. If a "NO COMM-MSG IN QUEUE" COMMUNICATION status
message occurs following the LlNK test this indicates that the service provider, Level B, is not
communicating with the ACARS MU. The system can still be returned to service as long as the VHF #3
is confirmed to be operational by monitoring the ACARS frequency (shown on the DATA COMM page,
normally 131.55 Mhz) with one of the other VHF transceivers. Confirmation of a "chirping" sound heard
when the LlNK test is initiated indicates proper system operation.
D. Since all domestic station in the US now have ACARS service providers, Level B, Maintenance personnel
may accomplish a complete network test to the host computer system, Level C, to verify the system is
operating properly. A network test of the ACARS system will confirm that Levels A, B, and C are working.
This test must be correctly accomplished or the host computer system will reject the initiated downlink
message.
2. Network Test
A. Accomplish a WEATHER REQUEST or send a "free text" message to the station operations office.
However, the FLIGHT DATA page must have the following fields loaded and checked prior to sending.
FLIGHT NO- Load the Flight Number field with the number "1 3 .
FLIGHT DT- Flight date of terminating flight, within two days of present day
DEPT STN- Departure station of terminating flight
DEST STN- Destination (or present) station
( 1) The DEST STN information loaded on the ACARS FLIGHT DATA page directs the ACARS free text
messages to the proper station printer address. For WEATHER REQUESTS, Flight No. 13 should
be used. A WEATHER REQUEST will normally cause an uplink of the hourly weather within one
minute, thus testing the Level A, B, and C network full circle.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-26-00 Page 101
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(2) Should any entry on the FLIGHT DATA page be incorrect, the host computer system will reject the
downlink message (which may appear as an inoperative network). NWA is CHARGED for all
downlink messages regardless of whether the host computer accepts or rejects them. Therefore,
we must make sure that all the information entered is valid.
In the coming year, NWA will be adding PRT and SCEPTRE printed alerts to stations to inform Operations
and Maintenance of Level B and Level C ACARS equipment outages and restorals. This information will
be valuable in troubleshooting ACARS discrepancies.
Check SCEPTRE Program /FOR IGK 23-28-001 NARRATIVE for current ACARS Troubles and
Solutions.
3. -1 8E Software Anomalies
A. NWA has discovered several anomalies that exist on the ACARS Management Units (MU) with the -18E
software installed. The software installed can be found on a sticker on the front plate of the MU or on the
ACARS CDU maintenance page. Listed below are examples of possible log page write-ups resulting from
the software anomalies and applicable check-out procedures. If no problems are found after performing
the check-out procedures, the log pages can be signed off.
(1) ACARS will only store X (X being a number between 1 & 10) number of messages; or
Every time a new message is received the former stored message is dropped; or
ACARS will not transmit or receive messages; or
ACARS displays "NO COMMUNICATIONS" after trying to downlink.
(a) Pull the 115 VAC and 28 VDC breakers for more than 30 seconds.
(b) Fill out the ACARS FLIGHT DATA page as follows:

FLT : 13
DATE: (CURRENT DATE)
DEPT STN: MSP
DEST STN: ORD
(c) Verify the parking brake is set, the aircraft is in the ground mode, and at least one cabin door
is open.
(d) If the MAlN MENU page is not displayed, press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU and
verify the MAlN MENU page is displayed.
(e) Press key # 8 to activate the LINK TESTIUTC.
(f) Press key #1 on the CDU and check that the FLIGHT DATA page is displayed.
1) Verify the UTC time on the FLIGHT DATA page was updated.
(g) Press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU, and check that the MAlN MENU page is
displayed.
(h) Press key #5 and check that the REQUEST MENU page is displayed.
(i) Press key #3 and check that the WEATHER REQUEST page is displayed.
(j) Press the ENTERISEND key and check that the MAlN MENU page is displayed after the
downlink is delivered to the ground.
(k) Press key #7.

CODE 1 23-26-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
1) Verify RCVD MESSAGES page is displayed.
2) Verify that weather is displayed.
(I) Repeat steps (1). (g). through (1). (k). several times.
(2) ACARS would not come up; or

ACARS dumps all data on FLIGHT DATA page either at the gate or in the air; or
ACARS completely inop (failed) on departure and/or landing; or
MU FAILURE is displayed on the ACARS screen.
Press and hold the TEST switch on the ACARS MU.
1) Verify all four LEDs come on for three seconds, turn off for three seconds, then the two
green LEDs come on until the TEST switch is released.
Pull the 115 VAC and 28 VDC breakers for more than 30 seconds.
Fill out the ACARS FLIGHT DATA page as follows:

FLT: 13
DEPT STN: MSP
DEST STN: ORD
Verify the parking brake is set, the aircraft is in the ground mode, and at least one cabin door
is open.
If the MAlN MENU page is not displayed, press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU and
Press key #8 to activate the LINK TESTJUTC.
Press key # I on the CDU and check that the FLIGHT DATA page is displayed.
Press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU, and check that the MAlN MENU page is
displayed.
Press key #5 and check that the REQUEST MENU page is displayed.
Press key #3 and check that the WEATHER REQUEST page is displayed.
Press the ENTERISEND key and check that the MAlN MENU page is displayed.
Press key #7.
1) Verify RCVD MESSAGES page is displayed.
(m) Repeat steps (2). (h). through (2).(i). several times.

CODE 1 23-26-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(3) The ACARS system will not receive WEIGHT DATA, but all other functions of the ACARS system
seem to work.
Fill out the ACARS Flight Data page as follows:

FLT 13
DEPT STN: MSP
DEST STN: ORD
is open.
If the Main menu page is not displayed, press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU, and
verify the MAIN MENU page is displayed.
Press key #8 to activate the LINK TESTIUTC.
Press key #1 on the CDU and check that the FLIGHT DATA page is displayed.
Press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU and check that the MAlN MENU page is
displayed.
Press key #5 and check that the REQUEST MENU page is displayed.
Press key #3 and check that the WEATHER REQUEST page is displayed.
Press the ENTERISEND key and check that the MAlN MENU page is displayed.
Press key #7.
1) Verify RCVD MESSAGES is displayed.
Repeat steps (3). (f). through (3). (j). several times.
(4) The ACARS UTC time is inop; or

The ACARS UTC time will not update to correct time.

FLT 13
DEPT STN: MSP
DEST STN: ORD
is open.
If the Main menu page is not displayed, press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU, and
verify the MAIN MENU page is displayed.
Press key #8 to activate the LINK TESTIUTC.

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(e) Press key #1 on the CDU and check that the FLIGHT DATA page is displayed.
(f) IF and ONLY IF the LlNK TESTIUTC fails to update the time, perform a functional check-out
procedure of the air to ground sensor, the door sensors, and the parking brake sensor.
(Reference MM 23-26401501 .)
(5) ACARS did not generate one or all 001 Times (OUT, OFF, ON, or IN). All other functions normal.
FLT 13
DEPT STN: MSP
DEST STN: ORD
is open.
If the Main menu page is not displayed, press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU and
Press key #8 to activate the LlNK TESTIUTC.
Press key #1 on the CDU and check that the FLIGHT DATA page is displayed.
Press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU and verify the MAlN MENU page is displayed.
Press the SHIFT M key.
1) Verify the MAINTENANCE page is displayed.
Close all cabin doors.
Press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU and verify the MAlN MENU page is displayed.
Press key #3 and check the DEPARTURE page is displayed.
CAUTION: WHEN PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING STEP, INSURE THE AIRCRAFT IS SECURELY
CHOCKED.
(k) Release the parking brake.
1) Verify the data field OUT TIME: generates the current time approximately 4-8 seconds
later.
(I) Open the GROUND SENSE relay circuit breaker.
1) Verify the OUT AND OFF TIME does not change.
(m) Press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU and verify the MAlN MENU page is displayed.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-26-00 Page 105
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(n) Press key #4.
1) Verify the ARRIVAL DATA page is displayed.
2) Close the GROUND SENSE relay circuit breaker.
3) Verify the data field ON TlME generates a time approximately 10 seconds later.
(0) Set the parking brake.
(p) Open any cabin door.
1) Verify on the ARRIVAL DATA page the data field IN TlME generates a time when the
parking brake is set.
(6) ACARS unable to turn ACARS chime off
(a) Verify the parking brake is set, the aircraft is in the ground mode, and at least one cabin door
is open.
(b) If the Main menu page is not displayed, press the MAlN MENU key on the ACARS CDU and
(c) Press key #8 to activate the LINK TESTIUTC.
(d) Press key # I on the CDU and check that the FLIGHT DATA page is displayed.
1) Verify the UTC time on the FLIGHT DATA page was updated and the chime sounds.

CODE 1 23-26-00 AUG 06/02
NORTHWEST
ACARS - ADJUSTMENTrTEST
1. General
This section contains procedures for performing an operational test and a system test of ACARS (Aircraft
Communications Addressing and Reporting System).
A. The operational test verifies proper operation of ACARS in a minimum of time, using only equipment
installed in the airplane.
B. The system test increases the scope of the operational test to provide all performance requirements of
the system.
2. O~erationalTest - ACARS
Prepare for Test.

A. Close the following circuit breakers on the Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel:
(1) B10-902 ACARS MU (Approximate location F-18 )
(2) B10-903 AUX VHF (Approximate location G-18 )
(3) B1-24 GROUND CONTROL RELAY RIGHT

NOTE: After E.O. 2326-01003 Close B1-23, Ground Control Left instead of 81-24 Ground Control Relay Right
NOTE: Positions vary from aircraft to aircraft, these locations are only approximate locations.
B. Close the following circuit breaker on the Lower EPC Circuit Breaker Panel:
(1) B1-8 CALL SYSTEM BREAKER
C. Close the following circuit breaker on the Overhead Electrical Circuit Breaker Panel:
(1) B10-901 ACARS MEM (Approximate location A-1 8 )

D. The following should occur when ACARS is powered up:
(1) The ACARS CNA-45B Control Unit on the Right, Forward Pedestal should illuminate and display the
MAIN MENU page.
(2) The ACARS UTC starts tracking time in minutes from the moment the 81G901 ACARS MEM breaker
is closed.
3. Test ACARS
NOTE: Do not operate ACARS unnecessarily. Misuse of ACARS can be costly since it can tie down the ARlNC
communications network, and the airline's ACARS ground stationlfacility.
Unless otherwise specified, all controls are on ACARS Control Unit (CU) on the forward pedestal.
A. Press and hold the TEST switch on the ACARS management unit (MU) in AFT RIGHT RADIO RACK.
Check that the following occurs:
(1) All four LEDs come on for three seconds, turn off for three seconds, then the two green LEDs come
on until the TEST switch is released.
CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
NOTE: If either ACARS unit fails the BITE test, the applicable red LED will come on until the TEST switch is
released.
B. Release the TEST switch after the two green LEDs come on or if the unit fails.
C. Set parking brake.
D. Check that the MAlN MENU page is displayed as follows:
MAlN MENU
I-FLIGHT DATA
2-LOAD DATA
3-DEPT/ENROUTE DATA
4-ARRIVAL DATA
5-REQUEST MENU
6-FLT PROGRESS REPORTS
7-RCVD MESSAGES
8-LINK TESTIUTC
9-MAINTENANCE REPORTS
0-CHIME: ON
E. Press the #1 key and check that the FLIGHT DATA page is displayed as follows:
FLIGHT DATNPREFLT RPT

FLT NO: NNN
FLT RLS DATE: NN
DEPT STN: AAAA
DEST STN: AAAA
ETE: NNNN
UTC: NNNN
FUEL BDD: NNNNN US GAL
FOD: NNN.N LBS
CAPT ID: NNNNNN FIO: NNNNNN
FIA ID: NNNNNN
FLT RLS #/AMEND: -/-

RLS PASS WORD: -
NEXT PAGE FOR HELP
F. Check elapsed time since ACARS MEM circuit breaker was opened and closed, it is displayed in the UTC
data field on the FLIGHT DATA page.
G. Panel Lighting Test
(1) Rotate Pedestal Light control . Check ACARS CU panel lighting varies intensity as control is rotated.
Select brightness level as desired.
NOTE: The ACARS CU display and the panel lighting have two different lighting controls. The display is controlled
by the DIMIBRT switch on the CU and the panel lighting is controlled by the Pedestal Light Control.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-26-00 Page 502
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
H. Mair~tenancePage Te
(1) If the MAlN MENU page is not displayed - press the MAlN MENU key (on the ACARS CU ), and check
MAIN MENU page is displayed.
(2) Press SHIFT and M keys, and check the MAINTENANCE page is displayed as follows:
MAINTENANCE
1-AIRCRAFT STATUS
2-110 STATUS
3-MU CONTROL
4-SENSORS
5-COMM STATUS
6-DEBUG
PREV PAGE FOR

MAlN MENU
(3) Cursor down to line "4-SENSORS" and press the "ENT/SENDHkey (on the ACARS Control Panel),
and check that the "0001 SENSORS page is displayed.
CAUTION: BEFORE RELEASING PARKING BRAKE, BE SURE AIRPLANE WILL NOT MOVE.
(4) Release the parking brake and verify the BRAKE data field under the column marked REAL changes
to RELSD and the column marked FILTERED changes to RELSD Two-Four seconds after the brake
is released.
NOTE: The REAL field is the current state of the sensor. The FILTERED field is the sensor with respect to the time
filtering used to detect the changing state of the sensor. If no sensor data is detected then the FILTERED
and REAL fields will read INACT.
(5) Set parking brake and verify the BRAKE data field under the column marked REAL changes to "SET'
and under the column marked FILTERED changes to " S I T Two-Four seconds after the brake is set.

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(6) Open and close the following Doors and verify the "FILTERED and "REAL" fields for the appropriate
DOOR SENSOR change to either "OPEN" or "CLOSED" depending on the position of the door.
Reference table below for Door 1-7 on 0001 Sensors Page.
AIRCRAFT DOOR SENSOR NAME ACARS RACK CONNECTOR

LOCATION PIN
- -
FORWARD MAlN DOOR 1, 3,4,5

CABIN DOOR
** FORWARD MAlN DOOR 1 THRU 7

CABIN DOOR
* AFT ENTRY DOOR DOOR 2,6,7
* - MEANS AIRCRAFT IS EQUIPPED WlTH VENTRAL STAIR

**- MEANS AIRCRAFT IS NOT EQUIPPED WlTH VENTRAL STAIR
(7) Open circuit breaker B1-23,Ground Control Left, and verify the "STRUT data field under the column
marked "REAL" changes to AIR and under column marked "FILTERED" changes to AIR 4 to 10
seconds after the circuit breaker is opened.
(8) Close circuit breaker 81-23, Ground Control Left, and verify the "STRUT data field under the column
marked "REAL" changes to GROUND and under the column marked "FILTERED changes to
GROUND in 4 to 10 seconds after the circuit breaker is closed.
I. Downlink - Uplink Test
NOTE: The aircraft must be on the ground and a cabin door open in order for the UTC time to be updated.
(1) Press the #8 key on CU to activate "LINK TESTIUTC

NOTE: Another way to select "LINK TESTIUTC", is move the curser to line 8 and press the ENTISEND key.
(2) Verify that the following happens:
(a) "ATTEMPTING DOWNLINK message is displayed at the bottom of the page.
(b) Chime sounds and then shuts off
(c) Reset light blinks on and off until the reset switch on the FIO's NAV COMM Panel is pressed.
(d) The "ATTEMPTING DOWNLINK message disappears within three minutes. If the
"ATTEMPTING DOWNLINK" message does not disappear within three minutes, you will receive
a "NO COMM-MSG IN QUEUE" message.
NOTE: "NO COMM-MSG IN QUEUE" is not necessarily an airplane hardware failure, but a failure of the system
to establish contact with a ground station (i.e. - ground station failure, or not being within range of a ground
station). Repeating this test, and in some cases moving the airplane, may cause this problem to clear.
If the MU BITE test passes OK, the CU appears to accept data entry normally, and there are no log book
reports, then the system should be considered to be normal.
CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
J. Flight Data Page Test
(1) Press the MAlN MENU key and check the MAlN MENU page is displayed.
(2) Press the #1 key and check the FLIGHT DATA page is displayed.
(3) Check that the UTC data field displays correct UTC time. If the UTC is incorrect and the "LINK
TESTIUTC" test worked properly, check to make sure a cabin door is open and the aircraft is on the
ground when the "LINK TESTIUTC test was performed. Change out the Management Unit and
repeat DOWNLINK - UPLINK TEST.
K. Voice Frequency Communications Test
Press the MAlN MENU key, and check MAlN MENU page is displayed.
Press the DATANOICE key, this will display the COMM-DATA MODE page as follows:
-COMM-DATA MODE
ACTIVE FREQ:-.-
TUNED BY:
BASE FREQ:-.-
1-131.55 (N. AMERICA1
ASIA)
2-1 31.45 (JAPAN)
3-1 31.72 (EUROPE)
4-OTHER FREQ:-.-
NEXT PAGE FOR

TUNING HELP
PRESS VOICE FOR VOICE
MODE FREQ
Press the VOICE/DATA key again, this will display the COMM-VOICE MODE page as follows:
COMM-VOICE MODE
FREQ: 118.00
PRESS DATA FOR

DATA MODE FREQ
Use the numeric keys on the ACARS CU to key in an authorized test frequency, and press
ENTISEND. The COMM-VOICE MODE page will be displayed as follows:
COMM-VOICE MODE
FREQ: (New freq selected)
PRESS DATA FOR

DATA MODE FREQ

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(5) Select the VHF-3 (AUX) on the Captains Audio Selector Panel.
(6) Check that the transmission and reception is clear and with a minimal amount of noise.
NOTE: The volume is a fixed level and can not be adjusted.
(7) Press the DATANOICE key, this will display the COMM-DATA MODE page.

CODE 1 23-26-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
ACARS MANAGEMENT UNIT - REMOVAUINSTALLATION

1. Removal of ACARS Manaaement Unit
A. Open the following circuit breakers on the Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel:
B10-902 ACARS MU (Approximate location F-18 )

B10-903 AUX VHF (Approximate location G-18 )
NOTE: Positions vary from aircraft to aircraft, these locations are only approximate locations
B. Open the following circuit breaker on the Overhead Electrical Circuit Breaker Panel:
B10-901 ACARS MEM (Approximate location A-1 8 )
C. Remove the ACARS management unit.
2. Installation of ACARS Manaaement Unit
A. Install ACARS management unit.
B. Close the following circuit breakers on the Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel:

D. Press and hold theTEST switch on the ACARS management unit (MU) in AFT RIGHT RADIO RACK.
on until TEST switch is released.
released.
E. Release the TEST switch after the two green LEDs come on or if the unit fails.
F. Downlink - Uplink Test

NOTE: The aircraft must be on the ground and have a cabin door open in order for the UTC time to be updated.
(1) Press the #8 key on CU to activate "LINK TESTIUTC"

Effectivity
CODE 1 23-26-01 Page 401
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(d) The "ATEMPTING DOWNLINK message disappears within three minutes. If the
"ATTEMPTING DOWNLINK" message does not disappear within three minutes, you will receive
a "NO COMM-MSG QUEUE message.
NOTE: "NO COMM-MSG QUEUE" is not necessarily an airplane hardware failure, but a failure of the system to
establish contact with a ground station (i.e. - ground station failure, or not being within range of a ground

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
ACARS CONTROL UNIT - REMOVAUINSTALLATION

1. Removal of ACARS Control Unit
A. Open the following circuit breakers on the Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel:

B. Open the following circuit breaker on the Overhead Electrical Circuit Breaker Panel:
C. Remove the ACARS control unit.
2. Installation of ACARS Control Unit
A. Install ACARS control unit.
B. Close the following circuit breakers on the Upper EPC Circuit Breaker Panel:

D. Press and hold the TEST switch on the ACARS management unit (MU) in AFT RIGHT RADIO RACK.
on until TEST switch is released.
released.
E. Release theTEST switch after the two green LEDs come on or if the unit fails.
F. Downlink - Uplink Test

NOTE: The aircraft must be on the ground and have a cabin door open in order for the UTC time to be updated
(1) Press the #8 key on CU to activate "LINK TESTIUTC"

Effectivity
CODE 1 23-26-02 Page 401
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(d) The "ATTEMPTING DOWNLINK" message disappears within three minutes. If the
"ATTEMPTING DOWNLINK message does not disappear within three minutes, you will receive
a "NO COMM-MSG IN QUEUE" message.
NOTE: "NO COMM-MSG IN QUEUE is not necessarily an airplane hardware failure, but a failure of the system
to establish contact with a ground station (i.e. -ground station failure, or not being within range of a ground
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-26-02 Page 402
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
A. The public address system enables the pilots and cabin attendants to address passengers through the
loudspeakers.
B. The public address system consists of an amplifier, handsets, microphones, main and forward cabin
speakers, lavatory speakers, chimes, and various switches and controls.
The public address amplifier is a fully transistorized audio amplifier used for amplification of
announcements from the pilots and cabin attendants stations. The amplifier is contained in a short
114-ATP ventilated dust cover which encloses a two-level chasis. Components are mounted on the top
of the lower shelf and the bottom of the upper shelf so that all wiring and adjustments are exposed when
the dust cover is removed. Front panel controls consist of a master gain screwdriver adjustment, and a
normal calibrate switch with an associated output level calibration meter. The controls are used to set the
overall gain of the amplifier by pressing the normakalibrate switch to the calibrate position and adjusting
the master gain control to the desired output value. A reading of 0 VU (top scale) indicates the amplifier
is producing approximately 66 db gain. All electrical connections are made through a connector on the
back of the unit. The amplifier is secured in position by a knurled-nut hold-down fastener on the front.
D. Handsets for public address are installed at each of the cabin attendant stations and in the flight
compartment at the pilots stations. The handsets are also used for service interphone and cabin
interphone operation. Sidetone from the public address amplifier is directed to the handsets.
E. A sufficient number of loudspeakers are installed to give practical coverage of the cabin area. The
speakers are located in the overhead Passenger Service Units (PSU) and the lavatory and forward cabin
area ceiling.
F. Announcements from the pilot's stations have priority over the cabin attendants stations. A VU meter is
installed in the overhead switch panel and at each cabin attendant station to indicate the system volume
level. The system is automatically switched from flight to ground volume level and from ground to flight
volume level.
G. Power is supplied to the public address amplifier from a 115-volt ac bus and a 28-volt dc bus through the
amplifier circuit breakers. The public address system will operate when the airplane is powered by battery
only.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31-00 Page 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operation
A. Audio sound picked up by the microphone in the handset is converted to electrical energy and fed as input
to the public address amplifier.
NOTE: In the following text, aircraft 9150-91 56, 9927-9929, 9945-9949, and 9988-9998, the pilot has priority only
over the flight attendant stations.
B. Inputs are arranged on a priority circuit: the pilots control has top priority, the forward cabin attendants
control has second priority over the aft cabin attendant. The input control relays are interconnected so that
the pilots push-to-talk switch has full control over the amplifier, disconnecting any other input. Volume
level is changed to overcome the differential between ground and flight noise levels by grounding a control
wire which causes a relay in the public address amplifier to energize. Contacts on the relay connect the
ground-gain potentiometer in parallel with the master gain potentiometer, thereby decreasing the
resistance of the shunt across the secondary of the audio input transformer and reducing the input level.
An adjustable sidetone level potentiometer is connected in shunt across a separate secondary of the
output transformer. Therefore, the presence of normal sidetone indicates that the amplifier is operating
properly up to the audio output transformers.
C. After amplification, the output of the amplifier is fed to all system speakers. The system speakers convert
the electrical energy to audible sound. The system can be operated from either cabin attendant station
only when the flight compartment handset is in its hanger and the push-for-announce switch on the cabin
attendant panel is depressed.
A. Operate Public Address System

NOTE: To operate from cabin attendant stations, use comparable controls. The following steps describe public
address operation from Flight Compartment.
(1) Place controls to the following positions:
Control Position
(1) Handset hanger switch Handset removed
(2) Public address switch on overhead Depressed

switch panel
(3) Headset Press-to-Tal k Depressed
(4) Radio Rack Cooling Fan Switch Fan

--
B. For Public Address operation through Audio Control Panels, (see section 23-50-0).
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31 -00 Page 2
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
Public Address - Pictorial Diagram

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 96
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PASSENQER ADDRESS
(1 15 VA AMPLIFIER
MAINCRcurr FORWARD RIGHT I I
BREAKERPANEL EQUIPMENT PANEL
TEST AND
f 0 AUDIO INTERGRATING
OVERHEADcwurr
BREAKER PANEL I
-_ -%
"
I RELAY
STATION 110 RELAY PANEL
2 . 2 ~n
TO FLIGHT
CONTROL
(P. A. AMPLIFIER)
LAVATORY
SPEAKER
(TYPICAL)
ATENDANT P. A. HAND
MICROPHONE (TYPICAL)
'1
--
L
CAPTAIN P. A. HAND -
C
MICROPHONE
GALLEV
SPEAKER
CAPT AND FIO

AUDIO PANEL
NOTES:
1. RELAYS ARE SHOWN IN
DEENERGIZED CONFIGURATION
2 . c D E N O T E S DIRECTIONOF
SIGNAL FLOW
Passenger Address System-Simplified Schematic

(NC 9138-91 40,915O-9156,9927-9929,9945-9949,9988-9998)
Figure 2
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 96
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
MAIN ClRCUK
BREAKER PANEL PASSENOER ADDRESS AMPLIFIER
ATENDANT P.A
BASS
BOOST
AND CUT
.TO SPEAKEI
(FIGURE 2)
(FIGURE 2) I AMP
STATION 110 RELAY PANEL FORWARD

1-1 FLAGHT OVERHEAD
SWITCH
PANEL
VU METER
NOSE GEAR STRUT

FORWARD
NOTES: ATTENDANT
PANEL
I. RELAYS ARE SHOWN IN VU METER
DEENERGIZED CONFIGURATION
2.- DENOTES DIRECTKINOF
SIGNAL FLOW
Public Address Priority and Control Circuits - Simplified Schematic

( A/C 9138-91 40,915O-9156,9927-9929,9945-9949, 9988-9998)
Figure 3
Effectivity Page 5
CODE 96
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS RELAY
PUBLIC ADDRESS
MPLIFIER
1
- CAPTlAN
bAUDK)-
- RELAY
I ZNSIDETONt
OUTPUT
I-ORWARD
OR AFT
CABIN
A l l NU ANT
r >WDIO
(OUTPUT
1
PRIORITY
CIRCUITS
TORIZED
AMPLIFIER,
ClRcurrs
-
AUDIO
'OUTPUT
1
346D1
(120 W)
p==-qmd
-
CABIN SPEAKERS
(TYPICAL)
Public Address - Simplified Schematic All A/C Except Those Shown in Figure 2 and 3
Figure 4
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31 -00 Page 6
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS
AMPLIFIER
"> wsn-TO-TALK
PILOT PUBLIC
ADMlfSS
( P N SWITCH
FWD O V L R N A D
SWITCH PANEL
r"ATT CALL
VU METER
SWITCH
FWD OVERHEAO
PANEL
1 . A L L 'RE-'DESlCNATEO RELAYS SWMW IN DEENERUZED (INTERPWNO WNflWRATION.

~ ~ ~ : ~ T
2. ACTUATION OF PA SWITCH OR EITHER PUSH-AWNOUNCE SWITCH ENERUZES RELATED
'RED RELAY AllD N R N S ON PUBLIC NDRESS AMPLIFIER.
3 . GROUND CONTROL RELAY SHOWW IN GROUNO W N f l W R A T l O N WITH AIRPLANE
1 1 5 V AC BUS DEENERCIZED.
Public Address Priority and Control Circuits - Simplified Schematic

(All AIC Except Those Shown in Figure 2 and 3)
Figure 5
Effectivity Page 7
CODE 96 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM -TROUBLE SHOOTING
1. Trouble Shooting
A. NO PUBLIC ADDRESS OUTPUT FROM ONE STATION
(1) Faulty public address Interchange amplifier or handset Replace amplifier.

amplifier known serviceable unit.
- - - - - - - -- - -
B. NO PUBLIC ADDRESS OUTPUT FROM ANY STATION
(1) Faulty microphone Check microphone or handset Replace microphone

or handset using station known to be operative. or handset.
(2) Faulty public address Interchange panel with one known Replace panel.
relay and interlock panel to be serviceable. If operation
is not restored, see step 3.
(3) Faulty wiring Check interconnecting wiring Repair wiring

between station using ohmmeter or continuity as necessary.
and amplifier checker.
NOTE: When repairing or replacing audio signal wiring, ground shielding at same ground studs used by
original wiring. Use same routing as original when replacing wiring runs.
C. DISTORTED OUTPUT OR FEEDBACK FROM ONE STATION
(1) Faulty microphone Check microphone or handset Replace microphone or

or handset at other stations. handset.
D. NO MUSIC OUTPUT
NOTE: Make sure public address is functioning properly before trouble shooting music system.
(1) Defective tape or tape Remove tape player and open outer Repair tape or winding
winding mechanism case. Visually inspect tape and winding mechanism as
mechanism for proper operation. necessary.
(2) Defective tape player Interchangetape player with one known Replace tape player.
to be serviceable.
(3) Faulty music volume continuity and measure resistance of Repair as necessary.
control or control wiring. music volume control potentiometer.
Vary potentiometer throughout entire
range and observe smooth audio signal
change. Check continuity from control
to tape player.
CODE 6 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PANEL
TAPE PLAYER
I SERVICE
INTPH
AMPLIFIER
I 25 FWD R RAD RACK- SHELF 1 26 -
L E F T B RIGHT
TYPICAL SI'EAKER
:R AFT
AT'~ENDANT
HANDSET
BAGGAGE RACKS
COMMON
I TYP AUDIO TRANSFORMER
Public Address - Schematic

Figure 101
CODE 6 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM -TROUBLE SHOOTING

1. Trouble Shooting
A. NO PUBLIC ADDRESS OUTPUT FROM ONE STATION
(1) Faulty public address Interchange amplifier or handset Replace amplifier.

amplifier known serviceable unit.
B. NO PUBLIC ADDRESS OUTPUT FROM ANY STATION
(1) Faulty microphone Check microphone or handset Replace microphone

or handset using station known to be operative. or handset.
(2) Faulty public address Interchange panel with one known Replace panel.
relay and interlock panel to be serviceable. If operation
is not restored, see step 3.
(3) Faulty wiring Check interconnecting wiring Repair wiring

between station using ohmmeter or continuity as necessary.
and amplifier checker.
NOTE: When repairing or replacing audio signal wiring, ground shielding at same ground studs used by
original wiring. Use same routing as original when replacing wiring runs.
C. DISTORTED OUTPUT OR FEEDBACK FROM ONE STATION

- -
(1) Faulty microphone Check microphone or handset Replace microphone or

or handset at other stations. handset.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31 -00 Page 101
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM - TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
1. General
Objective of TesVCalibration Procedure: The objective of the test and calibration procedure is to calibrate
the PA System so the same level of sound is provided to the Cabin from both the Flight Deck and the
Forward Flight Attendant Station. The Aft Flight Attendant Station is adjusted to provide the same level
of sound or slightly less if necessary to eliminate regenerative feedback from this position. Each speaker
uses a multi-tap transformer to adjust its output level. A one-time measurement of the Cabin is made
during the procedure to verify the speaker taps are correctly set. Seat row 2AB is then used as a reference
point for all other measurements.
Sound level measurements are taken at a distance of 2 (inches) below and centered under each speaker.
A dimension standard is attached to the back of the Sound Level Meter for this purpose.
The handsets have an adjustable microphone. The gain control pot is accessed by disassembling the
mouthpiece. Use a small slot screwdriver to rotate the adjustment pot to increase or decrease output gain
of the microphone as necessary.
Sound from the Random Noise Generator is induced into the handset by placing the mouthpiece of the
handset on the Random Noise Generator "handset holding fixture". The handset should be fully
assembled, including the windscreen over the mouthpiece, and placed squarely on the "handset holding
fixture".
The handset key switch can be held in the "ON" position by a switch clamp that is chained to the Random
Noise Generator Test Set.
The Sound Level Meter is set for " A weighting and "SLOW response during all sound level readings.
2.- T
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used instead of the following listed items.
A DC9 PA 9 D23-90504 Local Manufacturer TestIAdjust PA Audio

System Test Kit System Calibration
-
-
3. Prepare Test Equipment
A. Tester Set-up
(1) Set the output sound level of the Random Noise Generator to 95 dB as follows:
(a) Check the condition of the Sound Level Meter battery by verifying the "Battery" indication is not
shown in the display window.
(b) Set the front panel switches to " A weighting and "Slow" response.
(c) Set the Random Noise Generator switches to (PWRJPTT) ON and (Output) SPKR.
Effectivity
CODE 91 23-31 -00 Page 501
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(d) Insert the Sound Level Meter sensor inside the Random Noise Generator foam ring and adjust
the "Audio Adjust" screw until the meter reads 95 dB.
4. Calibrate PA Svstem
A. Close the following circuit breakers:
(1) Passenger Address 5A DC circuit breaker located on the Center Overhead EPC panel.
(2) Passenger Address 1A AC circuit breaker located on the Upper EPC panel.
B. Calibrate PA Amplifier
(1) At the PA Amplifier, set the calibration by moving the front panel switch to the "CAL" position. Use a
small slot screwdriver to rotate the "Master Gain Control" adjustment until the VUIdB meter reads
(zero) 0 dB.
NOTE: This is only a preliminary adjustment and may change as the calibration procedure progresses.
C. Adjust Flight Deck Station sound output level, and verify the speaker system transformer taps are properly
set as follows:
(1) Verify aircraft is in "Ground Mode".
(2) Open the PSU panel at seat 2AB and verify the speaker tap is set at the 1 watt tap position.
(3) Close the PSU panel.
NOTE: For the remainder of this step, the aircraft must be quiet, no radios, leaky air hoses, Comm radios,
interphone communications, etc. Close the flight deck windows and door.
(4) Remove handset from the hanger and depress the "push to announce" switch to activate handset
in the PA mode.
(5) Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Flight Deck handset.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.D. for proper placement of Flight Deck handset into the Random Noise Generator "handset
holding fixture".
(6) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 92 dB k 0 dB)
at seat row 2AB using the following steps:
(a) The gain control pot is accessed by disassembling the mouthpiece and locating an adjustment
pot on the side or back of the mouthpiece.
(b) Use a small slot screwdriver to rotate the adjustment to increase or decrease output gain of the
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 92 dB at seat row 2AB.

(7) If 92 dB level cannot be met by adjusting the handset gain control, increase the setting of the master
gain control on the PA Amplifier.
NOTE: If after increasing the master gain control on the PA Amplifier, the 92 dB sound level at seat row 2AB cannot
be met, replace the handset and re-test.
NOTE: Inability to meet the sound level requirements may also be caused by a group of speakers with incorrect
tap settings, a shorted transformer, or wire. If for example seat row 2AB is producing 87 dB (5 dB below
requirement) the remaining correctly tapped speakers will also be 5 dB below the chart requirement.
Effectivity
CODE 91 23-31-00 Page 502
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(8) Measure the remaining speakers using the following steps:
(a) Ensure "Sound Level Meter" is set for " A weighting and "SLOW response during all sound level
readings.
(b) Sound level measurements are taken at a distance of 2 (inches) below and centered under
each speaker. (A dimension standard is attached to the back of the Sound Level Meter for this
purpose).
(c) Verify the sound levels on the following chart are met:
Location Sound Level Tap Setting
Galley Area 95 dB ( k3 dB) 2 Watt
Row 1 thru 5, Lt. & Rt. 92 dB ( f 1 dB) 1 Watt
Row 11 & 12, Lt. & Rt. 92 dB ( f 1 dB) 1 Watt
Row 13 thru 17, Lt. & Rt. 95 dB ( k1 dB) 2 Watt
Aft Lavs Lt. & Rt. 89 dB ( *3 dB) 112 Watt
NOTE: If a seat row location sound level is out of limits, open the PSU and verify the speaker tap is
set correctly, if it is, the tolerance becomes +2 dB. If the speaker tap is set correctly and the speaker
is still out of the increased tolerance, replace the transformer and re-test.
D. Verify "Flight Mode" sound level increases as follows:

NOTE: Refer to step 1.D. for proper placement of Flight Deck handset into the Random Noise Generator "handset
holding fixture".
WARNING: NORMAL ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY TO VARIOUS SYSTEMS WILL BE INTERRUPTED
WHEN GROUND CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE OPENED. MAKE CERTAIN THAT
SWITCHES AND CONTROLS OF EFFECTED SYSTEMS ARE IN CORRECT POSITIONS TO
PREVENT INADVERTENT OPERATION OR SHUTDOWN OF EQUIPMENT.
(2) Open the left Ground Control Relay circuit breaker located on the Upper EPC panel.
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB using the following steps:
readings.
(b) Sound level measurements are taken at a distance of 2" (inches) below and centered under
purpose).
(c) Sound level must increase 6 dB to 98 dB (+2 dB). Do not adjust the handset to obtain this
measurement. If the sound increase does not meet the requirement, the amplifier must be
replaced.
CODE 91 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(d) Close the Left Ground Control Relay circuit breaker.
(e) Hang-up the handset on the hanger switch.
E. Check Operation of Forward Flight Attendant Station
(1) Remove the handset from the hanger and depress the "Push to Announce" switch to activate the
handset in the PA Mode.
(2) Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Fwd Flight Attendant Station handset.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.D. for proper placement of Fwd Flight Attendant handset into the Random Noise Generator
"handset holding fixture".
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 92 dB (*I dB)
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 92 dB (+l dB) at seat row 2AB.

NOTE: If this level cannot be met, increase the setting of the master gain control on the PA Amplifier. lncreasing
the setting of the master gain control will require that steps 4.C and 4.D be redone. If after increasing the
master gain control on the PA Amplifier the level cannot be met, replace the handset and retest.
(d) Verify the Galley Area speaker is muted.
F. Check Operation of Aft Flight Attendant Station
(2) Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Aft Flight Attendant Station handset.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.D. for proper placement of Aft Flight Attendant handset into the Random Noise Generator
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 92 dB (kl dB) at seat row 2AB.

NOTE: If this level cannot be met, increase the setting of the master gain control on the PA Amplifier. lncreasing
the setting of the master gain control will require that steps 4.C, 4.D and 4.E. be redone. If after increasing
the master gain control on the PA Amplifier the level cannot be met, replace the handset and re-test.
Effectivity
CODE 91 23-31-00 Page 504
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
Verify the Galley Area speaker is not muted.
NORMAL ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY TO VARIOUS SYSTEMS WlLL BE INTERRUPTED
WHEN GROUND CONTROL ClRCUlT BREAKERS ARE OPENED. MAKE CERTAIN THAT
Open the Left Ground Control Relay circuit breaker located on the Upper EPC panel to put the aircraft
in the flight mode. Make a 20 second verbal announcement. If regenerative feedback occurs, adjust
the handset to reduce its gain until the feedback is eliminated.
Close the Left Ground Control relay circuit breaker to put the aircraft in the ground mode.
Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Aft Flight Attendant Station handset.
NOTE: Refer to step 1 .C. for proper placement of Aft Flight Attendant handset into the Random Noise Generator
(8) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. It should be no less than 84 dB. If less than the required
measurement, replace the handset and re-test.
G. Adjust VU Meters
(1) Verify aircraft is in the ground mode.
(2) Access the VU meter adjustment, R40-4 (Gnd Mode) and R40-5 (Flt Mode) by opening the aft EPC
upper wall and removing the Fwd Flt Att Panel upper screen panel.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Fwd Flight Attendant handset into the Random Noise Generator
Adjust R40-4 so the VU meter needle is in the middle of the white band on the Fwd Flt Attendant
Panel. Verify the Flight Deck and Aft Flt Attendant Panel meters read approximately the same as the
Fwd Flt Attendant Panel.
Open the Left Ground Control relay located on the Upper EPC panel to put the aircraft in the flight
mode.
Adjust R40-5 so the VU meter needle is in the middle of the white band on the Fwd Flt Att Panel. Verify
the Flight Deck and Aft Flt Att Panel meters read approximately the same as the Fwd Flt Att Panel.
Close the Left Ground Control relay circuit breaker.
H. Check the PA System Priority Order
(1) Make an announcement from the Flight Deck and Fwd Flight Attendant Stations simultaneously; only
the Flight Deck should be heard.
(2) Make an announcement from the Fwd Flight Attendant Station and Aft Flight Attendant Station
simultaneously; only the Fwd Flight Attendant Station should be heard.
Effectivity
CODE 91 23-31-00 Page 505
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(3) Make an announcement from the Fwd Flight Attendant Station and push the Flight Deck Attendant
Call button simultaneously; both the announcement and the chime should be heard.
NOTE: The chime may sound at a slightly lower volume than normal during the announcement, however it must
be audible. Adjust the chime volume at the chime box adjustment if necessary
I. Check Operation of Attendant Call Chime
(1) Initiate a call chime from the Flight Deck, both Attendant Stations and several random PSU positions;
verify the chime sounds with sufficient volume to be heard during all phases of flight. Adjust the chime
volume at the chime box if necessary.
J. Check Flight Inter-phone System
(1) Using the Flight Deck handset, make a call to each Flight Attendant Station; verify the volume of the
Flight Inter-phone System is sufficient but not too loud to provide clear audible communications
between the three stations. Adjust the volume level at the Flight Inter-phone Amplifier adjustment
if necessary.
K. Conclude Test
(1) Conclude test by performing the following operations:
(a) Make a PA announcement from the Flight Deck and at each Flight Attendant Station; verify the
announcement is undistorted, audible, and intelligible within the galley areas, aisle ways, cabin,
and in the lavatories.
(b) Verify the VU meter needle is in the white band while making the announcement.
(c) Open the left Ground Control Relay circuit breaker located on Upper EPC panel to put the aircraft
in the flight mode.
(d) Make a PA announcement from the Flight Deck and at each Flight Attendant Station; verify the
(e) Verify the VU meter needle is in the white band while making the announcement.
(f) Close the left Ground Control Relay circuit breaker to return the aircraft to the ground mode.
(2) To prevent inadvertent use of the handsets for other maintenance functions, mark the handsets to
identify them as "PA SYSTEM ADJUSTED DO NOT REMOVE.
(3) Insure the cord retaining clamps are secured to the handset hanger attach screw on the Fwd and Aft
Flight Attendant Stations.
(4) Close the EPC aft upper access panel if open.
(6) Test complete.

CODE 91
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
Objective of TestICalibration Procedure: The objective of the test and calibration procedure is to calibrate
Sound from the Random Noise Generator is induced into the microphone by placing the microphone
centered and in contact with the Noise Generator's foam ring.
The Sound Level Meter is set for " A weighting and "SLOW" response during all sound level readings.

A DC-9 PA 9D23-90504 Local Manufacture TesffAdjust PA Audio

A. Tester Set-up
(c) Set the Random Noise Generator switches to (PWRIPTT) ON and (Output) SPKR.
(d) Insert the Sound Level Meter sensor inside the Random Noise Generator's foam ring and adjust
CODE ~ I A 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(1) At the PA Amplifier, set the calibration by rotating the front panel knob to the "CAL" position. Using
a small slot screwdriver, rotate the Master Gain Control adjustment until the VU/dB meter reads 0 dB.
NOTE: This is only a preliminary adjustment and may change as the procedure progresses.
C. Verify Matched Microphones
(1) Verify a matched set of microphones exists at the Flight Deck and Fwd Flight Attendant positions:
NOTE: The above step may require that several microphones be tried until a matched set is found. Return any
microphones borrowed from stock and used for this purpose. Using them in this manner does not change
their serviceability status.
(a) At the Flight Deck station, key the microphone and hold it centered and against the Noise
Generator's foam ring. With the generator set at 95 dB measure the sound level at row 2AB.
(b) At the Fwd Flight Attendants station, key the microphone and hold it centered and against the
Noise Generator foam ring. With the generator set at 95 dB measure the sound level at row 2AB.
(c) If the output levels of the microphones are greater than 1 dB apart, replace the microphones and
re-test until a matched set is found.
D. Adjust PA Amplifier Baseline
(1) Adjust the PA Amplifier baseline sound level output level.
(a) Verify the aircraft is in "Ground Mode".
(b) Open the PSU panel at seat 2AB and verify the speaker tap is set at 1 watt tap position. Close
the PSU panel.
(c) At the Flight Deck station, using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Flight
Deck microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Flight Deck microphone on to the Random Noise Generator foam
ring.
(d) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the Master Gain Control on the amplifier front
panel to produce 88 dB (+O dB) at seat row 2AB.
(2) Verify the speaker system transformer taps are properly set by measuring the remaining speakers
as follows:
(a) Ensure "Sound Level Meter" is set for "A" weighting and "SLOW" response during all sound level
readings.
purpose).
Effectivity
CODE ~ I A 23-31 -00 Page 502
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
Galley Area 91 dB ( f 3 dB) 2 Watt
Row 1 thru 5, Lt. & Rt. 88 dB ( +I

dB) 1 Watt
Row 11 & 12, Lt. & Rt. 88 dB ( f 1 dB) 1 Watt
Aft Lavs Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( +3 dB) 112 Watt
set correctly, if it is, the tolerance becomes It2 dB. If the speaker tap is set correctly and the speaker
is still out of the increased tolerance, replace the transformer and retest.
E. Verify "Flight Mode" sound level increases as follows:
(1) Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Flight Deck microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Flight Deck microphone on to the Random Noise Generator's
foam ring.
(a) Ensure "Sound Level Meter" is set for " A weighting and "SLOW' response during all sound level
readings.
purpose).
(c) Sound level must increase 6 dB to 94 dB (+2 dB). If the sound level does not meet this
requirement, the Amplifier must be replaced.

(e) Stow the microphone.
F. Check Operation of Forward Flight Attendant Station
(1) At the Fwd Flight Attendants station, using the Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into
the Fwd Flight Attendant Station microphone.
CODE 9 1 ~ 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Fwd Flight Attendant microphone on to the Random Noise
Generator's foam ring.
(2) Verify the Galley Area speaker is muted.
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Verify the sound level at seat 2AB is 88 dB (+I dB). If not
within this tolerance go back to step D. and re-test.
(4) Stow the microphone.
G. Check Operation of Aft Flight Attendant Station
(1) If Aft Flight Attendant microphone is replaced, use NWA Stock # 01-2300-4-0002. Return the
removed microphone to stock if serviceable.
(2) At the Aft. Flight Attendants station, using the Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into
the Aft Flight Attendant Station microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Aft. Flight Attendant microphone on to the Random Noise
(3) Verify the Galley area speaker is not muted.
(4) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the microphone gain control to produce 88 dB (+1
dB) at seat row 2AB.

(5) Open the Left Ground Control Relay circuit breaker located on the Upper EPC panel to put the aircraft
in the flight mode. Make a 20 second verbal announcement. Verify no regenerative feedback occurs.
If feedback occurs; replace microphone and retest.
(6) Close the Left Ground Control relay circuit breaker to put the aircraft in the ground mode.
(7) Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Aft Flight Attendant Station
microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Aft. Flight Attendant microphone on to the Random Noise
measurement, replace the microphone and retest.
H. Adjust VU Meters
(2) Access the VU meter adjustment, R40-4 (Gnd. Mode) and R40-5 (Flt Mode) by opening the aft EPC
upper wall and removing the Fwd Flt Att. Panel upper screen panel.
(3) Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Fwd Flight Attendant Station
microphone.
CODE ~ I A 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
Open the Left Ground Control relay located on the Upper EPC panel to put the aircraft in the flight
mode.
Close the Left Ground Control relay circuit breaker.

I. Check the PA System Priority Order
J. Check Operation of Attendant Call Chime
K. Conclude Test
WARNING: NORMAL ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY TO VARIOUS SYSTEMS WlLL BE INTERRUPTED
in the flight mode.
CODE ~ I A 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(4) Test complete.

CODE 9 1 ~ 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM -TEST AND ADJUSTMENT

1. General
A. Objective of TestCalibration Procedure: The objective of the test and calibration procedure is to calibrate
uses a multi-tap transformer to adjust its output level. A onetime measurement of the Cabin is made
NOTE: All stations may be susceptible to regenerative feedback. Due to aircraft design, the Aft Flight Attendant
PA Station volume may be the most difficult to adjust without causing feedback. The following test and
adjustment may require several adjustments to eliminate feedback without dropping the system output
lower than the minimum tolerance required. The handset gain adjustment and the "Input Sensitivity"
adjustment may require several adjustments to eliminate feedback and still meet the required output
specifications of the system. The mechanic should be aware, if the "Input Sensitivity" adjustment is moved
after the initial setting, Steps 4. C., D., E., F., and G. must be redone. (Also see step 1.E.)
B. Sound level measurements are taken at a distance of 2 (inches) below and centered under each speaker.
C. The handsets have an adjustable microphone. The gain control pot is accessed by disassembling the
D. The purpose of the "Output Gain" control potentiometer, located adjacent to the PA amplifier is to allow
for overall system adjustment. It can be used to lower output volume level of the entire system if required,
independent of the "Master Gain" control used for calibration of the PA amplifier. This control is initially set
for maximum volume by rotating the adjustment to the counterclockwise (or 0 ohm) stop.
E. The purpose of the "External Sensitivity" control potentiometer, located adjacent to the PA amplifier, is to
provide a means to control regenerative feedback in the PA system. It can be used in conjunction with the
output gain control to reduce feedback. This control is initially set for minimum sensitivity by rotating the
adjustment to the counterclockwise (or 0 ohm) stop.
F. Sound from the Random Noise Generator is induced into the handset by placing the mouthpiece of the
fixture".
G. The Random Noise Generator "Sound Level Meter" is set for " A weighting and "SLOW" response during
all sound level readings.

A DC-9 PA 9D23-90504 Local Manufacture TestIAdjust PA Audio

Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31 -00 Page 501
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
A. Tester Set-up
(1) Passenger Address Control 5A DC circuit breaker located on the Center Overhead circuit breaker
panel.
(2) Passenger Address 7.5A DC circuit breaker located on the Center Overhead circuit breaker panel.
(1) At the PA Amplifier, set the calibration by moving the front panel switch to the "AMP TEST' position.
Use a small slot screwdriver to rotate the "Master Gain Control" adjustment until the VUIdB LED meter
reads (green) 0 dB. Release the knob and rotate back to the normal position. Do not change the "Aux
Gain" control adjustment.
(2) Locate the "Input Sensitivity" and "Output Gain" control potentiometers on a panel adjacent to the PA
amplifier. Loosen the adjustment lock nuts. Using a small slot screwdriver, rotate the adjustments to
the counterclockwise stop. Secure the lock nuts. This is only a preliminary procedure and may
change as required by this procedure.
set as follows:
(1) Verify aircraft is in "Ground Mode", and that both Fuel Shut-off levers are in the OFF position.
NOTE: For the remainder of this step, the aircraft must be quiet, no radios, leaky air hoses, Comm
in the PA mode.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.F. for proper placement of Flight Deck handset on to the Random Noise Generator "handset
holding fixture".
(6) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB (kO dB)
CODE 96 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 88 dB (4dB) at seat row 2AB.
(7) If 88 dB level cannot be met by adjusting the handset gain control, replace the handset and re-test.
(a) Ensure the Sound Level Meter is set for " A weighting and "SLOW" response during all sound
level readings.
purpose).
Galley Area 91 dB ( +3 dB) 2 Watt
Fwd. Lav. 88 dB ( +3 dB) 1 Watt
Row 6 thru 14, Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( +dB)

I 112 Watt
Row 15 & 16, Lt. & Rt. 88 dB ( +I

dB) 1 Watt
Row 17 thru 21, Lt. & Rt. 91 dB ( +I

dB) 2 Watt
Aft Lavs Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( k3 dB) 1/2Watt
set correctly, if it is, the tolerance becomes k2 dB. If the speaker tap is set correctly and the speaker
holding fixture".
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31 -00 Page 503
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(2) Move either Fuel Shut-off Lever to the start position to put the PA in flight mode.
readings.
purpose).
replaced.
(d) Return the Fuel Shut-off Lever to the off position.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.F. for proper placement of Fwd Flight Attendant handset on to the Random Noise Generator
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB @1 dB)
microphone.

NOTE: If 88 dB level cannot be met by adjusting the handset gain control, replace the handset and re-test.
F. Check Operation of Aft Flight Attendant Station. (Reference the following NOTE: before testing the Aft
Flight Attendant Station).
NOTE: Due to aircraft design, the Aft Flight Attendant PA Station volume may be difficult to adjust without causing
excessive feedback. The following test and adjustment may require several adjustments to eliminate
feedback without dropping the system output lower than the minimum tolerance of 82 dB required in step
F. (9) of this procedure. The handset gain adjustment and the "lnput Sensitivity" adjustments may require
several adjustments to eliminate feedback and still meet the required output specifications of the system.
The mechanic should be aware, if the "lnput Sensitivity" adjustment is moved after the initial setting, Steps
4.C., D., E., and F. must be redone.
CODE 96
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
NOTE: Refer to step 1.F. for proper placement of Aft Flight Attendant handset on to the Random Noise Generator
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB (&I dB)
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 88 dB ( k l dB) at seat row 2AB.

(4) Verify Galley area speaker is not muted.
(6) Make a 20 second verbal announcement. If regenerative feedback occurs, adjust the handset to
reduce its gain until the feedback is eliminated.
(7) Return the Fuel Shut-off Lever to the OFF position.
(9) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. It should be no less than 82 dB. If it is replace the handset
and retest.
NOTE: If after replacing the handset, the feedback is still a problem, adjust the "Input Sensitivity" control one third
of a turn clockwise from the counterclockwise stop and recheck. (See step 1.E.) Retighten adjustment lock
nuts. Anytime this adjustment is used steps 4. C., D., E., and F. must be redone.
G. Adjust VU Meters
(1) Verify aircraft is in the Ground Mode, and both Fuel Shut-off levers are in the OFF position.
(4) Adjust R40-4 so the VU meter needle is in the middle of the white band on the Fwd Flt Attendant
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31 -00 Page 505
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
NORMAL ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY TO VARIOUS SYSTEMS WILL BE INTERRUPTED
Move either Fuel Shut-off Lever to the start position and open the Left Ground Control Relay circuit
breaker to put the PA in flight mode.
Adjust R4&5 so the VU meter needle is in the middle of the white band on the Fwd Flt Att Panel. Verify
the Aft Flt Att Panel meters and Flight Deck Panel meters (if installed) read approximately the same
as the Fwd Flt Att Panel.
Hang-up the handset on the hanger switch.
Return the Fuel Shut-off Lever to the off position and close the Left Ground Control Relay circuit
breaker.
be audible.
verify the chime sounds with sufficient volume to be heard during all phases of flight. The chime is
inside the PA Amplifier and is not line adjustable. Replace the amplifier and re-test if chime volume
is unacceptable.
if necessary.
K. Conclude Test
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31 -00 Page 506
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(c) Move either Fuel Shut-off lever to the start position and open the Left Ground Control Relay
circuit breaker to put the PA in flight mode.
(2) Return the Fuel Shut-off lever to the off position and close the Left Ground Control Relay circuit
breaker.
(6) Test complete.

CODE 96
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
A. Objective of TestICalibration Procedure: The objective of the test and calibration procedure is to calibrate
uses a multi-tap transformer to adjust its output level. A onetime measurement of the Cabin is made
lower than the minimum tolerance required. The handset gain adjustment and the "lnput Sensitivity"
specifications of the system. The mechanic should be aware, if the "lnput Sensitivity" adjustment is moved
fixture".
G. The Random Noise Generator "Sound Level Meter" is set for " A weighting and "SLOW response during
2. Tools and Eauipment Required
A DC-9 PA 9D23-90504 Local Manufacture TestJAdjust PA Audio

Effectivity
CODE 97 23-31-00 Page 501
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
3. Pre~are
Test Eaui~ment
A. Tester Set-up
(b) Set the front panel switches to " A weighting and "Slown response.
panel.
(1) At the PA Amplifier, set the calibration by moving the front panel switch to the "AMP TEST" position.
(2) Locate the "Input Sensitivity" and "Output Gain" control potentiometerson a panel adjacent to the PA
set as follows:
in the PA mode.
holding fixture".
(6) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB &O dB)
CODE 97 23-31-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 88 dB (+O dB) at seat row 2AB.
(7) If 88 dB level cannot be met by adjusting the handset gain control, replace the handset and retest.
(a) Ensure the Sound Level Meter is set for " A weighting and "SLOW response during all sound
level readings.
purpose).

Row 1 thru 5, Lt. & Rt. 88 dB ( +I dB) 1 Watt
Row 6 thru 16,Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( +1 dB) 112 Watt
Row 17 & 18,Lt. & Rt. 88 dB ( f1 dB) 1 Watt
Row 19 thru 23,Lt. & Rt. 91 dB ( k1 dB) 2 Watt
Aft Lavs Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( k3 dB) 1 /2 Watt
set correctly, if it is, the tolerance becomes +2 dB. If the speaker tap is set correctly and the speaker
NOTE: Refer to step 1 .F. for proper placement of Flight Deck handset on to the Random Noise Generator "handset
holding fixture".
CODE 97 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
readings.
purpose).
replaced.
dB)
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB (+I
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 88 dB (+ldB) at seat row 2AB.

CODE 97 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 88 dB ( k l dB) at seat row 2AB.

and re-test.
G. Adjust VU Meters
Effectivity
CODE 97 23-31 -00 Page 505
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
breaker.
be audible.
is unacceptable.
if necessary.
K. Conclude Test

CODE 97 23-31-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
breaker.

(6) Test complete.

CODE 97 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
A. Objective of TestlCalibration Procedure: The objective of the test and calibration procedure is to calibrate
after the initial setting, Steps 4. C., D., E., F. and G. must be redone. (Also see step 1.E.)
fixture".
G. The Random Noise Generator "Sound Level Meter" is set for "A" weighting and "SLOW response during
A DC-9 PA 9D23-90504 Local Manufacture TesffAdjust PA Audio

CODE 98 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
A. Tester Set-up
(c) Set the Random Noise Generator switches to (PWRtPTT) ON and (Output) SPKR.
panel.
6. Calibrate PA Amplifier
Use a small slot screwdriver to rotate the "Master Gain Control" adjustment until the VUtdB LED meter
set as follows:

in the PA mode.
holding fixture".
Effectivity
CODE 98 23-31 -00 Page 502
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(6) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB (kO dB)
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 88 dB (4dB) at seat row 2AB.
(7) If 88 dB level cannot be met by adjusting the handset gain control, replace the handset and re-test.
level readings.
purpose).
Fwd Lav. 88 dB ( f 3 dB) 1 Watt
Row 20 & 21, Lt. & Rt. 88 dB ( k1 dB) 1 Watt
Row 22 thru 26, Lt. & Rt. 91 dB ( +l

dB) 2 Watt
Aft Lavs Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( f 3 dB) 112 Watt
set correctly, if it is, the tolerance becomes k 2 dB. If the speaker tap is set correctly and the speaker

CODE 98 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
holding fixture".
(a) Ensure "Sound Level Meter" is set for " A weighting and "SLOW" response during all sound level
readings.
purpose).
replaced.
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB k 1 dB)
microphone.

Effectivity
CODE 98 23-31-00 Page 504
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB (?I dB)
microphone.

and re-test.
G. Adjust VU Meters
CODE 98
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
breaker.
be audible.
is unacceptable.
if necessary.
CODE 98
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
K. Conclude Test
Conclude test by performing the following operations:
Return the Fuel Shut-off lever to the off position and close the Left Ground Control Relay circuit
breaker.
Insure the cord retaining clamps are secured to the handset hanger attach screw on the Fwd and Aft
Close the EPC aft upper access panel if open.
Return aircraft to required configuration.
Test complete.

CODE 98
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
A. Objective of TesffCalibration Procedure: The objective of the test and calibration procedure is to calibrate
B. Sound level measurements are taken at a distance of 2" (inches) below and centered under each speaker.
E. The purpose of the External Sensitivity" control potentiometer, located adjacent to the PA amplifier, is to
fixture".
G. The Random Noise Generator "Sound Level Meter" is set for " A weighting and "SLOW response during

A DC-9 PA 9D23-90504 Local Manufacture Test/Adjust PA Audio

NORTHWEST
A. Tester Set-up
panel.
set as follows:
in the PA mode.
holding fixture".
(6) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB (TO dB)
Effectivity
CODE 99 23-31-00 Page 502
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
microphone.
(c) Adjust gain to measure 88 dB (+O dB) at seat row 2AB.
(7) If 88dB level cannot be met by adjusting the handset gain control, replace the handset and re-test.
level readings.
purpose).
-- -
Galley Area 91 dB ( k3 dB) 2 Watt
Row 6 thru 14, Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( f1 dB) 112 Watt
Row 15& 16,Lt. &Rt. 88 dB ( fl dB) 1 Watt
Row 17 thru 21, Lt. & Rt. 91 dB ( +I dB) 2 Watt
Aft Lavs Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( f3 dB) 112 Watt
NOTE: Refer to step 1 .F. for proper placement of Flight Deck handset on to the Random Noise Generator "handset
holding fixture".
CODE 99 23-31-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(a) Ensure "Sound Level Meter" is set for "A"weighting and 'SLOW response during all sound level
readings.
purpose).
replaced.
microphone.

Effectivity
CODE 99 23-31 -00 Page 504
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the handset gain control to produce 88 dB &l dB)
microphone.

and retest.
G. Adjust VU Meters
CODE 99
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
breaker.
be audible.
inside the PA Amplifier and is not line adjustable. Replace the amplifier and retest if chime volume
is unacceptable.
if necessary.
K. Conclude Test

CODE 99 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
breaker.
(6) Test complete.

CODE 99 23-31 -00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
Objective of TesffCalibration Procedure: The objective of the test and calibration procedure is to calibrate
Sound from the Random Noise Generator is induced into the microphone by placing the microphone
centered and in contact with the Noise Generator's foam ring.
The Sound Level Meter is set for "A" weighting and "SLOW response during all sound level readings.

A DC-9 PA 9D23-90504 Local Manufacture Test/Adjust PA Audio

A. Tester Set-up
(b) Set the front panel switches to "A" weighting and "Slow" response.
(c) Set the Random Noise Generator switches to (PWRtPTT) ON and (Output) SPKR.
Effectivity
CODE 99A 23-31 -00 Page 501
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(1) At the PA Amplifier, set the calibration by rotating the front panel knob to the "CAL" position. Using
a small slot screwdriver, rotate the Master Gain Control adjustment until the VUIdB meter reads 0 dB.
NOTE: This is only a preliminary adjustment and may change as the procedure progresses.
C. Verify Matched Microphones
(1) Verify a matched set of microphones exists at the Flight Deck and Fwd Flight Attendant positions:
NOTE: The above step may require that several microphones be tried until a matched set is found. Return any
microphones borrowed from stock and used for this purpose. Using them in this manner does not change
their serviceability status.
(a) At the Flight Deck station, key the microphone and hold it centered and against the Noise
Generator's foam ring. With the generator set at 95 dB measure the sound level at row 2AB.
(b) At the Fwd Flight Attendants station, key the microphone and hold it centered and against the
Noise Generator's foam ring. With the generator set at 95 dB measure the sound level at row
2AB.
(c) If the output levels of the microphones are greater than 1 dB apart, replace the microphones and
retest until a matched set is found.
D. Adjust PA Amplifier Baseline
(1) Adjust the PA Amplifier baseline sound level output level.
(a) Verify the aircraft is in "Ground Mode".
(b) Open the PSU panel at seat 2AB and verify the speaker tap is set at 1 watt tap position. Close
the PSU panel.
(c) At the Flight Deck station using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Flight
Deck microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Flight Deck microphone on to the Random Noise Generator foam
ring.
(d) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the Master Gain Control on the amplifier front
panel to produce 88 dB (+0 dB) at seat row 2AB using the following steps:
(2) Verify the speaker system transformer taps are properly set by measuring the remaining speakers
as follows:
readings.
Effectivity
CODE 99A 23-31 -00 Page 502
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
purpose).

- -
Fwd Lav 88 dB ( +3 dB) 1 Watt
Row 6 thru 14, Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( f l dB) 1I2 Watt
Row 15 & 16, Lt. & Rt. 88 dB ( +1 dB) 1 Watt
Aft Lavs Lt. & Rt. 85 dB ( +3 dB) 1I2 Watt
-- - -
E. Verify "Flight Mode" sound level increases as follows:
(1) Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Flight Deck microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Flight Deck microphone on to the Random Noise Generator's
foam ring.
readings.
purpose).
(c) Sound level must increase 6 dB to 94 dB (+2 dB). If the sound increase does not meet this
requirement, the Amplifier must be replaced.

CODE 99A 23-31-00 JUN 11102
NORTHWEST
(e) Stow the microphone.
F. Check Operation of Forward Flight Attendant Station
(1) At the Fwd Flight Attendants station, using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the
Fwd Flight Attendant Station microphone.
(2) Verify the Galley Area speaker is muted.
(3) Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Verify the sound level at seat 2AB is 88 dB (+1 dB). If not
within this tolerance go back to step D. and re-test.
(4) Stow the microphone.
G. Check Operation of Aft Flight Attendant Station
(1) An adjustable microphone is used for the Aft Flight Attendant position. It can be identified by a small
hole and an adjustment screw located on the side of the microphone. Replace if necessary with NWA
Stock # 09-2300-3-0003. Return the removed microphone to stock if serviceable.
(2) At the Aft Flight Attendants station, using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the
Aft Flight Attendant Station microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Aft Flight Attendant microphone on to the Random Noise
Generator foam ring.
Verify the Galley area speaker is not muted.
Measure the sound level at seat row 2AB. Adjust the microphone gain control to produce 88 dB (+1
dB) at seat row 2AB.
Open the Left Ground Control Relay circuit breaker located on the Upper EPC panel to put the PA
in the flight mode. Make a 20 second verbal announcement. If regenerative feedback occurs, adjust
the microphone to reduce its gain until the feedback is eliminated.
Close the Left Ground Control relay circuit breaker to put the PA in the ground mode.
Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Aft Flight Attendant Station
microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Aft Flight Attendant microphone into the Random Noise
measurement, replace the microphone and retest.

CODE 99A 23-31-00 JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
H. Adjust VU Meters
(3) Using Random Noise Generator, induce 95 dB of noise into the Fwd Flight Attendant Station
microphone.
NOTE: Refer to step 1.C. for proper placement of Fwd Flight Attendant microphone into the Random Noise
(5) Open the Left Ground Control relay located on the Upper EPC panel to put the PA in the flight mode.
(6) Adjust R40-5 so the VU meter needle is in the middle of the white band on the Fwd Flt Att Panel. Verify
(7) Close the Left Ground Control relay circuit breaker.

I. Check the PA System Priority Order
J. Check Operation of Attendant Call Chime
K. Conclude Test
( I ) Conclude test by performing the following operations:
Effectivity
CODE 99A 23-31-00 Page 505
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
in the flight mode.
(5) Test complete.
Effectivity
CODE 99A 23-31 -00 Page 506
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS AMPLIFIER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The public address amplifier is mounted on the forward right radio rack in the electrical/electronic
compartment.
2. Removal/lnstallation Public Address Amplifier
A. Remove Amplifier
(1) Open passenger address circuit breakers located on emergency dc bus section of overhead circuit
breaker panel and on left radio bus section of upper main circuit breaker panel.
WARNING: TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS (SEE CHAPTER 20).
(2) Loosen and disengage knurled nut form mounting bracket on lower front panel of unit.
(3) Pull unit inboard and out of mount.
B. Install Amplifier
(1) Make certain that passenger address circuit breakers, located on emergency dc bus section of
overhead circuit breaker panel and on left radio bus section of upper main circuit breaker panel, are
open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Install unit on mount.
(3) Engage and tighten knurled nut on mounting bracket on lower front panel of unit.
(4) Close passenger address circuit breakers located on emergency dc bus section of overhead circuit
breaker panel and on left radio bus section of upper main circuit breaker panel.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-31-01 Page 201
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS RELAY AND INTERLOCK PANEL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The public address relay interlock panel is mounted on the forward right radio rack in the
electrical/electronics compartment. If a replacement unit is to be installed, a system test should be
performed following installation.
2. Removal/lnstallationPublic Address Relay and Interlock Panel

A. Remove Panel
(1) Open passenger address circuit breakers located on emergency dc bus section of overhead circuit
breaker panel on left radio bus section of upper main circuit panel.
(2) Disconnect electrical connector.
(3) Remove screws from attaching angles and remove panel.
B. Install Panel
(1) Make certain passenger address circuit breakers, located on emergency dc bus section of overhead
circuit breaker panel and on left radio bus section of upper main circuit breaker panel, are open,
tagged, and safetied.
(2) Position panel on rack and secure with mounting screws.

(3) Connect electrical connector.
(4) Close public address circuit breakers located on emergency dc bus section of overhead circuit
breaker panel on left radio bus section of upper main circuit breaker panel.
3. Adiustmenflest Public Address Relav and Interlock Panel
A. Test Panel
(1) Energize electrical buses.
(2) Depress public address switch on overhead switch panel, remove pedestal handset from hanger, and
press push-to-talk button. While speaking into handset, have assistant remove forward cabin
attendant handset from hanger and depress public address switch. Observe that broadcast from
pedestal handset continues without interruption.
(3) Replace handsets on hangers and repeat step (2) with assistant using aft cabin attendant handset.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31-02 Page 201
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
(4) Replace handsets on hangers. Remove forward cabin attendant handset from hanger, depress
public address switch, and press push-to-talk button on handset. While speaking into handset, have
assistant remove pedestal handset from hanger, depress public address switch on overhead switch
panel, press push-to-talk button, and speak into handset. Observe that broadcast from forward
cabin attendant handset should not be heard, broadcast from pedestal handset should be clear.
(5) Replace handsets on hangers and repeat step (4) using aft attendant handset in place of forward
attendant handset.
(6) Remove handsets from hangers and speak into handsets using interphone system. Observe that
handsets revert back to interphone system when replaced on hangers in step (4) and (5). Replace
handsets on hangers.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31 -02 Page 202
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
CABIN SPEAKERSFRANSFORMERS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
A. Speakers are located in the Forward and Aft Lavatories, Forward and Aft Lowered Ceilings and individual
Passenger Service Units located under the overhead stowage compartments.
QUICK DISCONNECTS
I
TRANSFORMER
Speakernransformer - Typical
Figure 1
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 96
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
CABIN SPEAKERSflRANSFORMERS - REMOVAUINSTALLATION

1. Remove/lnstall Speaker and/or Transformer
A. Remove Speaker and Transformer
(1) Disconnect (2ea) quick-disconnect tabs to disconnect transformer from speaker.

(2) Remove (4ea) screws and washers to remove speaker.
NOTE: If transformer is being removed/replaced, note color code and position of harness wires on transformer and
retain for transformer installation.
(3) Disconnect (2ea) quick-disconnect tabs to disconnect transformer from wire harness.
(4) Remove (2ea) screws and washers to remove transformer.
B. Install Speaker and Transformer
(1) Position transformer and secure with (2ea) screws and washers.
NOTE: Ensure harness wires are installed in same position as when removed .
(2) Attach (2ea) quick-disconnect tabs to connect wire harness to transformer.
(3) Position speaker and secure with (4ea) screws and washers.
(4) Attach (2ea) quick-disconnect tabs to connect transformer to speaker.

NOTE: Ensure red wire is connected to speaker terminal marked by a red dot on base of speaker.
U I- 1 RED WIRE
Cabin Speakernransformer - Typical

Figure 401
CODE 96
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
SPEAKERSflRANSFORMERS - ADJUSTMENTKESTS
NOTE: Test described is applicable to speakerftransformer being replaced.

A. Test Speakerflransformer
(1) Key microphone at Flight Attendant station or Flight Compartment (assistant required) and verify
speaker is producing clear audible sound.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-31-03 Page 501
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
A. Cleaning
(1) Speakers shall be protected at all times during storage to avoid soiling.
(2) Airborne dust shall not be allowed to accumulate on assembly surfaces. A routine thorough vacuum
cleaning and wiping with a clean cotton cloth will remove loose dust before it can be driven into the
surface.
(3) Immediate action should be taken to contain and wipe up all spills as they occur. Wipe, blot or soak
up the spillage using a clean white cotton cloth. Confine the area of the spill by working from the edges
toward the center. The soiled area should be cleaned immediately afterwards. Properly dispose of
cleaning cloths in approved containers.
IElectrical Components 1 No Solutions used I

TABLE 701
II
Joy Liquid Detergent
CLEANING SUPPLIES
I
I Proctor & Gamble
PRODUCT SOURCE
II
Fantastic, Liquid Cleaner Dow Products - Indianapolis, IN
Formula 409, Liquid Cleaner Clorox Co. - Oakland, CA
Butyl Cellosolve Solvent Commercially Available
Cotton Cloth Commercially Available
Rubber Gloves Commercially Available
I
I
Distilled Water I Commercially Available

TABLE 702
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used for listed items.
B. Painting
(1) No painting required.

CODE 96 23-31 -03 JUN 11102
NORTHWEST
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM - HANDSET REMOVAUINSTALLATION

1. General
A. The forward Flight Attendant handset is located on the Forward Flight Attendants PA Control Panel. The
Aft Flight Attendant handset is located on the Aft Flight Attendants PA Control Panel. The Cockpit PA
Handset is located between the Captain and First Officer on the lower center pedestal control panel.
B. The PA System Handsets are plugged in to the control panel using a standard bayonet plug for quick
removal and installation. The Fwd and Aft Flight Attendant Station handset cords are secured to the control
panel with a retaining clamp.
C. The Fwd and Aft Flight Attendant Handsets and the Cockpit Handset have an adjustable volume
microphone. The volume control pot is accessed by disassembling the mouthpiece. Use a small slot
screwdriver to rotate the adjustment pot to increase or decrease volume of the microphone as necessary.
D. The PA System Handset Removalllnstallation procedure includes an "Alternate" test and adjustment for
the handset microphone volume adjustment.
2. Tool and Equipment Required
A. There are no special tools or equipment required for removallinstallationof the PA System Handset.
3. Removal/lnstallation PA System Handset
A. Remove PA System Handset
(1) Remove cord retaining clamp and retain hardware (Fwd and/or Aft Flight Attendant Station).
(2) Unplug handset from control panel.
B. Install PA System Handset
(1) Plug handset into control panel
(2) Install cord retaining clamp retained from removal (Fwd andlor Aft Flight Attendant Station).

CODE 1
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
4. Preferred Test and Adjustment (Required if More Than One Handset is Changed)
A. Accomplish PA System Functional Test; refer to DC-9 Maintenance Manual 23-31-0, Page 501.
NOTE: To avoid possible delay or cancellation on in-service AIC, MC may defer accomplishment of this procedure.
Perform alternate test and adjustment per step 5. Contact MC for deferral instructions.
5. Alternate Test and Adjustment
A. The following procedure is approved with no further action required when only a single handset has been
replaced.
THE "ALTERNATE TEST" PROCEDURE IS NOT TO TAKE THE PLACE OF THE PA TEST AND
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE WHICH IS ROUTINELY SCHEDULED AT MAJOR MAINTENANCE
VISITS, OR AS ASSIGNED BY MAINTENANCE CONTROL FOR ACCOMPLISHMENT (REF. M/M
23-31-0, PAGE 501).
Verify aircraft is in "Ground Mode".
While holding handset withinl14" of the mouth, make an announcement from handset at either the
Flight Deck, Forward Flight Attendant station or Aft Flight Attendant Station by reading a sentence
over the PA System.
Have a second mechanic take note of the volume coming out of the PA speakers in the First Class
section of the aircraft.
Make the same announcement using the new handset at its installed station.
Using a small slot screwdriver rotate the volume control adjustment pot to adjust the new handset
so that it produces approximately the same volume as the known good handset.
Make a PA announcement into the handset. Have a second mechanic verify the announcement is
undistorted, audible, and intelligible within the galley areas, aisle ways, cabin, and in the lavatories.
Put the aircraft into flight mode by moving either fuel control lever to the start position (except
DC9-10) or by pulling the left ground control relay (DC9-10).
Make a PA announcement into the handset. Have a second mechanic verify the announcement is
undistorted, audible, and intelligible within the galley areas, aisle ways, cabin, and in the lavatories.
NOTE: (Aft Flight Attendant Only) Some feedback may occur from the aft Flight Attendant Station in Flight Mode.
If this occurs the volume of the handset may be reduced slightly to eliminate feedback.
(9) Return aircraft to "Ground Mode" by moving the fuel control lever to shut-off position, or by resetting
the ground control relay opened in step (7) (DC9-10).
(10) Return handset to hanger.
(12) Test complete.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-31 -05 Page 402
JUN 11/02
NORTHWEST
INTERPHONE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The service interphone system provides for intercommunication between the areas where servicing and
maintenance operations are most frequently performed. The interphone system and the public address
system are interconnectedthrough in such a manner that the same handsets are used for both systems.
The handsets are also used for communication between the forward and aft cabin attendant stations and
the flight compartment.
The interphone system consists of handsets, call buttons, interphone outlets, and a transistorized
amplifier. The interphone and the audio integrating systems use a common amplifier unit.
The pilots' handset is located on the aft lower portion of the pedestal. The cabin attendants' handsets are
located on the forward and aft cabin attendant control panels. Each handset is automatically connected
to the interphone system when the handset is placed in its hanger. When a handset has been used in the
public address system, it can be switched back to the interphone system by depressing either the pilot's
mechanic's, or attendant's call button.
The call circuits provide for a signal at the station being called to indicate that communication is desired.
The pilot-to-mechanic call button, located on the aft overhead switch panel, activates a horn in the
nosewheel well. The pilot-to-attendant call button on the forward overhead switch panel activates a call
light and a chime that is audible through the passenger address system. A mechanic-to-pilot call button,
located at the external power control panel, activates the pilot call bell. An attendant-to-pilot call button
is located at each attendant station and activates the pilot call bell. An attendant-to-attendant call button
is located at each attendant station and activates a call light and a chime that is audible through the
passenger address system.
A maintenance interphone switch, located on the overhead switch panel, isolates the pilot, cabin
attendant, radio rack, and external power control panel interphone outlets from the rest of the outlets when
in the OFF position. When in the ON position, all outlets are interconnected.
2. Operation
A. Audio picked up by the microphone in the handset is converted to electrical energy and fed as input to the
interphone amplifier. After amplification, the output from the amplifier is routed to the earphone portion of
the receiving station handset. The earphone portion converts the electrical energy to audible sound.
3. To Ooerate Svstem
C. Depress desired call button.
D. Place controls to position indicated.
NOTE: The following steps describe operation from the flight compartment. To operate from cabin attendant
stations, use comparable controls.
Control Position
(1) Flight compartment handset Handset removed.

hanger switch
(2) Handset press-to-talk button Depressed.

Effectivity
CODE 2 23-40-00 Page 1
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
SERVlCE INTERPHONE JACKS
FWD ACCESSORY COMPT
PEDESTAL
HANDSET MAINTENANCE
INTERPHONE
SWITCH
FWD LOWER CARGO COMPT
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTROL PANEL RIGHT WING FUELING PANEL
RIGHT MAlN GEAR WELL
LEFT MAIN GEAR WELL
AFT LOWER CARGO COMPT
AMPLIFIER
FWD CABIN AFT ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT

ATTENDANT
HANDSET
LEFT AFT FUSELAGE

(LEFT ENGINE)
RIGHT AFT FUSELAGE

(RIGHT ENGINU
AFT CABIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

ATTENDANT
HANDSET
VERTICAL STABlLlZER
lnterphone - Pictorial Diagram
Figure1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 2 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
&IC
ADDRESS
MlCU
M m Y T RLUPTACLL-
TYCK*L ALL YUb
T L U I K E STATDIIS
( I C E i W C IJ
MILS:
lnterphone - Simplified Schematic

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 3
CODE P 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
PILOT
CALL
BELL
I MECH TO
I PILOT
I CS%H
r---
I
I
-------J
NOSE WHEEL WELL I ATTENDAN1 ATTENDAN1
I TO PILOT TO PILOT
CALL CALL
IWITCH SWITCH
I PZa dLn
ATTENDANT ATTENDANT
MASTER CALL
LIGHT (FWD) LIGHT (AFT)
lnterphone Call Circuits - Simplified Schematic

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 2
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
The interphone system provides for intercommunication between the areas where servicing and
system are interconnected through a public address relay and interlock panel so that the cabin attendant
and flight compartment handsets may be used with both systems.
amplifier. A small hole is provided on top of the amplifier to permit screwdriver adjustment of audio output
level. The interphone system shares use of the public address relay and interlock panel with the public
address system.
The pilots' handset is located on the aft lower portion of the pedestal. The cabin attendant handsets are
located on the forward and aft cabin attendant panels. Circuits in the public address relay and interlock
panel cause each handset to be automatically connected to the interphone system when the handset is
placed in its hanger. When a handset has been used in the public address system, it can be switched back
to the interphone system by depressing either the pilot's, mechanics, or attendant's call button. The public
address relay and interlock panel also serves to suppress transients when interphone system is activated.
The call buttons provide a signal at the station being called to indicate that communication is desired. The
pilot-temechanic call button, located on the aft overhead switch panel, activates a horn in the nosewheel
well. The pilot-to-attendant call button on the forward overhead switch panel activates a call light and a
chime that is audible through the passenger address system. A mechanic-to-pilot call button, located at
the external power control panel, activates the pilot call bell. An attendant-to-pilot call button is located
at each attendant station and activates the pilot call bell. An attendant-to-attendant call button is located
at each attendant station and activates a call light and a chime that is audible through the public address
system.
Any maintenance station is connected to the interphone system when a handset is plugged into interphone
jack at the station, and the maintenance interphone switch placed on. The maintenance interphone switch,
located on the overhead switch panel, isolates the pilot, cabin attendant, radio rack, and external power
control panel interphone outlets from the rest of the outlets when in the OFF position. When in the ON
position, all outlets are interconnected.
2. Operation
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 4 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

Control Position

hanger switch
(2) Handset press-t-talk button Depressed.
Effectivity
CODE 4 23-40-00 Page 2
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
SERVlCE INTERPHONE JACKS
I FWD ACCESSORY COMPT
PEDESTAL
HANDSET MAINTENANCE
INTERPHONE
SWlTCH
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTROLPANEL
I RlGHT WING FUELING PANEL
I RIGHT MAIN GEAR WELL
AFT RIGHT
EQUIP PANEL
(E/E COMPARTMENT)
I LEFT MAIN GEAR WELL
( AFT LOWER CARGO COMPT
AMPLIFIER
FWD CABIN I AFT ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT

ATTENDANT
HANDSET
' 1 LEFT AFT FUSELAGE

CLEFT ENGlNEl
CIRCUIT BREAKER
I RIGHT AFT FUSELAGE
LRlGHT ENGINE)
AFT CABIN
ATTENDANT
HANDSET
VERTICAL STABILIZER
Figure1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 4 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
HANDSET
RECEPTACLE
AFT RICH1 EQUIP '
-
I HANGER
NTCH
JI
CRADLED
PEDESTAL
HANDSET
-
INTERPHONE AMPLIFIER
TRANSISTORIZED
AMPLIFIER
R40-26
UNCRADLED
&
HANDSET
SWTCH
' OUTPUT LEVEL
SCREW D R I E R
ADJUSTLENT
CRADLED (NOTE 11
OFF
RECEPTACL- -
RE -7
I WNGER
b
. WITCH RE = R E U Y U
CRADLED ( W T E 1) HANDSET RECEPTACLE-
AFT CABIN PUBLIC ADDRESS R E U Y Ah TYPICAL A L L WIN-
ATTENDANT INTERLOCK PANEL (NOTE 2 T E M l Y t E STATIONS
HANDSET (SEE F I G W E 1)
NOTES:
1. CONTACTS OF HANDSET HANGER SWlTCI4ES
S t I w N IN HANDSET-CRADLED POSITION.
Interphone - Simplified Schematic

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 4 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
/ ::::
PILOT
I
ELECTRONIC CHIME
(MCOMPARTMENT
RADIO RACK)
:
I
.-I
I-
I
- -'
,NOSE
- -- - --J
WHEEL WELL
I
I ATTENMN ATTENMN
I TO PILOT TO PILOT
CALL
CALL
1 SWITCH SWITCH
I PLn PLn
I L
- -
FORWARD
CABIN
ATTENDANT
STATION
I-'
ATTENDANT
MASTERCALL
LIGHT (AFT)

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 5
CODE 4 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
The interphone system provides for intercommunication between the areas where servicing and
system are interconnectedthrough a public address relay and interlock panel so that the cabin attendant
and flight compartment handsets may be used with both systems.
amplifier. A small hole is provided on top of the amplifier to permit screwdriver adjustment of audio output
level. The interphone system shares use of the public address relay and interlock panel with the public
address system.
The pilots' handset is located on the aft lower portion of the pedestal. The cabin attendant handsets are
to the interphone system by depressing either the pilot's, mechanics, or attendant's call button. The public
pilot-to-mechanic call button, located on the aft overhead switch panel, activates a horn in the nosewheel
system.
Any maintenance station is connected to the interphone system when a handset is plugged into interphone
control panel interphone outlets from the rest of the outlets when in the OFF position. When in the ON
position, all outlets are interconnected.
Effectivity
CODE 5 I 23-40-00 Page 1
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE RADIO EQUIPMENT WHEN RADIO RACK COOLING FAN WARNING LIGHT
IS ON. OPERATION OF RADIO EQUIPMENT WHEN RADIO RACK BLOWER IS INOPERATIVE
SHORTENS LIFE OF EQUIPMENT.

Control Position
pp - - -- -

hanger switch
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 5 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
SERVICE INTERPHONE JACKS
1 FWD ACCESSORY COMPT
PEDESTAL
HANDSET MAINTENANCE
INTERPHONE
SWITCH
EXTERNAL POWER T
CONTROL PANEL
I RIGHT WING FUELING PANEL
AFT RIGHT
EQUIP PANEL
(E/E COMPARTMENT)
I LEFT MAIN GEAR WELL
( AFT LOWER CARGO COMPT
AMPLIFIER
FWD CABIN
ATTENDANT
I AFT ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT
HANDSET
LEFT AFT FUSELAGE

(LEFT ENGINE)
RIGHT AFT FUSELAGE

(RIGHT ENGINE)
AFT CABIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

ATTENDANT
HANDSET
VERTICAL STABILIZER
Figure1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 5 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTI [WEST
DC9 MAINTEN rNCE MANUAL
-2
IA
MANOSET
RECEPTACLE -
3 AFT RIGHT EQUIP
PANEL ( L I E
COMPARTMENn
A
-6
PEDESTAL
rmmtw
f
HANDSET
R -5 HANOSET RECEPTACLE
RE-6 EXTERIUL POWER
CONTROL PANEL
PUBLIC.
LOORESS
R4D-26
3A I
c&s
HANOSET 1
HIffiER
:-5
MAINTENANCE
INTERPHONE
ON
O 4 OFF
SWITCH
HANDSET
TYPICAL ALL MAIN-
.- CRADLED
* w o r r 1) RE-REUY
TENANCE STATIONS
(SEE FIGURE 11
AFT W I L C ADDRESS RELAY AND
ATTENDANT INTERLOCX PANEL (NOTE 2)
HANOSET
IIPIU;
1. CONTACTSOFHANDSETHANGERW~TCHES
SHOWN IN MNDSET CRADLED POSITION.
3 . c D E N O T L S DIRECTION OF SIGNAL FLOW.

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 5 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
1
1 ELECTRONIC c m M E
(WE COMPARTMENT
RADIO RACK)
4'
I CALL
I
I
t
I t
L ----. -
FORWARD
OVERHEAD
SWITCH
PANEL
r M Z H 2 -
I PILOT
CALL
I swmn
I &
I- - -'
-----
I
I
L---- --J
NOSE WHEEL WELL I ATTENDAN ATTENDAN1
I TO PILOT TO PILOT
CALL CALL
1 WITCH SWITCH
I PIP dTb
- I
I
L
L,----
FORWARD AFT CABIN
ATTENDANT
STATION
ATTENDANT ATTENDANT
MASTERCALL MASTER CALL
LIGHT (FWD) LIGHT (AFT)

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 5
CODE 5 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
The interphone system is used for intercommunication between areas that require frequent servicing and
between the flight compartment and the forward and aft cabin attendant panels.
The interphone system is composed of an amplifier, a handset at each attendant's station, and outlet jacks
at each service area.
The interphone system for the captain, first officer, and observer is controlled by their respective audio
control panels. With the audio control panel microphone selector switch placed in the normal interphone
position, the respective handset and hand microphone are connected directly into the interphone system.
pilot-to-mechanic call button activates a horn in the nosewheel well. The pilot-to-attendant call button,
located on the forward overhead switch panel, activates a call light and a chime. A mechanic-twpilot call
button, located at the external power control panel, activates the pilot call bell. An attendant-to-attendant
call button is located at each attendant station and activates a call light and a chime that is audible through
the passenger address system.
A maintenance interphone switch, located on the overhead switch panel, isolates the pilot, cabin
attendant, radio rack, and external power control panel interphone outlets from the rest of the outlets when
in the OFF position. When in the ON position, all outlets are interconnected.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPEN EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTICAL DOOR TO GAIN ACCESS TO INTERPHONE
JACK. TO PREVENT RECEPTACLE DOOR LATCHING PROBLEMS, AN INTERPHONE JACK IS
PROVIDED EXTERNAL OF DOOR.
2. Operation
A. Power is available for the interphone system from the 28 volt dc emergency bus through the flight
interphone circuit breakers.
B. The voice transmissions from the various stations are applied to the input of the interphone amplifier. In
the amplifier,the signals are applied to the base of an emitter follower through a step-down transformer.
The output of the emitter follower is applied to a driver stage. the output of the driver is applied through
an interstage transformer to a push-pull amplifier circuit. The push-pull amplifier generates up to 0.8 watts
of power through an output transformer to the various headsets and handsets. The headsets and
handsets have an internal impedance of 50 ohms.
NOTE: The interphone outlets at the various service areas do not have stowage facilities for headsets and
microphones. Headsets and microphones at these service areas must be supplied by the maintenance
personnel.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 10 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
NOTE: Controls should not generate noise and should have smooth operation. Sidetone, and other transmission
to other stations, should be clear and at a desirable listening level.
A. Attendant Stations
(1) Place radio rack cooling fan switch in fan position.
(2) Remove handset from hanger.
(3) Press desired call button.
(4) Press and hold push-to-talk button on handset while speaking into handset microphone.
B. Flight Compartment
(1) Place microphone selector switch on audio control panel to normal interphone position.
(2) Place interphone-mix switch to up position.
(3) Press desired call button.

NOTE: To communicate between flight compartment and service areas, except ground power receptacle service
area, maintenance interphone switch must be closed.
C. Emergency lnterphone
(1) Using oxygen mask microphone, place microphone selector switch on audio control panel to
emergency interphone position.
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 10 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
NOTE: A INTERPHONE JACK IS PROVIDED EXTERNAL
OF THE EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTICAL DOOR
TO PREVENT UNNECESSARY OPENING OF DOOR.
I W D ACCESSORY COMPT
PEDESTAL HANDSET
MAINTENANCE
EXTERNAL JACK INTERPHONE
3
SWITCH
OFF
SEE NOTE:
4F A
EXTERNAL POWER
ON
T
CONTROL PANEL
AFT RIGHT
I RlGHT MAIN GEAR WELL
EQUIP PANEL
E / E COMPARTMENT)
I L E F T MAIN GEAR WELL
I AFT LOWER CARGO COMPT
AMPLIFIER
FWD CABIN
ATTENDANT
HANDSET I AFT ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT
I L E F T AFT FUSELAGE
[LEFT ENGINE)
CIRCUIT BREAKER
(RIGHT ENGINE1
AFT CABIN
ATTENDANT
HANDSET
VERTICAL STABILIZER

Figure1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 10 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
A. The cabin service interphone system provides for intercommunication between the areas where servicing
and maintenance operations are most frequently performed. The interphone system and the public
address system are interconnected through a public address relay and interlock panel so that the cabin
attendant and flight compartment handsets may be used with both systems.
6. The interphone system consists of handsets, call buttons, interphone outlets, and transistorized amplifier.
A small hole is provided on top of the amplifier to permit screwdriver adjustment of audio output level. The
interphone system shares use of the public address relay and interlock panel with the public address
system.
NOTE. The following information supplements text in paragraph 1.C.

Dalfort EA 9-23-1 0 removes existing handsets from cockpit aft pedestal, forward attendants panel, and
aft attendants panel and replace them with NWA standard PJN 63274-008 handsets on aircraft 9880-9884.
E02340-01008 modifies PIA handset hanger assemblies in the cockpit and both attendant stations and
replaces the solder switches with screw terminal switches on aircraft 9880-9884.
Dalfort EA 9-23-25 removes existing handsets from cockpit aft pedestal, forward attendants panel, and
aft attendants panel and replace them with NWA standard PIN 63274-008 handsets on aircraft 9885.
EA 9-23-25 also modifies PIA handset hanger assemblies in the cockpit and both attendant stations and
replaces the solder switches with screw terminal switches on aircraft 9885.
C. The pilots handset is located on the aft lower portion of the pedestal. The cabin attendant handsets are
to the interphone system by depressing either the pilot's mechanics, or attendant's call button. The public
at each attendant station and activates the pilot call bell. A push-to-reset annunciator light on the
overhead switch panel provides visual indication in addition to the pilot call bell. An attendant-to-attendant
call button is located at each attendant station and activates a call light and a chime that is audible through
the public address system.
E. Any maintenance station is connected to the interphone system when a handset is plugged into interphone
control panel interphone outlets from the outlets when in the OFF position. When in the ON position, all
outlets are interconnected.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 13
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
3. To O~erateSvstem
6. Place radio rack cooling fan switch in fan position.


Control Position

hanger switch
Effectivity -
Page 2
CODE 13
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
I FWD ACCESSORY COMPT
PEDESTAL
HANDSET MAINTENANCE
INTERPHONE
SWITCH I ,..
EXTERNAL POWER
CONTROL PANEL
AFT RIGHT
EQUIP PANEL
(E/E COMPARTMENT)
1 LEFT MAIN GEAR WELL
I AFT LOWER CARGO COMPT
AMPLIFIER
FWD CABIN
ATTENDANT
I AFT ACCESSORY COMPARTMENT
HANDSET
LEFT AFT FUSELAGE

(LEFT ENGINE)
CIRCUIT BREAKER
(RIGHT ENGINE)
AFT CABIN
ATTENDANT
HANDSET
VERTICAL STABILIZER
Figure1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 13 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
HANDSET ' Al
PEDESTAL
HANDSET
wei~c
ADDRESS
OFF
MAINTENANCE
INTERPHONE
SWITCH
TYPICAL ALL MAIN-

TENANCE STATIONS
(SEE FIGURE 11
w
1. CONTACTS OF HANDSET HANGER SWITCHES
SHOWN IN MNDSET CRADLfD POSITION.
3. f ENOTES DIRECTION OF SIGNAL FLOW.

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 13 2340-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
't
----
FORWARD
OVERHEAD
MTCH
PANEL
-----
L,-----J
NOSE WHEEL WELL ATTENOANT
TO PILOT
CALL
swmn
dJl
I------
FORWARD
---
J, , , -.
L ,---
AFT CABIN
CABIN ATTENDANT
ATTENDANT STATlON
STATION
ATTENDANT
CALL u w
HOLDING
RELAY
E
LIGHT
~ (FWD)
X L FI
L
--
,;:r
MASTER CALL

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 5
CODE 13 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
General
A. The cabin service interphone system provides for intercommunication between the areas where servicing
and maintenance operations are most frequently performed. The interphone system and the public
address system are interconnected through a public address relay and interlock panel so that the cabin
attendant and flight compartment handsets may be used with both systems.
B. The interphone system consists of handsets, call buttons, interphone outlets, and transistorized amplifier.
A small hole is provided on top of the amplifier to permit screwdriver adjustment of audio output level. The
interphone system shares use of the public address relay and interlock panel with the public address
system.
C. The pilots handset is located on the aft lower portion of the pedestal. The cabin attendant handsets are
to the interphone system by depressing either the pilot's mechanics, or attendant's call button. The public
D. The call buttons provide a signal at the station being called to indicate that communication is desired. The
system.
E. Any maintenance station is connected to the interphone system when a handset is plugged into interphone
control panel interphone outlets from the outlets when in the OFF position. When in the ON position, all
outlets are interconnected.
Operation
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 96 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST


Control Position

hanger switch
(2) Handset press-t-talk button Depressed.
E. For cabin service interphone (CSV) operation through audio control panels, see Maintenance Manual
23-50-0
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 96
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
-1 I
rmum0pUEL
CSV (CABIN SERVICE)
VERTICAL STABILIZER

Figure1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 96
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
ELECTRONC CHIME
RADIO RACK1
c--
-I.-- - I - J
NOSE WHEEL WELL
I
I
IATTENDAE
ITO PILOT
CALL
1 SWITCH
I ph
ATTENDANT
-mu
LIGHT (FWD)
I@ I AlTENDANT
E
LIGHT (AFT1
1 61

Figure 3
Effectivity Page 5
CODE 96 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
INTERPHONE - TROUBLE SHOOTING

1. Trouble Shootinq
A. NO INTERPHONE COMMUNICATION AT ANY STATION
(1) Faulty interphone Interchange interphone amplifier with one Replace

amplifier known to be serviceable. interphone amplifier.
B. NO INTERPHONE COMMUNICATION AT ONE STATION
(1) Faulty handset Check handset using station Replace handset

known to be operative. if defective.
(2) Faulty public address lnterchange panel with ane known to Replace panel.
relay and interlock panel be serviceable. If interphone operation
is restored, see correction. If operation is
not restored, see item 3.
(3) Faulty wiring Check interconnectingwiring using Repair wiring

between ohmmeter or continuity checker. as necessary.
station and amplifier
(4) Foreign material in Visually check interphone outlet. Remove

interphone outlet. foreign material.
NOTE: When repairing or replacing audio signal wiring, ground shielding at same ground studs used by orignal wiring.
Use same routing as original when replacing wiring run.

CODE 2
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
INTERPHONE -TROUBLE SHOOTING

1. Trouble Shootinq

-- -
-

(1) Faulty handset, headset, Check handset, headsetor microphone Replace handset,
or micorphone using station known to be operative. headset, or
microphone if
defective.
(2) Faulty wiring Check interconnecting wiring using Repair wiring



CODE 3 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
INTERPHONE - TROUBLE SHOOTING

1. Trouble Shooting

(1) Faulty handset Check handset using station Replace handset

known to be operative. if defective.
(2) Faulty public address lnterchange panel with ane known to Replace panel.
relay and interlock panel be serviceable. If interphone operation
is restored, see correction. If operation is
not restored, see item 3.
(3) Faulty wiring Check interconnecting wiring using Repair wiring



CODE 96 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
INTERPHONE - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
A. It is not necessary to perform an entire Interphone System test when certain components are replaced.
For example, if a receptacle is replaced, establish satisfactory communication between any handset and
replacement receptacle only. If the amplifier is replaced, perform complete test.
2. Adiustmentrrest lnter~honeSvstem
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE INTERPHONE SYSTEM WHEN RADIO RACK COOLING FAN IS
INOPERATIVE. SUCH OPERATION SHORTENS LIFE OF EQUIPMENT.
A. Test System
(1) With maintenance interphone switch in on position, use handset on pedestal and communicate with
all interphone stations (see Figure 201).
(2) communication should be clear and distinct between all stations and should have enough volume to
be audible with both engines running.
(3) If morelless volume is desired when talking from any external station, adjust R40-90, located on aft
right equipment panel in electricallelectroniccompartment, to desired level.
NOTE: R40-90 should be adjusted while talking from an external station after the passenger address system and
service interphone amplifier have been adjusted.
(4) Place maintenance interphone switch in off position.
(5) Communication should exist between pedestal, forward attendant station, aft attendant station,
electricallelectroniccompartment, and external power control panel only.

CODE 5 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
\
E ~ T E R N A LPOWER
CONTROL PANEL
FORWARD ACCESSORY
COMPARTMENT
lnterphone Locations
Figure 201

CODE 5 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
A. It is not necessary to perform an entire lnterphone System test when certain components are replaced.
For example, if a receptacle is replaced, establish satisfactory communication between any handset and
replacement receptacle only. If the amplifier is replaced, perform complete test.
2. AdjustmenVTest lnterphone Svstem

A. Test System
Verify operation of all receiver audio and microphone circuits (may be checked when testing other
systems).
Rotate volume control. Audio level variation should be smooth and free of control noise throughout
entire range.
Place microphone selector switch in normal interphone position. Verify reception and sidetone while
operating microphone.
Place microphone selector switch in any VHF position. Operate the interphone mix switch and verify
that interphone may be mixed with radio reception only when switch is in ON position.
Place microphone selector switch in emergency interphone position and check that oxygen mask
microphone is keyed and connected to interphone system.
Perform steps ( I ) through (5) at each audio panel.
Check headset for normal output and quality of sound.
Activate flight compartment speakers. Adjust volume control for normal output. Sound should be free
of acoustical feedback.
Verify operation of each oxygen mask microphone and associated push-to-talk switch.
(10) At each cabin attendant control panel, verify operation of handset for normal transmission and
reception.
(11) Actuate interphone switch and check operation of service interphone system.
CAUTION: DO NOT OPEN EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE DOOR TO GAIN ACCESS TO INTERPHONE
JACK. TO PREVENT RECEPTACLE DOOR LATCHING PROBLEMS, AN INTERPHONE JACK IS
PROVIDED EXTERNAL OF DOOR.

CODE 8 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
PEDESTAL HANDSET
FWO ACCESSORY COUPT
I HANDSET
FWD L M R CARW COUPT

HANDSET
RIGHT WING FUELING PANEL

HANDSET
MAINTENANCE INTERPHONE swcn
,,
RIGHT UAlN
GEAR WELL
LEFT MAIN
GEAR WELL
HAND MCROPHONE
HAND MICROPHONE
AFT RICH1 E W l P PANEL
(E/E COMPARTMENT) AFT L O W R CARGO COMPT
HANDSET
AFT ACCESSORY COMPT

AUPURER
HINOSET
LEFT AFT
FUSELACE
HANDSET (LEFT ENGINE)
FWD CABIN ATTENDANT HANDSET

HAND MlCROPHONE
HEADSET
RIGHT AFT
NKUCE
(RIGHT ENGINE)
HAND MICROPHONE
'
-0 HANDSET
VERTMXL STIDIUZER
Figure 201

CODE 8 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
A. It is not necessary to perform an entire Cabin Service lnterphone System test when certain components
are replaced. For example, if a receptacle is replaced, establish satisfactory communication between any
handset and replacement receptacle only. If the amplifier is replaced, perform complete test.
2. Adiustmentrrest lnterphone Svstem

A. Test System
Verify operation of all receiver audio and microphone circuits (may be checked when testing other
systems).
Rotate volume control. Audio level variation should be smooth and free of control noise throughout
entire range.
Place microphone selector switch in normal interphone position. Verify reception and sidetone while
operating microphone.
Place microphone selector switch in any VHF position. Operate the interphone mix switch and verify
that interphone may be mixed with radio reception only when switch is in ON position.
Perform steps (1) through (4) at each audio panel.
Check headset for normal output and quality of sound.
Activate flight compartment speakers. Adjust volume control for normal output. Sound should be free
of acoustical feedback.
Verify operation of each oxygen mask microphone and associated push-to-talk switch.
At each cabin attendant control panel, verify operation of handset for normal transmission and
reception.
(10) Actuate maintenance interphone switch and check operation of service interphone system.

CODE 96
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
SERVICE NTERPHONEJACKS
PEDESTAL HANDSET
(TYPICAL)
HANDSET
CAW ANDFKI
WMD PANEL
+
EXTERNAL
PHC*(E JACK HANDSET
HEADSET
"_I
GEAR WEU
EXTEANALW m R
COE(TROC PANEL HANLSET
W MICROPHONE GEAR WELL
AFT RIGKT EQUIP PANEL

(MWPARTMENTI &- -0 HANDSET
AFT LWtERCAFiGCJCCUPT
HANDSET
LEFT AFT
FUSELAQE
(LEFT ENQINE)
FWD CMPl ATTENDAM HANDSET

MNO UCrnPHONE
RlGHl AFT
FUSELAGE
(RIGHT ENGINE)
CIRCUIT BREAKER
AFT CABW ATTENDANT HANDSET
Figure 201

CODE 96 23-40-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
INTERPHONE AMPLIFIER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

E0234e01014
1. General
A. If a replacement amplifier is to be installed, the amplifier cover must be removed before installation. The
system adjustmentltest outlined in 23-40-00 must be performed following installation.
2. Removal/lnstallation Interphone Amplifier
A. Remove Amplifier
(1) Open service interphone circuit breaker located on upper main circuit breaker panel.
(2) Disconnect amplifier electrical connector.
(3) Remove amplifier cover.
(4) Remove amplifier.
B. lnstall Amplifier
(1) Check that service interphone circuit breaker, located on upper main circuit breaker panel, is open.
(2) Install amplifier on tray.
(3) Install amplifier cover.
(4) Connect amplifier electrical connector.
(5) Close service interphone circuit breaker.
A. Remove the receiver cap from the forward attendant handset and connect a digital voltmeter (DVM) across
the receiver terminals to measure the sidetone level.
B. Remove either the cockpit pedestal handset or the aft attendant handset and substitute a self-contained
test oscillator with an input of 1000 HZ/ 100MV.
C. With the system on interphone mode, adjust the service interphone amplifier level pot (located right radio
rack inboard) for a sidetone level of 0.7 volts AC maximum across the handset receiver.
NOTE: This is a 20 turn potentiometer that requires CCW rotation to reduce the sidetone level.
D. Disconnect test equipment and test interphone system between attendant stations and cockpit cabin.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-40-01 Page 201
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
INTERPHONE AMPLIFIER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The interphone amplifier is contained in the same unit as the audio integrating amplifier. The unit is
mounted on the radio rack in the electricaVelectronics compartment. If a replacement unit is to be installed,
the interphone Adjustmentrrest must be performed following installation.
NOTE: This configuration aircraft uses one amplifier for the Flight and Cabin Service lnterphone that is tied
together electrically. It is normal operation for the flight and cabin crew to hear each other, and not "bleed
through".
2. Removal/lnstallation lnter~honeAmplifier
A. Remove Amplifier
(1) Open flight interphone circuit breakers located on emergency DC Bus section of the overhead circuit
breaker panel.
(2) Loosen and disengage knurled nut from mounting bracket on lower front panel of unit.
(3) Pull unit inboard and out of mount.
(1) Make certain that flight interphone circuit breakers, located on emergency DC Bus section of
overhead circuit breaker panel, are open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) lnstall unit on mount.
(3) Engage and tighten knurled nut on mounting bracket on lower front panel of unit.
(4) Close flight interphone circuit breakers.
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-40-01 Page 201
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
PILOT'S CALL BELL - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The pilot's call bell is located in the forward section of the left console. Access to the call bell is gained
through the adjacent access.
2. Removal/lnstallation Pilot's Call Bell
A. Remove Call Bell
(1) Open call system circuit breaker located on left dc bus Section of lower main circuit breaker panel.
WARNING: TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKER (SEE CHAPTER 20).
(2) Remove access panel.
(3) Remove attaching screws, washers1 and nuts.
(4) Remove call bell.
(5) Disconnect electrical connections.
B. Install Call Bell
(1) Make certain call system circuit breaker is open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Connect electrical connections.
(3) Position call bell and install attaching screws, washers, and nuts.
(4) lnstall access panel.
(5) Close circuit breaker.
(6) Perform Adjustmentrrest to verify proper operation of call bell.
3. p
A. Test Call Bell
(1) Engage pilot's call button at attendant's panel.
(2) Pilot's call bell should sound.

NOTE: Airplanes with attendant calling light on overhead switch panel, the light should come on.
(3) In nosewheel well engage pilot's call button.
(4) Pilot's call bell should sound.

CODE 1 23-40-02 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
Pilot's Call Bell

Figure 201

CODE 1 23-40-02 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
MECHANIC CALL HORN - REMOVAUINSTALLATION

1. General
A. The mechanic call horn is located in the nosewheel well on the nosewheel well transformer panel.
2. Removal/lnstallation Mechanic Call Horn
A. Remove Horn
(1) Open call system circuit breaker located on lower main circuit breaker panel.
WARNING: TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKER. (SEE CHAPTER 20.)
(2) Remove transformer panel cover.
(3) Remove attaching screws and washers.
(4) Remove horn.
6. Install Horn
(1) Make certain call system circuit breaker is open, tagged, and safetied.
(3) Install horn.

CAUTION: ROTATE HORN TO PLACE DRAIN HOLE ON LOW SIDE TO PREVENT ACCUMULATION OF
WATER IN HORN HOUSING.
(4) Install attaching screws and washers.
(5) Install transformer panel cover.
(6) Close circuit breakers.
(7) Actuate mechanic call button on overhead switch panel.
(8) Call horn should sound.

CODE 1 23-40-03 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
Mechanic Call Horn

Figure 401

CODE 1 23-40-03 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
MECHANIC CALL HORN - ADJUSTMENTITEST
1. General
A. The mechanic call horn can be adjusted when removed from the airplane. The horn housing must be
removed prior to preinstallation check or adjustment of the contact and armature. Housing removal is
accomplished by removing the housing attaching screws.
CAUTION: DO NOT LOOSEN SCREWS ON FRONT COVER.
NOTE: Equivalent substitutes may be used instead of the following:
A VTVM-VOM 63 1 Triplett Measure current
3. Preinstallation Check
A. Cleaning Pole Face and Armature
(1) Remove bracket attaching screws.
(2) Remove brackets and plates.
(3) Fold coil away from pole and armature.
(4) Remove any foreign matter from pole and armature.
(5) Replace coil.
(6) Install plates and brackets.
(7) Install bracket attaching screws.
(8) Tighten all visible screws.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-40-03 Page 501
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
ADJUSTING N U T
ADJUSTMENT POINTS
4
AFT
ARMATURE \
CAUTION: DO NOT LOOSEN S C R E W S O N F R O N T C O V E R .
Mechanic Call Horn

Figure 501

CODE 1 23-40-03 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
4. Adjustmentnest Mechanic Call Horn
A. Adjust Contact and Armature
(1) Loosen palnut.
(2) Turn set screw 3 full turns in counterclockwise direction.
(3) Tighten palnut.
(4) Loosen adjusting nut.
(5) Turn setscrew 4 full turns in clockwise direction.
(6) Open call system circuit breaker located on lower main circuit breaker panel.
(9) Turn adjusting screw clockwise until loudest clear tone is heard.
(10) Open call system circuit breaker.
(11) Tighten adjusting nut making sure adjusting screw does not move.
(12) Loosen palnut.
(13) Turn setscrew clockwise to output frequency of 600 to 700 cps.
(14) Tighten palnut.
NOTE: Steps (6) through (11) and (12) through (14) are interdependent and may have to be performed more than
once. Horn output should not be less than 100 db at a distance of 3 feet.
(16) Install housing and housing attaching screws.
(18) Install call horn.
(20) Perform operational test.
B. Operational Test
(1) Engage mechanic call button on overhead switch panel.
(2) Call horn should sound.
(3) Verify current reading does not exceed 650 milliamperes.

CODE 1 23-40-03 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
SERVICE INTERPHONE/PA HANDSET - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
A. This maintenance practice provides removal/installation for the service interphone/PA handset, located
on the flight compartment pedestal.
2. Removal/lnstallation
A. Remove Handset
NOTE: Rapid handset installation is dependent upon the correct removal procedure.
(1 ) Position First Officer's seat all the way aft.
(2) Disengage Dzus fasteners and remove access door at aft cockpit floor step under First Officer's seat.
(3) Remove safety wire and clamp from handset connector.
(4) Unlatch and disengage handset connector.
(5) Tie string to connector and pull handset cord out of its storage tube, leaving pull-string through
storage tube.
(6) Remove string from connector.
B. Install Handset
(1) Tie pull string to new connector and pull connector through storage tube.
(2) Remove string, connect, and latch connector.
(3) Install clamp on connector and safety to prevent connector disengagement.
(4) Close access door and return seat to normal position.

CODE 1
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
PEDESTAL
2 NOTE: CONNECTPULL STRING

TO CONNECTOR BEFORE
REMOVING HANDSET CORD
FROM STOWAGE TUBE.
yHANOSET
HANDSET CONNECTOR SAFETY WIRE ACCES/S DOOR

\ /
Service InterphoneIPA Handset RII

Figure 201

CODE I 23-40-04 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO INTEGRATING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
The audio integrating system provides the necessary controls for connecting the flight crew headsets and
microphones with the communication transceivers. In addition the system provides interphone
communication between the flight crew members. The system has three selecting functions: audio,
microphone, and interphone.
The audio selection function provides controls for directing the audio output of the selected communication
transceiver or navigation receiver into the flight crew headsets and speakers.
The microphone selection function provides controls for connecting a microphone with the transceiver on
which it is desired to transmit.
The interphone selection function controls for monitoring transmitted and received signals at all flight crew
member stations and for audio communication between crew members.
All functions of the audio integrating system are controlled from the audio control panels. An audio control
panel is located at each flight crew member station and one is located in the electrical/electronic
compartment. Each panel contains the following controls and circuits: receiver audio selector toggle
switches, microphone selector switches, a normal-emergency switch, isolation amplifier and isolation
circuitry.
The audio reception toggle switches are used to select the audio output of the audio integrating amplifier
or of any transceiver or receiver. Each switch is placarded to correspond to the unit it controls. The
microphone selector switch is used to connect the microphones to the transceivers of the communication
system. The normal-emergency switch is used to connector the output of the desired transceiver directly
to the headsets of speakers, bypassing the isolation amplifier. When the switch is in the emergency
position, only one transceiver can be monitored at a time.
The isolation amplifier in the radio control panel is used to amplify the received audio signal to a level
usable by the speaker amplifier after the signal has passed through the isolation circuitry. The isolation
circuitry is used to prevent interference between crew stations. The circuits isolate the audio output of one
unit from the output of all other units.
The audio control panels are identical in construction and operation. Guide pins on the panel align the
electrical connectors for mating with receptacles on a spring-loaded plate. The control panel is mounted
and held in place by quick-release fasteners. Spring pressure from the spring-loaded plate maintains
electrical contact between the receptacles and the panel connectors. The spring-loaded plate allows the
panel to be easily removed when the quick-release fasteners are unlocked. Each panel is rectangular with
flat internally lighted lucite face.
Hand microphones and headsets are installed at each flight crew member station. The hand microphone
is designed for close-talking, noise-canceling applications in high noise level areas. The hand
microphone is packaged in a small molded, black, high-impact phenolic case. A press-to-talk button is
located on the upper portion of the case. The coiled extension cable with a black rubber jacket may be
extended to 6 feet. The headsets are used to monitor the radio receiver audio, crew communication, or
transmitter sidetone as selected on the individual audio control panel. Each headphone is a lightweight,
permanent magnet type with a typical impedance of 300 ohms, or 600 ohms per headset. A hand
microphone receptacle and a headset receptacle is located on the external power control panel.
The audio integrating amplifier is located in the electrical/electronic compartment and is identical to the
interphone amplifier.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 1 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
K. Two speaker assemblies are installed overhead in the flight compartment to monitor the audio output.
Each speaker contains an audio amplifier and a volume control. The audio amplifiers are muted to prevent
feedback. Keying the captain's microphone mutes the captain's speaker and keying the first officer's
microphone mutes the first officer's speaker. Neither speaker is muted when the observer's microphone
is keyed.
L. Oxygen masks with microphones are installed at each flight crew member station. Headsets with boom
microphones are installed at each pilot's station. A BOOM-MASK switch on each pilot's console connects
boom or mask microphone to the audio integrating system. A push-to-talk button is installed on the
captains control wheel and on the first officer's control wheel. The push-to-talk buttons are used to control
the boom and oxygen mask microphones when transmitting on the selected communication transceiver
or on the audio integrating system. Actuation of the observer microphone is accomplished by an integral
push-to-talk switch in the microphone jack cord.
M. Power for the captains audio integrating system is supplied by the 28-volt dc emergency buses. The
system can be operated when the airplane is powered by battery only .
N. Power for the first officer and observers audio integrating system is supplied by the 28-volt dc transfer bus.
The system can be operated when the airplane is powered by battery if the trans-bus is energized by the
battery.
2. Operation
A. The audio sound picked up by the microphone is converted to electrical energy and fed as input through
the audio control panel to the amplifier. After amplification, the output from the amplifier is routed back
through the audio control panel to the system headsets, or the flight compartment speakers, which convert
the electrical energy to audible sound.
C. Place controls to positions indicated.
Control Position
(1 ) Microphone selection switch lnterphone (int)
(2) lnterphone audio

reception toggle switch
(3) Volume control Turn clockwise to a

comfortable level.
(4) Microphone press-to-talk button Depressed
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 1 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
OXYGEN MASK
CAPTAIN'S
MICROPHONE
F I R S T OFFICER'S
GROUND
POWER
RECEPTACLE
JACK
OBSERVER'S AUDIO RADIO RACK AUDIO

CONTROLPANEL CONTROLPANEL
Audio Integrating - Pictorial Diagram

Figure 1
EffectivitY Page 3
CODE 1 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
RADIO RACK
HEADSET
RECEPTACLE
AUDIO COYTROL PANEL
I
T Y P K A L AT CAPTAIW,
FIRST OFFICER AN0
OBSERVER s r ~ t l o w s
AND AT RADIO W K
RECEPTION
TOGGLE
SWITCH
(SEENOTEI)
*;-
HANO UICROPHONE
8 PTT I
,,II
OXYGEN MASK RECEPTACLE
MICROPHONE
TYPICAL AT CAPTAIN AN0 FIRST OFFICER STATIONS

TRANSISTORIZED
AMPLIFIER
n
OUTPUTLEVEL
SCREWORNER
ADJUSTMENT
a <I 1
I
TRANSISTORIZED
AMPLIFIER -- I I
WTES:
1
AUOIO INTEGRATlNG (FLIGHT
INTERPWWI AYPURER
C
28 YM: EUE
1. SINGLE TOGGLE SWITCH S H W N I S REPRESENTATIVE

OF VHF-1, INT, AN0 VHF-2 RECEPTlON TOGGLE SWITCHES.
2. PTT = WSW-TO-TALK
3. VHF-1 TRANSCEIVER DONNECTIONS PIOWN. VHF-2
CONNECTIONS IDENTICAL EXCEPT AS SHOWN THUS: (I)
4 . OBSERVER STATION DOES WT UTILIZE MWTROL COLUMN
PTT SWITCH.
5. ---C (KNOTES DlRECTlON OF SIGNAL FLOW
Audio Integrating - Simplified Schematic

Figure 2
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-50-00 Page 4
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
A. The audio integrating system provides the necessary controls for connecting the flight crew headsets and
B. The audio selection function provides controls for directing the audio output of the selected communication
C. The microphone selection function provides controls for connecting a microphone with the transceiver on
D. The interphone selection function controls for monitoring transmitted and received signals at all flight crew
E. All functions of the audio integrating system are controlled from the audio control panels. An audio control
switches, microphone selector switches, a normal-emergency switch, a speaker switch, isolation
amplifier, and isolation circuitry.
F. The audio reception toggle switches are used to select the audio output of the audio integrating amplifier
position, only one transceiver can be monitored at a time. The speaker switch provides for turning the flight
compartment speakers on and off. When off, audio signals are fed to the headsets only.
G. The isolation amplifier in the radio control panel is used to amplify the received audio signal to a level
H. The audio control panels are identical in construction and operation. Guide pins on the panel align the
I. Hand microphones and headsets are installed at each flight crew member station. The hand microphone
is designed for close-talking, noisexanceling applications in high noise level areas. The hand
located on the upper portion of the case. A coiled microphone extension cable is provided which may be
microphone receptacle receptacle is located on the external power control panel.
J. The audio integrating amplifier is identical to the interphone amplifier. Both are contained within the same
case which is mounted on the radio rack in the electrical/electronic compartment.
Effectivity
CODE 2 23-50-00 Page 1
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
Two speaker assemblies are installed overhead in the flight compartment to monitor the audio output.
feedback. Keying the captain's microphone mutes the captain's speaker and keying the first officer's
microphone mutes the first officer's speaker. Neither speaker is muted when the observer's microphone
is keyed.
Oxygen masks with microphones are installed at each flight crew member station. Headsets with boom
microphones are installed at each pilot's station. A BOOM-MASK switch on each pilot's console connects
boom or mask microphone to the audio integrating system. A push-to-talk button is installed on the
captains control wheel and on the first officer's control wheel. The push-to-talk buttons are used to control
the boom and oxygen mask microphones when transmitting on the selected communication transceiver
or on the audio integrating system. Actuation of the observer microphone is accomplished by an integral
push-to-talk switch in the microphone jack cord.
Power for the captains audio integrating system is supplied by the 28-volt dc emergency buses. The
Power for the first officer and observers audio integrating system is supplied by the 28-volt dc transfer bus.
battery.
2. Operation
the audio control panel to the audio integrating amplifier or to a transceiver, depending upon the setting
of the microphone selector switch. After amplification, the audio output is routed back through the audio
control panel to the system headsets, or the flight compartment speakers, which convert the electrical
energy to audible sound.
Control Position
(1) Microphone selection switch lnterphone (int)


comfortable level.

Effectivity Page 2
CODE 2 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
GROUND
POWER
RECEPTACLE
JACK

CONTROLPANEL CONTROLPANEL

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 2
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
'I'
1
tarroc I
( w o*rlc* 1
COUlYl
(zr~ca,

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 4
CODE P 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
The audio integrating system provides a means of selecting and monitoring the outputs of the
communication transceivers and the navigation receivers, and directing microphone inputs to the
communication transceivers. The system also provides a means of communication between flight crew
members and includes provisions for monitoring the output of the public address system as desired. The
installation consists of an amplifier, audio control panels, headsets, microphones, two speakers, and
interconnecting wiring.
The audio integrating amplifier is a 100-milliwatt, fully transistorized audio amplifier. The amplifier is
contained in a metal case and is mounted in the forward right radio rack in the electricaI1electronic
compartment. A small screwdriver hole is provided in the top of the case for adjustment of the output level.
All electrical connections are made through a single connector on the back of the amplifier. The amplifier
is secured to the radio rack by screws.
The audio control panels are box-like, plug-in units that contain the circuitry and switching arrangement
necessary for controlling the audio integrating system. Front panel controls consists of microphone
selection switches, audio reception switches, an emergency switch, an ADF filter selection switch, and a
volume control.
Isolation circuitry within each audio control panel prevents interference with other audio control panels.
The circuits isolate the audio output of the control panel from the output of other control panels. An integral
isolation amplifier is used to amplify the audio signals to a usable level after passing through the isolation
circuitry. The emergency switch on the control panel is provided for bypassing the isolation amplifier and
the isolation circuitry. When this switch is in the emergency position, only one input (transceiver, receiver,
or interphone) can be monitored at a time.
An audio control panel is installed at each flight crew member's station and one is installed on the aft right
radio rack. The control panels are held in place by quick-release fasteners. Electrical connectors on the
back of the control panels plug into spring-loaded receptacles when the panels are installed. Guide pins
are provided to ensure proper alignment of the connector pins during installation. When the quick-release
fasteners are unlocked, the spring pressure of the receptacles partially ejects the panel from its mounting
for easy removal.
Headsets and hand microphones are installed at each flight crew member's station. An integral
microphone is contained in the oxygen mask installed at each station. Microphonelheadset jack panels
are provided adjacent to each station to accommodate the microphones and headsets. Provision is
included for the connection of boom microphones. A three-position push-to-talk switch is installed on
the outboard horn of each control wheel for use by the captain and the first officer in actuating the oxygen
mask microphones or the boom microphones (if installed) The switches have positions of radio, off, and
interphone, and are spring-loaded to the off (center) position. A hand microphone jack and a headset jack
are provided in the electrical1 electronic compartment.
Two speaker assemblies are installed overhead in the flight compartment for optional use in lieu of
headsets when desired. The speaker on the left side is connected to the audio output of the captain's audio
control panel, and the speaker on the right side is connected to the audio output of the first officer's audio
control panel. Each speaker assembly contains an audio amplifier and a volume control. The speakers
are muted to prevent feedback when a microphone is actuated.
Power for the audio integrating system is supplied by a 28-volt dc bus. The system can be operated when
the airplane is powered by battery only.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 6 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
2. Operation
During interphone operation, when a microphone push-to-talk switch is actuated, signals picked up by
the microphone are fed as input to the audio control panel and then directed by the microphone selector
switch to the audio integrating amplifier. After amplification, the signals are then fed as input to all audio
control panels and then, via the interphone audio reception switches, to the headsets.
During transmit operation, when a microphone push-to-talk switch is actuated, signals picked up by the
microphone are fed as input to the audio control panel and then directed by the microphone selector switch
to the selected transceiver. An additional circuit, simultaneously energized by the microphone
push-to-talk switch, actuates relays in the transceiver, causing it to shift to the transmit mode and transmit
the signal on the pre-selected frequency. A sample of the signal is fed back to the audio control panels
and then, via the transceiver audio reception switches, to the headsets as sidetone.
During receive operation, signals received by the communication transceivers, the navigation receivers,
the audio integrating amplifier, and the public address amplifier are fed as input to the audio control panels.
These various signals may be monitored, singly or in combination as desired, by actuating one or more
of the audio reception switches. When a reception switch is actuated, the signal at that switch is fed to
the headset connected to the control panel. Signals from the captain's and first officer's control panels
are also fed to the respective flight compartment speaker.
C. Place controls in positions indicated.
Control Position
(1) Microphone selection switch lnterphone

reception switch
(3) All other audio reception Down

switches
(4) Emergency switch Down
D. Depress microphone push-to-talk button, speak into microphone, and adjust volume control on audio
control panel to a comfortable level in the headset.
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 6 2360-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

CONTROL PANEL CONTROLPANEL

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 6 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
tTHWEST
TENANCE MANUAL
RADIO RACE HAND
MICROPHONE
RECEPTACLE
TYPICAL A T CAPTAIN,
FtRST OFFICER AN0
OBSERVER S T A ~ I O N S
HEADSET RECEPTACLE 1 1 1 AND AT RADIO RACK
RECEPTION
TOGGLE
SWITCH
(SEE NOTE 1)
I P I T SWITCH
( 2 PLACES)
I
HAND MICROPHONE
I
RECEPTACLE VHF
TRANSCEIVER
II<U
OXYGEN MASK RECEPTACLE
eD
MICROPHONE
- - -J
TYPICAL AT CAPTAIN AND FIRST OFFICER STATIONS
TRANSISTORIZED
I .- .
SPEAKER AMPLIFIER & & 4 & POWER
C,;m:toL
4
V
5 3 2- ,-..--
HANDSET
OUTPUT LEVEL RECEPTACLE
SCREWDRIVER
ADJUSTMENT
'TRAWSISTORIZED
AMPLIFIER
-
UUTtNG RELAY
SPEAKER-AMPLIFIER
I AUDIO INTEGRATlNC (FLIGHT
INTERPHQNE) AMPLIFIER
NOTES:
1. SINGLE TOGGLE SWITCH S H W N I S REPRESENTATIVE
OF W F - 1 , INT, AND VHF-2 RECEPTION TOGGLE SWITCHES.
2 . PTT = PUSH-TO-TALK
3. VHF-1 TRANSCEIVER W NNECTIONS SHOWN. VHF-2
CONNECTIONS IDENTICAL EXCEPT AS SHOWN THUS: 0
4 . OBSERVER STATION W E S NOT UTILIZE CONTROL COLUMN
PTT SWITCH.
5. ---C DENOTES DIRECTION OF SIGNAL FLOW

Figure 2
Effectivity
CODE 6 23-50-00 Page 4
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
The audio integrating system provides for selection and monitoring of the audio outputs of the
communication transreceivers and navigation receivers, and for selection and transmission on the
communication transceivers. In addition, the system provides for communication between the flight crew
member stations.
The audio selection function permits the operator to select and monitor the audio output of one or more
of the communication transceivers and navigation receivers.
The microphone selection enables the operator to select and control the desired communication
transceivers.
All functions of the audio integrating system are controlled from the audio control panels An audio control
panel is located at each flight crew member station, and one is located in the electrical/electronic
compartment. Each panel contains the following controls and circuits: receiver volume controls, an
isolation amplifier and isolation circuitry, and microphone selector switch(es). The panels are identical in
construction and operation. Guide pins on the panel align the electrical connector for mating with
receptacles mounted on a spring- loaded plate. The control panel is mounted and held in place by
quick-release fasteners. Spring pressure from the spring-loaded plate maintains electrical contact
between the receptacles and the panel connectors. The spring-loaded plate allows the panel to be easily
removed when the quick-release fasteners are unlocked. Each panel is rectangular with a flat internally
lighted lucite face.
The receiver volume controls are used to control the audio output of any transceiver or receiver and each
is placarded to correspond to the transceiver or receiver it control. The isolation circuitry is used to prevent
interference between crew stations. The circuits isolate the audio output of one receiver from the output
of all other receivers. The isolation amplifier in the audio control panel is used to amplify the receiver audio
signal to its original level after it has passed through the isolation circuitry. The isolation amplifier raises
the audio to a level usable by the speaker amplifier which, in turn, is connected to the speaker. The
microphone selector switch(es) are used to connect the microphones to the transceivers of the
communication system and to the audio integrating system.
is designed for close-talking, noise-canceling applications in high noise level areas. A press-to-talk
button is located on the upper portion of the case The headsets are used to monitor the radio receiver
audio, crew communication, or sidetone as selected on the individual audio control panel. Each
headphone is a lightweight, permanent magnet type with an impedance of 300 ohms, or 600 ohms per
headset. A hand microphone jack and a headset jack are located in the electrical/electronic compartment.
A jack is also located on the external power control panel.
The audio integrating and interphone systems use a common amplifier unit. Both are contained in the
same case and mounted on the radio rack in the electrical/electronic compartment.
feedback when any of the microphones are operated.
Effectivity
CODE 8 23-50-00 Page 1
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
OXYGEN MASK
MICROPHONE
JACK,
GROUND
POWER
RECEPTACLE
JACK
Audio - Pictorial Diagram

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 8 2340-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
I. Oxygen masks with microphones are installed at each flight crew member station. A push-to-talk button
is installed on the captain's control wheel and on the first officer's control wheel. The push-to-talk buttons
are used to control the oxygen mask microphones when transmitting on the selected communication
transceiver or on the audio integrating system. Actuation for the observer microphone is accomplished
by an integral push-to-talk switch in the electrical extension cable.
J. Power is available for the audio integrating system from the 28-volt dc emergency buses. The system
can be operated when the airplane is powered by battery only.
2. Operation
through the audio control panel to the system headsets or the flight compartment speakers which convert
0. Place radio rack cooling fan switch in fan position.
Control Position
(1) Microphone selection switch Normal lnterphone

comfortable level
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 8 2340-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
The interphone selection function controls for monitoring transmitted and received signals at all flight crew
switches, microphone selector switches, a normal-emergency switch, isolation amplifier and isolation
circuitry.
The audio reception toggle switches are used to select the audio output of the audio integrating amplifier
position, only one transceiver can be monitored at a time.
The audio control panels are identical in construction and operation. Guide pins on the panel align the
located on the upper portion of the case. The coiled extension cable with a black rubber jacket may be
microphone receptacle and a headset receptacle are located in the electricallelectroniccompartment and
a handset receptacle is located on the external power control panel.
The audio integrating amplifier is located in the electrical/electronic compartment and is identical to the
interphone amplifier.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 13 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
feedback. The captain's microphone mutes the captain's speaker, the first officer's microphone mutes the
first officer's speaker, and the observer's microphone mutes neither speaker. Only the speaker of
transmitting personnel is muted and the captain and first officer can receive and transmit simultaneously
without interference.
Oxygen masks with microphones are installed at each flight crew member station. A push-to-talk button
is installed on the captains control wheel and on the first officer's control wheel. The push-to-talk buttons
transceiver or on the audio integrating system. Actuation of the observer microphone is accomplished by
an integral push-to-talk switch in the electrical extension cable.
Power for the audio integrating system is supplied by the 28-volt dc emergency buses. The system can
be operated when the airplane is powered by battery only.
2. Operation
Control Position
(1) Microphone selection switch Interphone (int)


comfortable level.
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 13 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
GROUND
POWER
RECEPTACLE
JACK

CONTROL PANEL CONTROLPANEL

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 13 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDM COYTROL PANEL

I *
II
yyp(C1L AT CAPTAIN,
FIRST OFFICER AND
QBSERYER STA~IONS
AND AT RADIO RACK
RECEPTION
TOGGLE
SWTCH
(SEENOTE11
- -
EXTERNAL
AUPLIFIER POWER
CONTROL
. 4 5- 3 PANEL
HANDSET
OUTPUT L N E L RECEPTACLE
SCREWORNER
ADJUSTMENT
TRANSISTORIZED
AMPLIFIER
MUTING RELAY
I
AUDIO INTEGRATING (FLIGm
INTERPWWE) AMPLIFIER
WTES:
1. SINGLE TOGGLE W I T C H S H W N I S REPRESENTAWE
OF VHF-1, INT, AN0 VHF-2 RECEPTION TOGGLE SWITCHES.
2. PTT = WSH-TO-TALK
3. VHF-I TRANSCEIVER CONNECTIONS SHOWN. VHF-2
COWNCCTIONS IOENTICAL EXCEPT AS SHOWN THUS: 0
4. OBK~VER STATION DOES W T UTILIZE CONTROL COLUMN
PTT -%ITCH.
5. --t DENDTES DIRECTION OF SIGNAL FLOW

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 13
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST

1. General
transceiver into the flight crew headsets and speakers.
which it is desired to transmit as well as selecting between mask and boom mike.
The flight interphone selection function controls for monitoring transmitted and received signals at all flight
crew member stations and for audio communication between flight crew members.
panel is located at each flight crew member station. Each panel contains the following controls: six lighted
interlocking push button switches for the selection of microphone communication channels, twelve push
out potentiometer switches for selection and volume control of receiver audio, a Radiollnterphone switch,
a Mask/Boom microphone switch and a voicelident switch.
The six button switches are for selecting and connecting an audio output to the audio control panel. Each
button is labeled with regards to the unit it controls. The twelve push out potentiometer switches are for
selection and volume control of receiver audio and are labeled with regards to the unit it controls. The
Radio/lnterphone switch allows for switching between hot mike capability and Receivernransmitter mike
keying. The BoomIMask mike switch allows for selection between the boom mike and the oxygen mask
mike. The voicelident switch allows for selection between a strictly voice signal or a combination of voice
signal and 1020HZ navigation tone.
The captain and first officer's audio control panels are identical in construction and operation. Each unit
has two circular connectors to interface ships wiring. The observer audio control panel is of different
operation and has guide pins on the panel to align the electrical connectors for mating with receptacles
on a spring-loaded plate. The control panel is mounted and held in place by quick-release fasteners.
Spring pressure from the spring-loaded plate maintains electrical contact between the receptacles and
the panel connectors. The spring-loaded plate allows the panel to be easily removed when the
quick-release fasteners are unlocked. Each panel is rectangular with flat internally lighted lucite face.
microphone is packaged in a small molded, black, high-impact phenolic case. A press-talk button is
located on the upper portion of the case. The headsets are used to monitor the radio receiver audio, crew
communication, or transmitter sidetone as selected on the individual audio control panel. Each headphone
is a lightweight, permanent magnet type with a typical impedance of 600 ohms per headset. A headset
receptacle is located in a jack box in the cockpit side wall.
The flight interphone amplifier is located in the electrical/electronic compartment and is identical to the
cabin service interphone amplifier.
Effectivity Page 1
CODE 96 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
K. Two speaker assemblies are installed overhead in the flight compartment to monitor the audio output.
feedback when any of the microphones are operated.
L. Oxygen masks with microphones are installed at each flight crew member station. A push-to-talk button
is installed on the captains control wheel and on the first officer's control wheel. The push-to-talk buttons
transceiver or on the audio integrating system. Actuation of the observer microphone is accomplished by
an integral push-to-talk switch in the electrical extension cable.
M. Power for the captains audio integrating system is supplied by the 28-volt dc emergency buses. The
N. Power for the first officer and observers audio integrating system is supplied by the 28-volt dc transfer bus.
battery.
2. Operation
Control Position
(1) Microphone selection switch lnterphone (int)
(2) lnterphone audio ON (pushed out)

reception switch (button)

comfortable level.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-50-00 Page 2
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
Audio Integrating- Pictorial Diagram

Figure 1
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 96 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
TYPIC& AT CAPTAIN'S. FIRST OFFICER'S

ANDOBSERVER STATIONS (NOTE 21
CAPTAIN'S AUDKl
CCNTROL PANEL
(TYPICAL)
HEADSET
RECEPTACLE
-3817
OXYGEN MASK 1
RECEPTACLE
MICROPHONE
TYPICAL AT CAPTAIN AND F IRST OFFICER STATIONS
f I
-&j----Fg~~ WTPLIT LEVEL
MUTING RELAY
I
17 j
TRANSISTORIZED
AUDIO INTERGRATING (FLIGHT

IMERPHONEI AMPLIFIER
1. PTT PUSH-TO-TALK
2. OBSERVER STATION DOES NOT UTILIZE CONTROL M X M
PTT SWITCH.
3. A DENOTES DIRECTON OF SIGNAL FLOW

Figure 2
Effectivity Page 4
CODE 96 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
4. Function
The audio control panel provide complete integrating controls associated with the aircraft audio system. The
panel provide for microphone routing and P l 7 (push-t~talkkeying) controls. It also provides audio mixing for
radio communication, navigation, flight interphone, cabin interphone and public address signals.
The control panel provides six lighted interlocking push button switches for the selection of microphone
communication channels and twelve push out potentiometer switches for selection and volume control of
receiver audio.
VHF-1 VHF-2 VHF-3 INT CSV PA
F G
VOR-1 VUR-2 ADF VOICE
H I
(?wzHzl@ I DENT
4 I
Audio Control Panel

Figure 3
A. VHF-1, VHF-2 and VHF-3 mike select buttons.
(1) Pushing down on the VHF-1, VHF-2 or VHF-3 button illuminates the button and connects that
transmitter to the audio panel's microphones. Once a mike select button is depressed, the pilot may
use either the wheel switch, the hand microphone, or the ACP (Audio Control Panel) R/T key switch,
pushed to radio position for PTT keying, to talk on the selected channel (see Figure 3, C).
B. INT, CSV and PA mike select buttons.
(1) Pushing down on the INT, CSV or PA button illuminates the button and connects the INT (flight
interphone), CSV (cabin service interphone or PA (public address) system to the audio panel's
microphones. Once a mike select button is depressed, the pilot may use either the wheel switch, the
hand microphone, or the ACP (Audio Control Panel) WT key switch, pushed to Radio position for P l T
keying, to talk on the selected channel (see Figure 3, C).
Effectivity Page 5
CODE 96 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
Radio - lnterphone Switch:
(1) Place this switch in the aft INTPH position for hot mike capability on the flight interphone. The flight
interphone will have hot mike capability regardless of the position of the VHF 1-3, INT, CVS and
PA mike selector buttons. The pilot can override flight interphone hot mike by keying the wheel switch
(the selected system VHF 1-3, INT, CVS or PA will be keyed). When this switch is placed in the center
radio position, the pilot can momentarily push the switch forward for R/T (Receiverflransmitter ) mike
keying. The momentary R/T switch or wh eel switch is used with the boom or oxygen mask mike. The
R/T switch or wheel switch overrides the hand mike PTT.
Boom - Mask Switch
(1) Place in the aft BOOM position when using the headset BOOM mike. Place in the forward MASK
position when using the oxygen mask mike.
VOICE - IDENT Switch
(1) Place in the forward VOICE position to hear the VOR-1, VOR-2, or ADF voice signal. Place in the
aft IDENT position to hear both the VOR-1, VOR-2, or ADF voice signal and 1020 Hz NAV
identification tone. The DME audio is not affected by either position of the VOICE - IDENT switch.
VHF-1, VHF-2, and VHF-3 Volume Control and Audio Selector Switches
(1) Push the switch to the out position to select VHF-1, VHF-2, or VHF-3 receiver audio. Audio level
is adjusted by rotating the switch. When the selector switch is pushed in, no audio is heard.
INT, CSV, and PA Volume Control and Audio Selector Switches
(1) Push the switch to the out position to select INT, CSV or PA audio. Audio level is adjusted by rotating
the switch. When the selector switch is pushed in, no audio is heard.
VOR-1, VOR-2, and ADF Volume Control and Selector Switches
(1) Push the switch to the out position to select VOR-1, VOR-2 or ADF receiver audio. Audio level is
adjusted by rotating the switch. When the selector switch is pushed in, no audio is heard. Aircraft with
two ADF's will receive both ADF-1 and ADF-2 audio through the ACP ADF selector switch. Use the
volume controls at the ADF-1 control panel or the ADF-2 control panel to select between the two
ADF's.
DME-1, DME-2, and MKR Volume Control and Audio Selector Switches
(1) Push the switch to the out position to select DME-1, DME-2 or MKR receiver audio. Audio level is
adjusted by rotating the switch. When the selector switch is pushed in, no audio is heard.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-50-00 Page 6
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO INTEGRATING -TROUBLE SHOOTING

1. Trouble Shooting
A. No Communication at Any Station

- - - -
(1) No power Check flight interphone circuit Close audio control circuit breakers.
breakers (2). Check for 28 Supply power to 28 vdc emergency bus.
vdc on emergency bus.
(2) Faulty Interchange amplifier Replace amplifier if defective.

amplifier with one known to be
serviceable.
(3) Faulty Wiring Check amplifier wiring with Repair wiring as necessary.
ohmmeter or continuity checker.
CAUTION: WHEN REPAIRING OR REPLACING AUDIO SIGNAL WIRING, GROUND AT THE SAME GROUND
STUDS USED FOR ORIGINAL WIRING. USE SAME ROUTING AS ORIGINAL WHEN REPLACING
WIRING RUNS.
B. Volume Too High or Too Low at All Stations
(1) Amplifier Adjust amplifier Adjust amplifier output level potentiometer

output level output level. with screwdriver in adjustment hole in
out of adjustment amplifier case. If trouble is not corrected,
replace amplifier.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-50-00 Page 101
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
C. No Transmission, Garbled Sound, Noise, Low Volume, or No Reception at One Station
(1) Controls on Check position of Position controls as follows:

audio control controls. emergency switch-down, microphone
panel improperly selector switch-interphone, audio re-
positioned ception switches-interphone u p all
others down, volume control-fully
clockwise.
(2) Faulty microphone lnterchange with Replace if defective.

or headset one known to be
serviceable.
(3) Faulty audio lnterchange with Replace audio control panel if defective.
control panel audio control panel
(4) Defective jack Check jack with ohmmeter. Replace jack if defective.
(5) Faulty wiring Check audio control panel Repair wiring as necessary.
wiring with ohmmeter or
continuity checker.
CAUTION: WHEN REPAIRING OR REPLACING AUDIO SIGNAL WIRING, GROUND SHIELDING AT THE
SAME GROUND STUDS USED FOR ORIGINAL WIRING. USE SAME ROUTING AS ORIGINAL
WHEN REPLACING WIRING RUNS.

CODE 1 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
cf"'
$1
0
nl
z3:
*
Audio Integrating - Flight lnterphone

CODE 1
JUN 12/02
ADP-I { z- -
wmU4 1;;
OBSERVER3
t AUDIO v . 2 *C*DILT
la - Llwla
21- 4 v w - I
23- - * r - I
$:-"$T*yiIO
tt- *vw-2
NORTHWEST
Audio Integrating - Schematic (Aircraft 9857-9878)


CODE I 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
Audio Integrating - Schematic

Effectivity
CODE 1 23-50-00 Page 106
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
U U U
n;= t-r i r r- .J
1 1 1
I * ,
111
. . I
1 1
I #
1 1
I,
'I

Effectivity
CODE I 23-50-00 Page 107
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
L
(Series 50 Aircraft)

CODE 1 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO INTEGRATING - TROUBLE SHOOTING

1. Trouble Shooting

serviceable.
WIRING RUNS.

replace amplifier.

CODE 3 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
(1) Controls on Check position of Position controls to proper positions.

audio control controls.
panel improperly
positioned

serviceable.
continuity checker.
Effectivity
CODE 3 23-50-00 Page 102
JUN 12/02
ZOIZC Nnr
EOL a6ed
NORTHWEST

1. Trouble Shooting

serviceable.
WIRING RUNS.

replace amplifier.

CODE 5 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
(1 Controls on Check position of Position controls as follows:

audio control controls. emergency switch if applicable-down,
panel improperly microphone selector switch-inter-
positioned phone, audio reception switches-inter-
phone up- all others down, volume con-
trol-set to a comfortable level.

serviceable.
continuity checker.

CODE 5
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
1. Trouble Shooting
A. No Communication at Station

-
(1) No power Check audio control circuit Close audio control circuit breakers.
breakers (2). Check for 28 Supply power to 28 vdc emergency and
vdc on emergency and transfer bus.
transfer bus.

serviceable.
STUDS USED FOR ORIGINAL WIRING. USE SAME ROUTING AS ORIGINAL.
0. Volume Too High or Too Low at All Stations

replace amplifier.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-50-00 Page 101
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
(1) Controls on Check position of Position controls as follows:

audio control controls. microphone selector switch interphone
panel improperly selector switch-depressed, volume
positioned control set to a comfortable level.

serviceable.
continuity checker.
STUDS USED FOR ORIGINAL WIRING. USE SAME ROUTING AS ORIGINAL.

CODE 96
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO INTEGRATING - MAINTENANCE PRACTICE
1. General
A. It is not necessary to perform an entire test when certain system components are replaced. For example,
if an audio control panel is replaced, establish satisfactory communication between another panel and
replacement panel only. If an amplifier is replaced, perform entire test.
2. AdjustmenUTest Audio lntegratina Svstem
CAUTION: DO NOT OPERATE SYSTEM WHEN RADIO RACK COOLING FAN IS INOPERATIVE, SUCH
OPERATION SHORTENS LIFE OF EQUIPMENT.
A. Test System
Actuate microphone selector switch to interphone and place interphone audio reception switch to ON
position at following stations: captain, first officer, observer, and radio rack.
Plug handset into receptacle at external power control panel.
Use flight crew members microphones, headsets, and handset at external power control panel and
communicate with captain, first officer, observer, and radio rack stations. Communication should be
readily discernible and free of noise at all stations.
Vary audio volume controls on audio control panels throughout entire range. Variation of audio level
should be linear and free of noise. Volume should be more than adequate when volume control is
in maximum clockwise position.
Select loudspeaker operation at station where such function is available. Communication from such
stations should disable (mute) respective speaker.
On stations equipped with more than one microphone and headset selection, check all selections for
adequate communication.
Place captain, first officer, observer, and radio rack audio control panel emergency-normal switches
in emergency position and check reception at these stations. Volume should be slightly less than in
previous tests with same volume control setting. (Emergency function bypasses audio control panel
isolation amplifier.)

CODE 1 23-50-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
2. Ad&stment,rest Audio lntearatincl Svstem
A. Test System
Actuate microphone selector switch to interphone and rotate audio control panel volume control
clockwise at following stations: captain, first officer, observer, and radio rack.
communicate with captain, first officer, observer, and radio rack stations. Communication should be
readily discernible and free of noise at all stations.
stations should disable (mute) both speakers.
Effectivity
CODE P 23-50-00 Page 201
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
2. Adjustmentrrest Audio lntegratina Svstem

A. Test System
Actuate microphone selector switch to interphone and place interphone audio reception switch to ON
position at following stations: captain, first officer, and observer.
communicate with captain, first officer, and observer stations. Communication should be readily
discernible and free of noise at all stations.
stations should reduce respective speaker output by approximately I l d b . Listen for significant
lowering of speaker output.
Place observer audio control panel emergency-normal switch in emergency position.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-50-00 Page 201
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO INTEGRATING AMPLIFIER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The audio integrating amplifier is mounted on the forward right rack in the electrical/electronic
compartment. If a replacement amplifier is to be installed, the audio integrating adjustmenthest
(23-50-00) must be performed following installation.
2. RemovalJlnstallationFliaht lnterphone Amplifier
A. Remove Amplifier
(1) Open flight interphone circuit breakers located on overhead circuit breaker panel.
(2) Disconnect electrical connector, as applicable, and release and remove amplifier
(1) Make certain that flight interphone circuit breakers, located on overhead circuit breaker panel are
open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Install amplifier and secure.
(3) Secure electrical connector, if applicable.
(4) Close flight interphone circuit breakers located on overhead circuit breaker panel.
Effectivity
CODE 4 23-50-01 Page 201
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO INTEGRATING AMPLIFIER - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
A. The audio integrating amplifier is mounted on the forward right rack in the electrical/electronic
compartment. If a replacement amplifier is to be installed, the audio integrating adjustment4est
(23-50-00) must be performed following installation.
2. Removal/lnstallation Flight lnterphone Amplifier
A. Remove Amplifier
(1) Remove audio control circuit breakers located on overhead circuit breaker panel and lower EPC.
(2) Disconnect electrical connector, as applicable, and release and remove amplifier.
(1) Make certain that audio control circuit breakers, located on overhead circuit breaker panel and lower
EPC are open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Install amplifier and secure.
(3) Secure electrical connector, if applicable.
(4) Close audio control circuit breakers located on overhead circuit breaker panel.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-50-01 Page 201
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO CONTROL PANELS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. Four audio control panels are used in the audio integrating system. Three control panels are installed in
the flight compartment; two on the pedestal for the captain and first officer and one on the aft overhead
switch panel for the observer. One control panel is installed on the radio rack in the electrical/electronic
compartment. Following the installation of a new audio control panel, an operational test should be
performed on the communication, navigation, public address, and interphone system to ensure proper
functioning of audio control panel.
2. Removal/lnstallation Fliaht Compartment Audio Control Panel
A. Remove Captain, First Officer, or Observer Control Panel
(1) Open following circuit breakers:
Flight lnterphone (2) Overhead Emergency dc bus
Overhead switch panel lights aft Upper main

transformer secondary (2)
Pedestal (2) Left console

- -

(2) Press on panel face, release slot-head fasteners, then release hand pressure.
NOTE: When hand pressure is released, spring-loaded electrical connector partially ejects panel out of cavity.
B. Install Captain, First Officer, or Observer Control Panel
(2) Insert control panel in cavity and press on panel face to engage panel receptacle with spring-loaded
electrical connector.
(4) Close following circuit breakers:

- -
- -
Flight lnterphone (2) Overhead Emergency dc bus
Overhead switch panel lights aft Upper main

Pedestal (2) Left console

CODE I 23-50-02 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
3. Removal/lnstallation Electrical/Electronics Compartment Audio Control Panel
A. E02350-01039 removes the Audio Control Panel from the E&E compartment and replaces it with a blank
panel. Step number 3. Removal/lnstallation Audio Control Panel, is no longer required. For detail
information see E02350-01039 IN SCEPTRE /FOR IMM.

CODE 1 23-50-02 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
AUDIO CONTROL PANELS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. Three audio control panels are used in the audio integrating system. These control panels are installed
in the flight compartment; two on the pedestal for the captain and first officer and one on the aft overhead
switch panel. An operational test should be performed on the communication, navigation, public address,
and interphone system to ensure proper functioning of the audio control panel.
2. Removal/lnstallationFliaht Compartment Audio Control Panel
A. Remove Captain, First Officer, or Observer Control Panel
Open following circuit breakers:
Audio Control (1) Overhead Emergency dc bus
Audio Control (1) Lower main Transfer dc bus
Overhead switch panel lights aft Upper main Transfer dc bus

Pedestal (2) Left console Transfer dc bus
TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS (SEE CHAPTER 20).

For Captain's and First Officer's control panel, release slot-head fasteners and disconnect electrical
connectors.
NOTE: For observer's panel, press on panel face, release slot-head fasteners, then release hand pressure. When
hand pressure is released, spring-loaded electrical connector partially ejects panel out of cavity.
B. Install Captain, First Officer, or Observer Control Panel
(2) Connect electrical connectors and insert control panel in cavity. For observers panel, insert panel in
cavity and press on panel face to engage panel receptacle with spring-loaded electrical connector.
(4) Close following circuit breakers:
Audio Control (1) Overhead Emergency dc bus
Overhead switch panel lights aft Upper main Transfer dc bus

Pedestal (2) Left console Transfer dc bus

Effectivity
CODE 96 23-50-02 Page 201
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT SPEAKERS - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. It is not necessary to perform an entire audio integrating adjustmentltest when a speaker is replaced.
Establish satisfactory output from replacement speaker only, by operating interphone or communication
system to ensure proper output of speaker.
2. Removal/lnstallation Fliaht Compartment Speakers
A. Remove Speaker
(1) Open flight interphone circuit breakers located on emergency dc bus seciton of overhead circuit
breaker panel.
(2) Remove attaching screws and lower speaker until electrical connector is accessible.
(3) Disconnect electrical connector.
B. Install Speaker
(1) Make certain that flight interphone circuit breakers, located on emergency dc bus section of overhead
circuit breaker panel, are open, agged, and safetied.
(2) Connect electrical connector.
(3) Install speaker in cavity in lining and secure with attaching screws.
(4) close flight interphone circuit breakers located on emergency dc bus seciton of overhead circuit
breaker panel.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-50-03 Page 201
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
VIEW A
TYPICAL
Flight Compartment Speakers - Removal/lnstallation

Figure 201

CODE 1 23-50-03 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
RADIO INTERPHONE fMICROPHONE?SWITCH - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. A radio interphone switch is installed on the outboard horn of each control wheel.
B. The removal/installation procedures are identical for each switch.
2. Removal/lnstallation Radio Interphone Switch
A. Remove Switch
(1) Open following circuit breakers:
-- -
VHF Communications-1 Overhead Emergency dc bus
VHF Communications-2 Upper main Right radio bus
Flight lnterphone-1 Overhead Emergency dc bus
Flight Interphone-2 Overhead Emergency dc bus
(2) Remove setscrew.
(3) Pull switch outward until electrical connections are clear of horn.
B. Install Switch
(1) Make certain circuit breakers called out in step 2.A. are open, tagged, and safetied.
(3) Insert switch in horn. Align locating key with detent in horn to provide proper seating of switch.
(4) Install setscrew.
(6) Operate VHF communications system and audio integrating system to verify proper operation of
switch. (See 23-30-00 and 23-50-00.)

CODE 1 23-50-04 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
Radio lnterphone (Microphone) Switch

Figure 201

CODE 1 23-50-04 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
RADIO INTERPHONE (MICROPHONE! SWITCH - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
A. A radio interphone switch is installed on the outboard horn of each control wheel.
B. The removal/installationprocedures are identical for each switch.
2. Removal/lnstallation Radio Interphone Switch
A. Remove Switch
Open following circuit breakers:
--
HF Communications-1 Upper main Left radio bus
VHF Communications-1 Overhead Emergency dc bus
VHF Communications-2 Upper main Right radio bus

- -- - -
TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKERS. (SEE CHAPTER 20.)
Remove setscrew.
Pull switch outward until electrical connections are clear of horn.
Disconnect electrical connections.
B. Install Switch
(1) Make certain circuit breakers called out in step 2.A. are open, tagged, and safetied.
(3) Insert switch in horn. Align locating key with detent in horn to provide proper seating of switch.
(4) Install setscrew.
(6) Operate HF communications system, VHF communications system, and audio integrating system
to verify proper operation of switch. (See 23-1 0-00, 23-20-00, and 23-50-00.)
CODE 4 23-50-04 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
Radio lnterphone (Microphone) Switch

Figure 201

CODE 4 23-50-04 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
STATIC DISCHARGING – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
NOTE: EO2360–01001 and ECO 23–60–03 removed the static dischargers from the tips of the wings and the tips
of the horizontal stabilizers.
A. The static dischargers are installed at the extremities of the airplane to dissipate static electricity with a
minimum amount of radio interference. The locations selected for static discharger installation are those
where corona discharge is most likely to occur.
B. Trailing edge–type dischargers are used. Both types of dischargers are similar in construction. The trailing
edge–type dischargers are installed near the tip of the wing and empennage on the trailing edges.
C. Either Granger or Chelton type dischargers may be used subject to interchangeability restrictions. Refer
to Figure 1, 2 or 3 for applicable configuration of aircraft in question.
D. The Granger discharger consists of a retainer and a resistive–coated dialectric blade containing
discharger pins. The Chelton discharger has a number of wires on the tip. The retainers are attached with
rivets or screws, depending on the location, and are bonded to the structure with adhesive. The pins of
the Granger discharger must remain straight and sharp, and the resistive coating unchanged, to effectively
dissipate static electricity. A yellow nylon cap with pin guards is installed on the blade to protect personnel.
The cap affects the electrical effectiveness of the discharger and must not be removed.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23–60–00 Page 1
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
A or B
A or B
A or B
A or B
WING
LEFT WING SHOWN
RIGHT OPPOSITE
(INSTALLATION TYPICAL)
*** A or B
TAIL CONE
A or B
TRAILING EDGE STATIC

DISCHARGER (TYPICAL)
TUFT
NYLON COVER
DO NOT REMOVE
*** CHELTON TYPE ”A” DISCHARGER
2–16–S ONLY
BLADE PINS
WARNING:
SETSCREW
TO PREVENT INJURY
AVOID CONTACT WITH
SHARP POINT OF PINS
GRANGER TYPE ”B”

DISCHARGER
RETAINER
Static Dischargers Locations

Figure 1
Effectivity
CODE 96 23–60–00 Page 2
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
A or B
A or B
A or B
WING
A or B
*** A or B
A or B A or B
TAILCONE LEFT WING SHOWN

RIGHT OPPOSITE
TUFT

DISCHARGER (TYPICAL) NYLON COVER
DO NOT REMOVE
BLADE PINS
*** CHELTON TYPE ”A” DISCHARGER
2–16–S ONLY
WARNING:
SETSCREW
TO PREVENT INJURY
AVOID CONTACT WITH
SHARP POINT OF PINS

DISCHARGER
RETAINER

Figure 2
Effectivity
CODE 96 23–60–00 Page 3
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
A or B
A or B
A or B
A or B WING
A or B
*** A or B
TUFT A or B
TAILCONE
TRAILING EDGE STATIC NYLON COVER

DISCHARGER (TYPICAL) DO NOT REMOVE LEFT WING SHOWN
RIGHT OPPOSITE
*** CHELTON TYPE ”A” DISCHARGER BLADE
2–16–S ONLY
PINS
SETSCREW WARNING:
TO PREVENT INJURY
AVOID CONTACT WITH
SHARP POINT OF PINS
DISCHARGER
RETAINER

Figure 3
Effectivity
CODE 96 23–60–00 Page 4
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
/V/ / A LEn WING SHOWN

RIGHT OPPOSITE
/ I/ / (INSTALLATION N P I C A L )
NYLON COVER \C or D
,DO NOT REMOVE
CHELTON lYPE "A" DISCHARGER
- -
f 2 16 s only BLADE
PINS
3
CHELTON TYPE "C"
DISCHARGER
. NYLON COVER
I
.
I
/
/
RETAINER
.
- WlNG & EMPENNAGE
T I P STATIC DISCHARGER
DISCHARGER W P I C A L ) WARNING: TO PREVENT INJURY,
AVOID CONTACT WITH
SHARP POINT OF P I N S .
Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 4 23-60-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Aor B
LEFT WING SHOWN

RIGHT OPPOSITE
(INSTALLATIONS TYPICAL)
TRAILING EDGE STAllC

DISCHARGER W P I C A L )
NYLON CWER
WING & EMPENNAGE

WARKING: TO PREVENT INJURY
AVOID CONTACT WITH T I P STAT1C Dl SCHARGER
SHARP POINT OF PINS. (TYPICAL) 882-5673C

Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 4 23-60-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
1. General
A. These procedures provide steps to identify that a precipitation static problem exists on an aircraft, help
locate sources of the precipitation static problems, and provide references to maintenance manual
procedures to correct those problems.
B. Precipitation static discharge problems on the aircraft will usually result in static heard on the HF, ADF,
or VHF communications systems or will be seen as a signal loss on VLF or VHF navigation systems (i.e.
Omega or LORAN). If the precipitation static is bad enough, total loss of these navigation and
communications systems on the aircraft is possible.
C. Precipitation static can be broken down into three types; corona discharge, ARCIsurface discharge, and
streamering.
(1) Corona discharge will usually be described as a wind like noise, heard on the communications
systems, or will be seen as a signal loss on the navigation systems.
(2) ARCIsurface discharge will usually be described as a clicking noise heard on the communications
systems or will be seen as a signal loss on the navigation systems.
(3) Streamering is a wind like noise, which source is generated over a dielectric surface, such as a
radome or Fiberglas panel positioned on a frontal surface.
2. Trouble-Shooting
A. The first step in trouble-shooting a precipitation static problem is to first determine that a precipitation static
problem exists. Electro-magnetic Interference (EMI) problems or bad wiring can sometimes act like a
precipitation static problem. The following criteria can be used to be determined if precipitation static
problems are being experienced:
(1) Does the problem occur with each flight?
(2) Does the problem occur on the ground with the engine running and aircraft stationary?
(3) Does the problem occur in clear air conditions?
(4) Does the problem only occur when the aircraft is flying in clouds, rain, snow, dust, etc., andlor near
the surface of water?
For the problem to be due to precipitation static the answer should be NO to the first three questions
and YES to the last.
B. If the problem is determined to be precipitation static, systems that may be affected, include low frequency
communication and navigation receivers including:
(1) ADF
(2) Omega
(3) HF radios
(4) VHF communication and navigation radios.

Effectivity
CODE 1 23-60-00 Page 101
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
C. The source of precipitation static may possibly be identified by the sound of the interference:
(1) Clicking noises are associated with improperly bonded panels and are the results of arcing to airframe
ground.
(2) Wind hissing noises are associated with streamering or corona discharging that usually occurs on
composite panels, radomes, windshields, antennas, etc.
D. Possible solutions to precipitation static or electro-static interference problems include:
(1) Checking the static discharging system for proper bonding of static wick mounts and the correct static
wick resistance per Reference 23-60-00 Page 201
(2) Ensuring proper bonding for panels and control surfaces with bonding jumpers
(3) Checking proper bonding of radome diverter strips (ref. step E. below)
(4) Checking for proper bonding of antennas to the airframe.
E. Intermittent Loss of Radio Communication
thunderstorms. This may result from improperly bonded lightening strips on the nose radome. The
following test procedure may be used to identify improper bonding of radome lightening strips:
NOTE: This test should be performed using an Ohmmeter with a sharp probe to prevent damage to the external
finish on the lightening strip.
(1) Check the continuity between each lightening strip and the attach flange.
(2) Continuity should exist between each of the strips and the attach flange.
(3) A reading of 0.1 Ohm or less shall be obtained.

F. If attempts to identify the cause of precipitation static or electromagnetic static interference have not yet
been identified, see procedure for Electrostatic Diagnostic Testing using the Dayton Granger PIN 17650
Ramp Test Set below in Step 3.

CODE 1 23-60-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
3. Electrostatic Diaanostic Testina Procedure Usina the Dayton Granaer PIN 17650 Ramp Test Set
NOTE: The Dayton Granger 17650 Electrostatic Diagnostic Test Set is a high voltage, low current tester used to
isolate sources of electrical noise interference (i.e. Precipitation Static) affecting VLFIOmega, VHF, Loran
Navigation Systems and HFNHF communications.
DC AMMETER
Electronic Test Set

Figure 101
A. The concept of electrostatic diagnostic testing is to duplicate the charging phenomena on the ground, in
order to isolate sources of interference due to in-flight charging phenomena. During testing, aircraft
avionics are monitored (Quality Level Deterioration) to identify electro-static interference when related to
VLFIOmega and Loran pilot reportslsquawks. A hand-held receiver or aircraft receivers can be used to
monitor interference when pilot reportslsquawks are related to HF and VHF communication or navigation
systems.
CODE 1 23-60-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
HIGHVOLTAGE
PROBE
POWER CORD
Rear Panel - Electronic Test Set

Figure 102
4. Description of Test Equipment
A. The Dayton Granger 17650 Electrostatic Diagnostic Test Set includes all the equipment necessary to
perform electrostatic testing:
(1) HIGH VOLTAGE PROBE: is constructed using High Voltage Cable with built in current limiting to
reduce electrical shocks. Extension handles are provided. The probe tip should never be touched
when the power supply is on as High Voltage is present on the probe tip.
(2) ION STREAMER: The low noise dischargers mounted on the dish enabling the operator to charge
windshield, radomes, and other non-metal surfaces.
(3) CORONA BALL: Aluminum ball used to sweep all areas of aircraft to determine integrity of bonding.
(a) ION COLLECTOR DISH: Constructed of Fiberglas with resistive coating to give operator
capabilities to concentrate high voltage field at antennas, trailing edges, de-icing boots, etc.
(4) GROUND STRAP: Provided to ground airplane to power supply.

CODE 1 23-60-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
5. Safetv Checks
A. Perform safety checks before electrostatic diagnostic testing. The following safety practices should be
followed before and during High Voltage testing of aircraft.
DO NOT TEST A WET AIRCRAFT, READINGS WILL NOT BE VALID.
Place the aircraft in an area within the hanger away from other aircraft if possible.
Rope off test area and strategically place "HIGH VOLTAGE type warning signs on the rope around
this area.
Do not connect External Power Unit to the aircraft during test.
Remove tail stands from aircraft
Check grounding of fuel tank covers, fuel vent lines with low voltage Ohmmeter.
Top off aircraft fuel tanks.
Check grounding of aircraft.
Ground isolated ladders to Earth Ground to prevent charge build-up.
Check visually for fuel leakage.
6. Safetv Procedures Durina Test
A. Use minimum voltagelcurrent to achieve desired effect. Use minimum voltage necessary for checking
aircraft skin conductivity.
B. Ground ladders, stands, or other platforms used to access the aircraft. Keep all metal stands a minimum
of one foot away from the aircraft.
C. The probe is a high voltage source:
Use the probe handle extenders and grasp it only on the extenders.
Ground the probe to discharge it after turning off the test set.
Keep tip of test probe and probe cable a minimum of one foot away from aircraft, ladders, and
individuals performing test.
Do not touch the probe, nor place it within one foot of any body part while the test is on.
Only use corona ball probe with low voltage 5KV to 1OKV.
Do not grasp cable while test set is on.
Ground isolated ladders to Earth Ground to prevent charge build-up.

CODE 1 23-60-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
7. Test Set Up
Ground aircraft.
Ground test set to aircraft.
Remove front and back panels of power supply.
Inspect test set for damage.
Turn power supply onloff switch to off.
Turn variable control fully counter clockwise.
Plug into 115V AC power.
Without probe plugged in to power supply turn onloff switch to "on" position.
Slowly rotate variable control, increasing voltage. Monitor leakage current on current meter; high humidity
in test area may cause current leakage. Record leakage current with voltage control set at 60KV. Maximum
acceptable leakage is 25 microamperes at 60KV.
Turn power supply off.
If power supply performs satisfactorily, then proceed to next step.
Power supply box should be placed on a cart with wheels for ease of positioning during testing.
WARNING: CABLES MUST BE FREE OF DUST, FLUIDS, GREASE, NICKS, AND CUTS IN ORDER TO
MAINTAIN THE DIELECTRIC STRENGTH.
M. High Voltage Probe Cable should be completely unwound and extension handles attached.
N. Select desired probe attachment (i.e. ion streamer, corona ball, or ion collector dish).
0. Connect ground cable to ground of power supply and clip other end of cable to a known ground on the
aircraft (Except: Landing gear struts).
8. Charaina Tests
A. Aircraft skin, conformal antennas, composite surfaces, wheels and landing gear:
(1) Use ion streamer probe attachment.
(2) Maintain 1-3 inches separation from aircraft surface.
(3) Adjust voltage on test set to 35KV and maintain 25 to 40 microamps of current while sweeping probe
over aircraft surfaces.
(4) If interference occurs, check grounding of panels and bolts in the immediate area.
(5) Full identification of the source of the interference may require removal of the panels(s) involved.
(6) Problems with painted surfaces, with paint too thick, will be evidenced by requiring voltage increases
greater than 5KV to 10KV. Pause at these locations for a minute to permit charge build-up and
possible discharges. You will see spider-like discharge occurring once potential is great enough to
break down paint. If discharge occurs, paint removal and repainting is required.
CODE 1 23-60-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
B. Radomes and Windshields:
(1) Use ion streamer probe attachment.
(2) Establish 25-50 microamps of current with probe about 2 inches from surface.
(3) If no current at maximum voltage, charge the radome for a few minutes.
(4) If no current drain is evidenced, radome needs to be repainted with an anti-static primer, or replaced.
(5) A temporary fix and confirmation of the problem may be accomplished using the anti-static spray.
(6) Most common problems on radome:
(a) No anti-static coating used as primer
(b) Lightning diverter strips not bonded to aircraft, or they are open someplace on strip.
(7) Windshields most likely will have a bleed-off point for the charge to exit aircraft. Monitor receiver for
interference. The most common problem is that the windshield is not bonded to the aircraft.
(8) Re-test radomes and windshields.
C. Antennas:
(1) Use the collector dish probe attachment.
(2) Establish about 5 to 10 microamps of current with probe about 2 inches from frontal area of antenna.
(3) Monitor aircraft avionics or hand-held receiver for interference.
(4) Most common problems associated with antennas:
Not bonded properly
Painted over
Cracks in Fiberglas housing
Mylar tape painted over on communications antennas
Mylar tape should not be used on VLFIOmega or Loran antennas
Mylar tape can be applied on frontal surface of communication antennas for erosion protection.
Re-test antennas.

CODE 1 23-60-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
9. Identifying and Resolvina Problems:
A. Electrostatic diagnostic testing may require creativity to zero in on source of problems. Lower voltage
concentrated in suspect areas.
B. Visually check for location of discharge. Open and remove panels as necessary.
C. Investigate structures in immediate area:
(1) Are they composite?
(2) Do they have ground straps?
(3) Are there any isolated bolts?
(4) Is there a path to ground?
(5) Path to nearby discharger?
(6) Does problem still occur with nearby discharger removed?
(7) Try to confirm source of problem by temporarily fixing it and re-testing. For example, ground bolt of
panel under question, using clip leads or anti-static spray.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23-60-00 Page 108
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
STATIC DISCHARGERS – REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. General
A. The static dischargers are located at the extremities of the airplane to dissipate static electricity. Each
discharger consists of a blade and a retainer, both of which may be removed.
B. The retainers are attached to the structure by rivets or screws, depending on the location. It is not
necessary to remove the vertical stabilizer tip, however, if removal is desired, see Chapter 55. Removal
of the wingtip (see Chapter 57), and the horizontal stabilizer tip (see Chapter 55), is recommended prior
to the removal/installation of applicable riveted retainer. The blade should always be removed when
working on the retainers to prevent damage to the pins and the resistive surface of the blade.
C. Following the removal/installation of the static dischargers perform the adjustment/test to verify proper
resistance and electrical continuity.
NOTE: Equivalent substitute may be used instead of the following listed items:
A Stripper TL–4119 W.P. Fuller Co. Cleaning
B Adhesive PR1422B2 Products Research Bonding

Bonding & Chemical Corp.
410 Jersey Ave.
Cloucester City
New Jersey
C Wet–or–Dry #400–#600 Carborundum Co. Sanding

Carborundum
CAUTION: SOLVENTS ARE FLAMMABLE AND MUST BE USED ONLY IN WELL VENTILATED AREAS AWAY
FROM OPEN FLAME.
3. Removal/Installation Dischargers
WARNING: TO PREVENT INJURY, AVOID CONTACT WITH SHARP POINT OF PINS.
A. Remove Discharger Blade
(1) Remove setscrew.
(2) Lift blade away from retainer.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 401
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
B. Install Discharger Blade
(1) Position blade on retainer taking care to avoid contact with sharp point of pins.
(2) Install setscrew and tighten securely.
NOTE: Granger Type B&D dischargers are illustrated in Figure 401. Chelton Type dischargers can be used subject
to restrictions shown in Description and Operation, Chapter 23–60–00.
NYLON COVER
(DO NOT REMOVE)
PINS
WARNING:
SETSCREW TO PREVENT INJURY
BLADE AVOID CONTACT WITH
SHARP POINT OF PINS
RETAINER

DISCHARGER (TYPICAL)
Static Discharger Blade

Figure 401
Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 402
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
A 1
A 2
A 1
A 3
A 1
TAILCONE
LEFT WING SHOWN

RIGHT WING OPPOSITE
RETAINER (INSTALLATIONS TYPICAL)
FAYING SURFACE
COATED WITH
BONDING
ADHESIVE
NOTE:
VIEW A RF BONDING
PROVIDED THROUGH
SCREWS OR RIVETS
DISCHARGER RETAINER
(TYPICAL)
DESIGNATOR ITEM PART NUMBER
1 RIVET MS20470AD3
2 SCREW NAS514P440–5
3 SCREW NAS600–11P
Static Discharger Retainer Without Retainer Doublers

Figure 402
Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 403
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
A 1
A 2
A 1
A 3
A 1
TAILCONE
RETAINER
LEFT WING SHOWN
RIGHT WING OPPOSITE
(INSTALLATIONS TYPICAL)
1 INCH
DOUBLER
NOTE:
RF BONDING
PROVIDED THROUGH
SCREWS OR RIVETS
RF BOND VIEW A FAYING SURFACE
TRAILING EDGE STATIC COATED WITH
DISCHARGER RETAINER BONDING
(TYPICAL) ADHESIVE
DESIGNATOR ITEM PART NUMBER
1 RIVET MS20470AD3
2 SCREW NAS514P440–5
3 SCREW NAS600–11P
Static Discharger Retainer with Retainer Doublers

Figure 403
Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 404
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
C. Remove Static Discharger Retainer
(1) Remove attaching rivets or screws, as required. (See Figure 402 or 403 as applicable.)
(2) Remove retainer from structure.
(3) On airplanes using static discharger doublers, check for corrosion in area of bond (see Figure 403).
(4) If excess corrosion is found, remove doubler and treat as discharger retainer in step D. (1) through
(7).
D. Install Static Discharger Retainer
NOTE: The following Granger Type static dischargers and retainers may be used when old part numbers are not
available.
EXISTING MODEL NO. NEW MODEL NO.
610–1011 Tip 610D–1B

610–1009 Retainer 610R–9A
611–1008 Tip 611D–1A
611–1006 Retainer 611R–6A
(1) Clean structure and retainer faying surfaces to ensure proper bond.
(2) Sand faying surfaces with 400 to 600 grit Carborundum paper to remove surface gloss.
(3) Remove sanding dust with a clean, dry cloth.
CAUTION: ADHESIVE MUST BE APPLIED IMMEDIATELY AS NON–CONDUCTIVE ALUMINUM OXIDE

FORMS READILY.
(4) Apply sufficient adhesive to faying surfaces to ensure squeeze–out on all sides.
(5) Position retainer and apply firm hand pressure while twisting retainer to ensure complete contact and
squeeze–out of excess adhesive.
(6) Install rivets or screws as applicable.
(7) Excess adhesive may be removed while wet by using a cloth dampened with stripper.
(8) Cure adhesive for 72 hours at 70_ to 85_F.
NOTE: The entire cure cycle of the adhesive need not be complete prior to placing the airplane in service. Time
between installation and departure will be sufficient to prevent damage to the adhesive bond.
NOTE: Step (9) applies only if it is desired to accelerate cure cycle time.
(9) Apply heat with heat gun or heat lamp and maintain structure temperature of 145F for 8 hours after
one hour cure time at 70 F.
(10) Install wingtip, vertical stabilizer tip, or horizontal tip, if applicable.
(11) Install static discharger blade.

Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 405
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
STATIC DISCHARGING – ADJUSTMENT/TEST
1. General
A. The trailing edge–type dischargers are installed on:
(1) Each aileron
(2) The fixed trailing edge of each wingtip
(3) Each elevator, at the outboard end
(4) The tailcone
(5) The top trailing edge of the vertical stabilizer.
NOTE: Equivalent substitute may be used instead of the following listed items:
A Megger Model 1862B General Radio High resistance check
B Milliohmmeter Model 673–D Shallcross Mfg. Co. Low resistance check
3. Adjustment/Test Static Dischargers
WARNING: ON AIRPLANES HAVING HF SYSTEMS, BE CERTAIN TO OPEN, TAG, AND SAFETY HF

CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND GROUND HF ANTENNA WITH ANTENNA GROUNDING STRAP
PROVIDED AT ANTENNA FEED THROUGH BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE OR CHECK
STATIC DISCHARGER LOCATED ON TAILCONE.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE HIGH CURRENT TEST SET AS HEAT GENERATED BY CONTINUOUS HIGH
CURRENT FLOW MAY DAMAGE ADHESIVE BONDING. EXERCISE CARE WHEN ATTACHING
TEST SLIPS TO DISCHARGER PINS AS PINS ARE EASILY BENT OR DAMAGED.
A. Test Dischargers
NOTE: Either Granger or Chelton type static dischargers may be used subject to the interchangeability restrictions
shown in Description and Operation of Chapter 23–60–00.
(1) On trailing edge dischargers, check electrical resistance between each discharger pin or tuft,
depending on type installed, and airplane metal structure. Resistance should be 8 to 100 megohms
for Granger (type B) discharger and 7 to 80 megohms for Chelton (type A) discharger. See Figure
1 of Description and Operation 23–60–00.
(2) Check bond resistance of all dischargers. In–service retainers should have bond resistance of 0.5
ohm or less, or retainer should be replaced.
NOTE: Resistance is measured between retainer and airplane metal structure.

Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 501
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
(3) Following installation of a new retainer, check bond resistance between retainer and airplane metal
structure. Retainer should have bond resistance of 0.1 ohm or less.
NOTE: A reading greater than 0.1 ohm indicates retainer is not properly installed.
4. Carbon Tip Electrostatic Discharger – Adjustment/Test
A. The following method should be used for testing the resistance of carbon tip electrostatic dischargers.
(1) Use a General Radio Type 210800–2 500 volt Megohm meter or equivalent.
(a) Set the meter on multiplier 10 or 100 at 500 volts.
(2) Attach one alligator clip of the test set to the aluminum shank at the end of the discharger
(3) At the other end (free end), force fit the appropriate Chelton Inc. test fitting.
(4) Clip the other lead of the test set to the reduced end of the test fitting.
(5) Measure the resistance and replace any dischargers that are out of tolerance according to the
following chart.
Discharger Type Test Fitting Resistance Tolerance

71–425 Trailing 74–667 6–200 Megohms
80–1746–2 Trailing 74–668 6–200 Megohms
B. The following optional method can be used for testing the resistance of Chelton 71–425, 71–427,
80–1746–2 and 80–1828–2 Electrostatic Dischargers.
(1) Use a General Radio Type 210800–2 500 volt Megohm meter or equivalent.
(a) Set the meter on multiplier 10 or 100 at 500 volts.
(2) Attach one alligator clip of the test set to the aluminum shank at the end of the discharger.
(3) Clip the other lead of the test set to a wet sponge.
(4) Touch the opposite end of the discharger with the wet sponge.
(5) Measure the resistance and replace any dischargers that are out of tolerance according to the
following chart.
Discharger Type Resistance Tolerance

Trailing Type 6–200 Megohms
Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 502
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
Resistance Test
Figure 501
Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 503
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
STATIC DISCHARGING – INSPECTION/CHECK
1. Inspection/Check Dischargers
A. Check
(1) Make visual check to determine that all static dischargers are secure in retainer. Tighten loose
setscrews. Replace broken or missing dischargers.
(2) Check Granger (type B ) discharger for broken, blunted, or bent pins. Check Chelton (type A)
dischargers for damage, loss of wires from tip and length of tuft. Chelton dischargers are serviceable
with up to 50% of wires missing and a minimum tuft length of 1/16 inch. Length of tuft on new
discharger is 1/8 inch.
NOTE: Granger discharger is usable if bent pin tip can be straightened and resistance remains in tolerance. (See
Adjustment/Test.)
(3) Check all dischargers for lightning damage as evidenced by burning and roughening of black
conductive coating on dischargers. Check trailing edge dischargers for pitting of metal shank. If any
damage is apparent, perform resistance check to determine if discharger meets service resistance
tolerances stated in Adjustment/Test paragraph 3. Discharger is usable if within tolerances and pins
are sharp.
NOTE: Lightning damage is apt to occur to trailing edge dischargers installed near tips of wings and tail surfaces.
(4) Check dischargers for excessive erosion or peeling of tip cap and deterioration of resistive coating.
Replace dischargers showing such conditions.
NOTE: Leading edge erosion of any tip discharger should not cover more than one–third width of discharger.
(5) On discharger retainers that have bonding strap across insulation surface, check for evidence of
cracking or burning of bond. If damage is noted, make ohmmeter check and repair as necessary to
achieve bond resistance of not more than 0.5 ohm.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE HIGH CURRENT TEST SET. HEAT GENERATED BY CONTINUOUS HIGH
CURRENT FLOW MAY DAMAGE ADHESIVE BONDING.
Effectivity
CODE 1 23–60–00 Page 601
NOV 10/04
NORTHWEST
VOICE RECORDER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
A. The voice-recorder system provides simultaneous four-channel recording of voice communications

between crew members and all voice communications that are transmitted or received by radio or on the
interphone system. The last 30 minutes of conversation always remains on the magnetic tape.
B. The voice recorder system consists of a voice recorder and a control unit.
C. The voice recorder is a four-channel recorder and contains all of the recording circuits, including the tape
transport, tape-drive mechanism, and self-test circuits. The voice recorder is contained in a 112 ATR short
case, located in the aft-cargo compartment, right-hand tunnel, just forward of the cargo compartment
door. The voice recorder consists of four record amplifiers, a 65 kilocycle bias generator to erase the
magnetic tape before recording, a power supply, a tape transport, a drive motor, a 600 cps self-test circuit,
a test meter, five test switches, and a headset jack. The tape transport is contained in a protective
enclosure that is resistant to a crash environment. The tape package consists of a disposable spliced tape
loop on a hub.
NOTE: The Fairchild Model A100A Voice Recorder installed in some NWA aircraft do not have all the features listed
above. Reference Table 1 for differences.
D. The control unit consists of an area microphone, a microphone preamplifier, an automatic gain control
circuit, a filter circuit, an erase switch, a test switch, a test meter, and a headset jack. The control unit is
located in the flight compartment forward overhead switch panel.
NOTE: The bulk erase is not operational, the bulk erase function was removed with the installation of ACARS.
NOTE: The audio monitor function at the headset jack on the voice recorder control panel is operative only on the
following aircraft:
The audio monitor function is operative at the cockpit voice recorder unit headset jack, located in the aft
cargo compartment on ALL NWA DC-9 aircraft.
E. The self-test circuit is designed to test the entire voice recorder system. When the all test button on the
face of the voice recorder or the test button on the control unit is pressed, a time-sequenced 600 cps signal
is applied to each channel, in sequence, at an interval of approximately 0.8 seconds per channel. The 600
cps signal may be monitored by plugging a 600-ohm headset into the test jack located on the face of the
voice recorder or the test jack on the control unit. Individual channels are tested by pressing the desired
channel test button on the voice recorder. The test meter will give a go or no-go indication for each channel
under test.
NOTE: The Fairchild Model A100A Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) does not contain channel buttons or an ALL
test button described in Step 1.E. All tests with the Model A100A are controlled by the control panel test
button.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-70-00 Page 1
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
F. The Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) is continuously operating when the circuit breaker is closed and the
system is powered. Power is supplied to the system from a 115-volt AC bus through the system circuit
breaker.
G. Northwest Airlines uses two types of Voice Recorders on the D G 9 fleet, Model A100, and A100A. Refer
to Table 1 below for the differences:
Meter, 5 test Each channel and Complete 4 track All but A152A
switches and ALL test available internal (in line)
headphone jack circuit
No test switches, No channel

no meter buttons or ALL
test button. Tests
are controlled
from Control Unit
TEST button
Voice Recorder Model A100 and A100A - Differences

Table 1
2. Operation
A. The voice recorder system records all audio signals originating through the following: Channel 1, public
address system; Channel 2, First Officer's microphone; Channel 3, Captain's microphone; Channel 4,
microphone monitor.
B. All audio signals are applied to the proper recording channel amplifier. The output of the amplifier is then
induced, through magnetic heads, onto the magnetic tape.
C. The system contains automatic gain control circuitry which prevents tape saturation and amplifier
overloading.
A. The Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) System will operate continuously as long as the system is powered,
the circuit breaker is closed, and the CVR unit is mounted securely in the mounting tray.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-70-00 Page 2
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
VOICE RECORDER (AFT CARGO COMPARTMENT)
PASSENGER ADDRESS
AMPLIFIED (FORWARD OSCILLATOR
--1
RIGHT RADIO RACK)
I
I
I
I
I - 2 PUBLIC ADDRESS I
FIRST OFFICER'S AUDIO PANEL SIDETONE (FORWARD
I I I
r
I
- -7 AU D l 0 04~
OUTPUT
f-N17+-
RIGHT EQUIPMENT
PANEL) I
CHANNEL
1
I--
-- 1
CAPTAIN'S AUDIO PANEL
I CHANNEL
I
I--- f
OUTPUT +
AUDIO r < ~ 3
HEADPHONE
4
RECEPTACLE
3 -
I-FD-kl
PEA - -
- - -
CONTROL UNIT (FORWARD OVERHEAD SWITCH PANEL)
I
I
I HEADPHONE
I
I
METER
600 CPS
-- 0 CHANNEL
2
I TEST TEST
-
CIRCUIT
CHANNEL
I 3
TEST
I Q
CHANNEL
4
-12)
I - k - TEST
ALL
TEST TEST
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 96 23-70-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
VOICE RECORDER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
A. E.O. 2370-01071 (Cockpit Voice Recorder, Install) removes the existing tape based Cockpit Voice
Recorder (CVR) and installs a digital Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR). The SSCVR is capable
of recording the latest 30 minutes (PIN 980-6020-01) or 120 minutes (PIN 980-6022-001). Part Number
980-6020-01 and Part Number 980-6022-001 SSCVRs are interchangeable. Either SSCVR may be
installed as a mechanical recorder replacement.
B. The Voice Recorder system picks up, amplifies, and records all flight crew communications as well as
noise, tones, and conversation within the cockpit area (Ref. Figure 1). All radio and interphone
communications from Captain's and First Officer's audio control panels are fed into three channels of the
voice recorder. A fourth channel records all cockpit audio picked up by the microphone on the forward
overhead switch panel. Each channel records separately and simultaneously, therefore audio from the two
panels are kept separate from cockpit noise and aural warning. The system continuously records the four
channels digitally for 30 or 120 minutes (depending on which model SSCVR is installed), so that a record
is always available for analysis following an In-flight incident. The recorder erases as it records so that
the last half hour of recording is retained. The recorder cannot be erased in the DC-9 aircraft. Playback
in the airplane is not possible. The voice recorder system consists of two major units: the voice recorder,
located in the aft cargo compartment, and the voice recorder microphone, located on the forward overhead
switch panel.
2. Voice Recorder Svstem Components
A. Description
(1) Voice Recorder - The digital SSCVR is housed in a 112 ATR short unit. The recorder contains an
interface and control board, a crash survivable memory unit, and a power supply. The front panel
provides storage for 30 or 120 minutes (depending on which model SSCVR is installed) consecutive
recording into the crash protected memory. The bite indicator light on the front panel comes on when
a fault is detected within the SSCVR which requires the removal of the unit. The front panel contains
a TEST switch, headphone jack, STATUS light (green) and Underwater Locator Device.
(a) The SSCVR Implements Built In Test (BIT) functions using three methods:
1) Power on initialization
2) Commanded self-test
3) Background continuous test
(b) A history of the BIT status is maintained in crash protected solid state memoit-y for product tre!nd
analysis and warranty support. In addition, the SSCVR provides a ~aintenance~iscreteoutput
and front panel indicator to indicate BIT failures. Commanded self-test indication is provided
through the Status Discrete output and Audio Monitor output.
(c) Power on initialization verifies operation of the SSCVR insofar as it is practicable given the
specified 250 millisecond power on to recording delay. Functions tested include the main
processor, RAM memory check, program checksum verification, testing of the CHUM interface,
and partial testing of the audio interface. Commanded self-test is invoked through the initiate
self-test discrete and is a much more rigorous, complete test. The background continuous
monitor test utilizes spare processor time to continuously monitor the integrity of the SSCVR.
All BIT failures are recorded in solid-state memory for extraction by ground support equipment.
Effectivity
CODE 97 23-70-00 Page 1
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
(d) The SSCVR implements extensive BIT for detection of errors within the unit. The SSCVR has
been designed to detect and isolate errors to the shop repairable level. BIT also detects and
reports fault conditions to the component level for depot level repair.
Voice Recorder Microphone Monitor - The voice recorder microphone monitor contains an area
microphone, a microphone amplifier, a push-to-test switch, a monitor meter, an erase switch, and
a headset jack. The area microphone picks up oral conversation, which is applied to the microphone
amplifier. The test switch activates a 800 Hz test signal which is applied to each channel in sequence,
beginning with channel one. The monitor amplifier picks up the sequenced test signals and passes
the signals to the meter circuit where a Go or No-Go indication is given. An audible test indication
is available at the headset jack. The erase switch functions to erase the solid state memory, and is
deactivated on all DC-9 aircraft.
Underwater Locating Device (ULD) is attached to the front panel of the voice recorder, although not
a part of the voice recorder system, the ULD is a beacon that actuates immediately upon immersion
in either fresh or salt water. It is powered by a self-contained battery which allows operation for
approximately 30 days after immersion.
B. Operation
(1) The voice recorder system operation is continuous when power is applied to the electrical buses and
the voice recorder circuit breaker is closed. The recording system contains four identical recording
channels. All channels are independent. The monitor amplifier functions to pick up recorded signals
through the monitor pickup head, amplify the signals, and present them at the headset jack for
continuous and simultaneous playback of the four recorded tracks. The monitor amplifier is also used
in conjunction with the test circuit.
(2) When the test switch located on the microphone monitor is pressed, the test function is activated
using a discrete input of the SSCVR. Once activated for 0.5 seconds, this function performs an
extensive set of functional tests to determine the integrity of the recorder.
(a) A successful self-test results in the status discrete output being activated for one second. In the
cockpit this results in one deflection of the microphone monitor status meter. In addition to the
visual indication, an aural indication is provided to the microphone monitor headphone jack; a
two second 800 Hz tone is sent to indicate a successful self-test.
following aircraft:
The audio monitor function is operative at the cockpit voice recorder unit headset jack, located in
the aft cargo compartment on ALL NWA DC-9 aircraft.
Effectivity Page 2
CODE 97
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
(b) If a failure condition exists, the status discrete output is not activated and the aural tone is not
provided resulting in no indication in the cockpit. Also, if a failure occurs, the failure condition is
stored in crash protected memory, the front panel indicator is continuously activated and the
Maintenance Discrete is set to the failure mode.
C. Operate System
(1) There is no "ON-OFF" switch for the voice recorder system. The system is continuously operating
when the electrical bus is energized and the circuit breaker is closed.
Effectivity Page 3
CODE 97 23-70-00 JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
VOICE RECORDER - TROUBLESHOOTING
1 . Troubleshooting
NOTE: A set of headphones must be plugged into phone jack on front panel of voice recorder, or headset jack
located on voice recorder control unit in the aft cargo compartment.
I Possible Causes I Isolation Procedure I Correction

A. - No Voice Recording On Any Channel
3efective Voice Recorder DressALL test button on voice Seplace Voice Recorder.
-ecorder front panel. A 600 cps
:one should be heard in the
ieadphones and test meter
should have a minimum indica-
:ion of 8.
VOTE: Fairchild Model A1 00A
voice recorders do not
contain the following:
channel buttons, ALL
test switch, test meter.
Satisfactory recorder
operation may be
verified by performing
SELF-TEST in the
Maintenance Practices
section 23-70-0.
~efectivewiring :heck interconnecting wiring for Repair or replace wiring as nec-
:ontinuity. ~ssar-y.
Voice Recording One Channel
(1 Defective Voice Recorder or de- Press channel test button on (a) Replace Voice Recorder.
iective wiring front of voice recorder, for defec-
tive channel. A 600 cps tone
should be heard in headphones
and test meter should have a (b) Repair or replace wiring.
minimum indication of 8. If 600
cps tone is not heard, see
correction (a). If 600 cps tone is
heard, see correction (b).
NOTE: Fairchild Model A1 OOA
voice recorders do not
contain the following:
channel buttons, ALL
test switch, test meter.
Satisfactory recorder
operation may be
verified by performing
the SELF-TEST in the
Maintenance Practices
section 23-70-0.
Effectiv ity
CODE 96 23-70-00 Page 101
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
lefective area microphone in Speak into area microphone. :a) Replace control unit.
;ontrol unit or defective wiring Joice should be heard in head-
)hone with approximately 0.5
;econd delay. If correction (a)
joes not restore system, see :b) Repair or replace wiring.
:orredion (b).
The audio monitor func-
tion at the headset jack
on the voice recorder
control panel is opera-
tive on the following air-
craft:
The audio monitor

function is operative at
the headset jack on the
cockpit voice recorder,
located in the aft cargo
compartment on ALL
NWA DC-9 aircraft.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23-70-00 Page 102
JUN 12/02
NORTHWEST
VOICE RECORDER – MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
1. General
NOTE: E.O. 2370–01071 (Cockpit Voice Recorder, Install) removes the existing tape based Cockpit Voice
Recorder (CVR) and installs a digital Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR). The SSCVR is capable
of recording the latest 30 minutes (P/N 980–6020–01) or 120 minutes (P/N 980–6022–001). Part Number
980–6020–01 and Part Number 980–6022–001 SSCVRs are interchangeable. Either SSCVR may be
installed as a mechanical recorder replacement.
A. It is not necessary to perform an entire system test when certain system components are replaced. For
example, if the voice recorder unit is replaced, establish satisfactory operation by performing the self–test.
If the voice recorder control panel is replaced, perform the system test.
following aircraft:
9940–9944, 9750–9756, 9758–9760, 9762, 9763
B. System test (operational check) is required to verify cockpit area microphone operation.
C. List of Procedures:
1. General
2. Removal/Installation Voice Recorder Control Panel
3. Removal/Installation Voice Recorder Unit
4. Adjustment/Test Voice Recorder System
5. Four Channel Operation Check of Cockpit Voice Recorder with Breakout Box
2. Removal/Installation Voice Recorder Control Panel
A. The voice recorder control panel is installed in the forward overhead switch panel in the flight
compartment.
B. Remove Voice Recorder Control Panel
(1) Open cockpit voice recorder circuit breaker located on the right radio bus section of the upper main
circuit breaker panel.
WARNING: TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKER.
(2) Support control panel face, release fasteners, and lower control panel from cavity.
C. Install Voice Recorder Control Panel
(1) Make certain voice recorder circuit breaker is open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Connect electrical connector to receptacle on control panel.
(3) Insert control panel in cavity, engage and lock fasteners.
(4) Close voice recorder circuit breaker.
(5) Perform Voice Recorder System Test.

Effectivity
CODE 96 23–70–00 Page 201
MAY 09/05
NORTHWEST
3. Removal/Installation Voice Recorder Unit
A. The voice recorder unit is mounted in the aft cargo compartment right–hand tunnel just forward of the cargo
door.
B. Remove Voice Recorder Unit
(1) Open cockpit voice recorder circuit breaker located on the right radio bus section of the upper main
circuit breaker panel.
WARNING: TAG AND SAFETY CIRCUIT BREAKER.
(2) Loosen and disengage knurled nuts from mounting bracket on lower front panel of unit.
(3) Pull recorder unit inboard and out of mount.
C. Install Voice Recorder Unit.
(1) Make certain voice recorder circuit breaker is open, tagged, and safetied.
(2) Install recorder unit on mount.
(3) Engage and tighten knurled nuts on mounting bracket on lower front panel of unit.
(4) Remove tags, safeties and close voice recorder circuit breakers.
(5) Perform Voice Recorder Self–Test
4. Adjustment/Test Voice Recorder System
NOTE: Refer to step C. for Self–Test/Operational Test of aircraft with EO 2370–01071 (Solid State Cockpit VoIce
Recorder (SSCVR) accomplished.
A. Self–Test
(1) Press and hold for minimum of 5 seconds the test button on the cockpit voice recorder control panel.
Check for a normal test indication of one meter deflection into the “Good Range”.
NOTE: A test tone will not be heard through the jack on the cockpit voice recorder control panel, since the audio
monitor circuit has been disconnected.
B. System Test (Operational Check)
NOTE: The Fairchild Model A100A Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) does not contain channel buttons or an ALL
test button. All tests with the Model A100A are controlled by the control panel test button.
(1) Using a headset in the monitor jack on the cockpit voice recorder unit, transmit a predetermined
phrase on a non–local VHF frequency on the Captain’s audio selector. The transmission should be
heard through the headset.
(2) Using a headset in the monitor jack on the cockpit voice recorder unit, transmit a predetermined
phrase on a non–local VHF frequency on the First Officers audio selector. The transmission should
be heard through the headset.
(3) Speak a predetermined phrase into the Public Address System (PA). It should be heard in the
headset.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23–70–00 Page 202
MAY 09/05
NORTHWEST
(4) Speak a predetermined phrase about three feet from the cockpit area microphone. It should be heard
in the headset.
NOTE: Overlap of the different channels may be heard.
C. Self–Test Solid State Cockpit VoIce Recorder (SSCVR)
(1) Press and hold test switch on microphone monitor a minimum of 1 second:
NOTE: When the test switch located on the microphone monitor is pressed, the test function is activated using a
discrete input of the SSCVR. Once activated for 0.5 seconds, this function performs an extensive set of
functional tests to determine the integrity of the recorder.
(a) A successful self–test results in the status discrete output being activated for one second. In the
cockpit this results in one deflection of the microphone monitor status meter. In addition to the
visual indication, an aural indication is provided to the microphone monitor headphone jack; a
two second 800 Hz tone is sent to indicate a successful self–test.
following aircraft:
9940–9944, 9750–9756, 9758–9760, 9762, 9763
(b) If a failure condition exists, the status discrete output is not activated and the aural tone is not
provided resulting in no indication in the cockpit. Also, if a failure occurs, the failure condition is
stored in crash protected memory, the front panel indicator is continuously activated and the
Maintenance Discrete is set to the failure mode. If a failure occurs; replace voice recorder and
re–test.
(2) System Test (Operational Check)
(a) Using a headset, transmit a predetermined phrase on a non–local VHF frequency on the
Captain’s audio selector. The transmission should be heard through the headset.
(b) Using a headset, transmit a predetermined phrase on a non–local VHF frequency on the First
Officers audio selector. The transmission should be heard through the headset.
(c) Speak a predetermined phrase into the Public Address System (PA). It should be heard in the
headset.
(d) Speak a predetermined phrase about three feet from the cockpit area microphone. It should be
heard in the headset.
D. System test complete.
Effectivity
CODE 96 23–70–00 Page 203
MAY 09/05
NORTHWEST
5. Four Channel Operation Check of Cockpit Voice Recorder with Breakout Box
A. Tooling:
Part Number Qty. Nomenclature

NWSA2370–01071–3 1 Tool, DC9 Test SSCVR Audio Monitor Breakout Box, Harness and Headset
H01RDC9AA1AN 2 UHF Portable Radio (Motorola HT1000)
(or equivalent)
B. Pull the COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER circuit breaker on the EPC circuit breaker panel.
ON A/C 9601–9623, 9851–9886, 9903–9998: B10–50
ON A/C 9750–9763: B10–6010
C. Remove the Solid State Cockpit Voice Recorder (SSCVR) from its mounting tray and connect the breakout
box (P/N NWSA2370–01071–3) between the the SSCVR and the tray receptacle, See Figure 201.
(1) Close the COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER circuit breaker on the EPC circuit breaker panel.
(2) Establish communication between technician in cockpit and technician in aft cargo with UHF
handheld radios or equivalent method.
following aircraft: 9940–9944, 9750–9756, 9758–9760, 9762, 9763
D. Transmit a pre–determined phrase for each of the following locations/channels, and verify transmission
at the SSCVR through the headset.
(1) Transmit over a Non–local VHF frequency through the Captain’s audio selector.
(2) Transmit over a Non–local VHF frequency through the First Officer’s audio selector.
(3) Announce over the PA.
(4) Speak about 3 feet from the cockpit area microphone.
NOTE: Overlap of the different locations/channels may be heard over the headset.
E. Pull the COCKPIT VOICE RECORDER circuit breaker on the EPC circuit breaker panel,
Disconnect breakout box and restore SSCVR to original configuration.
SSCVR Breakout Box Installation

Figure 201
Effectivity
CODE 96 23–70–00 Page 204
MAY 09/05
NORTHWEST
UNDERWATER LOCATOR BEACON - MAINTENANCE PRACTICES

1. General
A. The Underwater Locator Beacons installed on NWA aircraft are tested and maintained by shop personnel.
Any problems associated with the Underwater Locator Beacon are handled by removing the recorder and
routing to the shop per normal procedures.

CODE 96 23-70-04 JUN 12/02

Chap-23 DC-9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chap-23 DC-9

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chap-23 DC-9

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the document about?

What is the document about?

What are some of the sections listed in the document?

What are some of the sections listed in the document?

CHAPTER 23

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

10 102 JUN 03/02

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

1 406 APR 23/02 10 2 JUN 03/02

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

15 101 JUN 03/02 96 503 JUN 03/02

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

96 202 JUN 11/02 23–31–00

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

99 502 JUN 11/02 10 1 JUN 12/02

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

1 3 JUN 12/02 96 201 JUN 12/02

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CLAIRCOM TELEPHONE SYSTEM 23–19–00

ANTENNA– PASSENGER TELEPHONE

HANDSET–PASSENGER TELEPHONE 23–19–17

POWER SUPPLY UNIT–

RADIO FREQUENCY UNIT–(RFU)

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR OUTPUT(ECO) BOX 23–19–41

VERY HIGH FREQUENCY (VHF) 23–20–00

VHF ANTENNA 23–20–03

ACARS MANAGEMENT UNIT 23–26–01

ACARS CONTROL UNIT 23–26–02

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 23–31–00

PUBLIC ADDRESS AMPLIFIER 23–31–01

PUBLIC ADDRESS RELAY AND

CABIN SPEAKERS/TRANSFORMERS 23–31–03

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM HANDSET 23–31–05

INTERPHONE (cont) 23–40–00

Maintenance Practices 201 5 9138

INTERPHONE AMPLIFIER 23–40–01

PILOT’S CALL BELL 23–40–02

MECHANIC CALL HORN 23–40–03

SERVICE INTERPHONE/PA HANDSET 23–40–04

AUDIO INTEGRATING 23–50–00

AUDIO INTEGRATING AMPLIFIER 23–50–01

AUDIO CONTROL PANELS 23–50–02

FLIGHT COMPARTMENT SPEAKERS 23–50–03

RADIO INTERPHONE (MICROPHONE)

Troubleshooting 101 1 ALL

Removal/Installation 401 1 ALL

Adjustment/Test 501 1 ALL

Inspection/Check 601 1 ALL

VOICE RECORDER 23–70–00

Troubleshooting 101 96 ALL

Maintenance Practices 201 96 ALL

UNDERWATER LOCATOR BEACON 23–70–04

GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The communication systems consist of the following:

(1) Very High Frequency (VHF)

(2) Selective Calling (SELCAL)

(3) Public Address

(5) Audio Integrating

(6) Static Discharging